Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D17-0258 - PINK STORE - REMOTE STOCKROOM
PINK STORE - REM TE STOCKROOM 2800 SOUTHCENTER MALL D17-0258 Parcel No: Address: Project Name: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.eov DEVELOPMENT PERMIT 3597000150 2800 SOUTHCENTER MALL PINK STORE - REMOTE STOCKROOM Permit Number: Issue Date: Permit Expires On: D17-0258 11/2/2017 5/1/2018 Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: License No: Lender: Name: Address: WESTFIELD PROPERTY TAX DEPT PO BOX 130940, CARLSBAD, MN, 92013 TIM SCHENK 1120 E 80 ST #211, BLOOMINGTON, MN, 55420 PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC PO BOX 368 , GLENWOOD, IA, 51534 PINNAC1941K3 ELDER JONES INC 1120 E 80TH ST, BLOOMINGTON, MN, 55420 Phone: (952) 345-6040 Phone: (712) 527-9745 Expiration Date: 4/6/2019 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: BUILD OUT OF A NEWLY DEMISED SPACE IN THE MALL FOR A NEW REMOTE STOCKROOM TO BE USED BY THE PINK STORE. NEW WALLS AND FINISHES AND INSTALLATION OF RACKING UNDER A SEPARATE PERMIT Project Valuation: $17,000.00 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: IIB Electrical Service Provided by: Fees Collected: $752.54 Occupancy per IBC: M Water District: Sewer District: Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: International Fuel Gas Code: 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WAC 296-46B: WA State Energy Code: 2014 2014 2014 2015 Public Works Activities: Channelization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Number: 0 Sewer Main Extension: Storm,Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: No Latp Permit Center Authorized Signature: Date: I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting . this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local I:ws reg lating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development Merm t nd agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: Print Nam Date: //-624+ This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced ithin 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: ***BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 2: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted -for approval. 3: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 4: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 5: Fire retardant treated wood shall have a flame spread of not greater than 25. All materials shall bear identification showing the fire performance rating thereof. Such identification shall be issued by an approved agency having a service for inspection at the factory. 6: Special inspection for sprayed fire-resistant materials applied to structural elements and decks is required. Special inspections shall be based on the fire -resistance design as designated in the approved construction documents. 7: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 8: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 9: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 0 0 10: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 11: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 15: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (3A, 40B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 12: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 13: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 14: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 7.2, 7.3) 16: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1010.1.9) 17: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 18: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1010.1.9.1) 22: Fire protection systems shall be maintained in accordance with the original installation standards for that system. Required systems shall be extended, altered or augmented as necessary to maintain and continue protection whenever the building is altered, remodeled or added to. Alterations to fire protection systems shall be done in accordance with applicable standards. (IFC 901.4) 20: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 19: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2436). 24: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 23: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 25: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 26: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 27: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.11 of the International Building Code. 21: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 28: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 29: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1700 BUILDING FINAL** 0611 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 1400 FIRE FINAL 0409 FRAMING 0502 LATH/GYPSUM BOARD CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov r-) Building Permit No. Project No. Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: (For office u e on CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print** SITE LOCATION Site Address: Z$04 SINCIACe4132 MA- - King Co Assessor's Tax No.: 9ZOV-17 0010 Suite Number: S I'i Floor: 1 New Tenant: Yes ❑..No Tenant Name: PINK Stb2E R€'1 O i stockman PROPERTY OWNER Name: we 5 ci 1 EL0 Address: 2900 schmu enreR. mALL eityTubC.wi (A. State: Wp Zip: el Sin CONTACT PERSON - person receiving all project communication Name: Tim SGuENI-4 Address:, 11.06.80 " sr. 5V 1 Te IA City: itAOm►r ger0/4 State: rn Zip:"....,1,,V Phone:gs,3Lis 6luQ Fax: disZ•QS •4'dl� Email: ..i..i ITIS e et oi tri ants .CQrr`.- GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: 1-03.0. Address: Address: , sV 6,1,3 )iGs exG auto. Architect Name: G ERAL 5 • SiSilC(ntACk. Phone:614.;ass .4638 Fax: City: State: Cityi�FtN AUSAN`{ State: a N Zip4 3 Zip: Phone: Fax: Email: s Moittn er 5heunshock .Gori• Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: H:\Applications\Fonns-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Pennit Application Revised - 8-9-I 1.docx Revised: August 2011 bh ARCHITECT OF RECORD Company Name: M . Eric.frtlz.lr(G Company Name: SlitZEZACNOC44 (e.CI{1(ECM Address: , sV 6,1,3 )iGs exG auto. Architect Name: G ERAL 5 • SiSilC(ntACk. Phone:614.;ass .4638 Fax: Address:1440d west Givnatsax) Cityi�FtN AUSAN`{ State: a N Zip4 3 .4 Phone 14 S'4S • 4 MIFax: 61 4.5ki5.455 Email: s Moittn er 5heunshock .Gori• ENGINEER OF RECORD Company Name: M . Eric.frtlz.lr(G Engineer Name:6l41GE YOSi-1 14 A. "11.01 Address: , sV 6,1,3 )iGs exG auto. City:WE'S txifLvi 1,1,EState: OK Zip:43 (tB 1 Phone:614.;ass .4638 Fax: Email: bmc.Cluv'e. e. mengineerif .(Ark- LENDER/BOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: NIA 6x 6/2-- \/6 %l, Address: // 67 e€27:,--/..7,-- City:1 /A/411p/�/ State:priiktf Zip ,9 Page 1 of 4 BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATI- 206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 11, 440, W Existing Building Valuation: $ Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): Qvt Lo av r QF- A NEN( (kW 1SVO SeiCC l.-' 1-74G tfALL RIO- A PAW (Zemin:: SCICK(Le ten 30 ( Y•500 eq rt4e- Pick SS ZZE • Ncz to �Q UC.S t} 11,0514E3 4- l rc sshcul ri c .i 0 J= YUCK/ r(G �' Ora -Alm. A .S+4~13476. ecn4n r' , Will there be new rack storage? ® Yes ❑.. No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: ® Sprinlders ® Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? 0 Yes a No If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11 " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applications\Fomts-Applications On Line \201I Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC l' Floor t t" t i 111 — 11(3 rV\ 2nd Floor 3'd Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Compact: Handicap: Will there be a change in use? ❑ Yes ❑ No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: ® Sprinlders ® Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ None❑ Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? 0 Yes a No If "yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2" x 11 " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applications\Fomts-Applications On Line \201I Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 I.docx Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INF TION:- 206-433-0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Call before you Dig: 811 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District 0 ...Tukwila ❑...Water District #125 0 ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate ❑...Valley View ❑...Sewer Availability Provided ❑ .. Highline ❑ .. Renton 0 .. Renton ❑ .. Seattle Septic System: ❑ On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with Application (mark boxes which apply): ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34") ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) 0 .. Geotechnical Report 0 ...Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ...Bond 0 .. Insurance 0 .. Easement(s) 0 .. Maintenance Agreement(s) 0 ...Hold Harmless — (SAO) ❑...Hold Harmless — (ROW) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right-of-way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - No Disturbance ❑ .. Right-of-way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right-of-way 0 Non Right-of-way 0 0 ...Total Cut cubic yards 0 .. Work in Flood Zone ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards 0 .. Storm Drainage 0 ...Sanitary Side Sewer ..▪ .Cap or Remove Utilities 0 ...Frontage Improvements ❑ ...Traffic Control 0 ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection Irrigation Domestic Water ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size .. ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ .. Pavement Cut ❑ .. Looped Fire Line WO # WO # WO # ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension Public 0 Private 0 ❑ ...Water Main Extension Public Private 0 ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑...Deduct Water Meter Size FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) 0 ...Water 0 ...Sewer ❑ ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: Water Meter Refund/Billing: Name: Mailing Address: City State Zip Day Telephone: City State Zip HMpplications\Forms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-1 l.docz Revised: August 2011 bh Page 3 of 4 PERMIT APPLICATION- NOTES — Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND. EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER ORA THORIZED AGENT: Signature: ��.,f Date: 9`"1 1 17 Print Name: '(1M Day Telephone: GSZ•34S•G040 Mailing Address: t12.0 tG • '306' SC. S! ISE . C.WCI011r(4Or(. mn: S 54 -len City H:Wpplications\Forms-Applications On Line \2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bh State Zip Page 4 of 4 Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS I PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $7,046.93 D17-0237 Address: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470010 $5,609.98 Credit Card Fee $163.40 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 I $163.40 DEVELOPMENT $5,187.43 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $5,182.93 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 8640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $259.15 TECHNOLOGY FEE I R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $259.15 D17-0258 Address: 2800 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 3597000150 $471.78 Credit Card Fee $13.74 Credit Card Fee I R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $13.74 DEVELOPMENT $436.44 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $431.94 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE B640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $21.60 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 I, $21.60 D17-0265 Address: 2800 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 3597000150 $644.73 Credit Card Fee $18.78 Credit Card Fee R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $18.78 DEVELOPMENT $596.36 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $591.86 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 8640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $29.59 TECHNOLOGY FEE R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $29.59 D17-0286 Address: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470010 $320.44 Credit Card Fee $9.33 Credit Card Fee I R000.369.908.00.00 0.00 $9.33 DEVELOPMENT $296.51 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $292.01 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 6640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $14.60 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R12713 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 : $14.60 $7,046.93 Date Paid: Thursday, November 02, 2017 Paid By: ERIC J MACE Pay Method: CREDIT CARD 03580C Printed: Thursday, November 02, 2017 10:55 AM 1 of 1 L' (SYSTEMS Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID $391.83 D17-0258 Address: Apn: $280.76 DEVELOPMENT $280.76 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.830.00.00 0.00 $280.76 EL17-0735 Address: 646 SOUTHCENTER MALL Apn: 9202470010 $60.28/ ELECTRICAL $60.28 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $60.28 M17-0137 Address: Apn: ,$50.79 MECHANICAL ' $50.79 PLAN CHECK FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R12397 R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $50.79 $391.83 Date Paid: Friday, September 22, 2017 Paid By: ELDER JONES Pay Method: CHECK 78941 Printed: Friday, September 22, 2017 10:38 AM 1 of 1 RSYSTEMS INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila: WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Pili --TTOCK RCXNAAd Type of Inspection: j3UILD►1,16 Itfl1. Address:Date av aviEr: MILL Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: I.2 -261—l7 a.m. m. Requester: Phone No: JApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: o)-- !i.mf►:C- 'ay LDI 6-1+17 n6- 0K- 6-y, P 1301AAD o BOILDh1. fl / I Inspector: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila: WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 D17 -D,25-8 Project: NW Type of Inspection: FFrrvt ik G Address: 2137XU 5607 rtA) 7ZA /14/9-1-L. Date Called: --� Special Instructions: t?a mb i < lee141 Date Wanted:m:J / . -II -17 Z p.n Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: .f -7-v1 N Com-. Inspector: Date: /2-//-/7 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit' PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project:j � S51-0(14/17)(l"/Iv/9-Z' Type of Inspection:tii Address:Contact Suite #: 4i4- Sc- 04 44 L— Person: Special Instructions: Occupancy Type: Phone No.: N Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: . Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: 7:----m-- iii)P Chu Q- Da h e6 m D ceivcall - D Ea?---,) ' SO a7- r-- d I.� A ro4-e--- ew#1_,- A p fil-cry IL) 6 f TS r Gk-- — Pa -a D -r m ,/'/ 4 /it i-- ' ti'-- (2 1 0 if 4 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: . Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: 7714 '.)-21...— Date: 1/3/1 1 Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION: RECORD Retain a copy with pdmit P1-7- TQ1s-K r J)t?. n Address: Suite #: 5j 4- 4-i4 G 04 4 -21..., PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA? FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: 1 //l its/ , _-401M-6-7.-S Sprinklers: Type of Inspection:f 1" /�� Address: Suite #: 5j 4- 4-i4 G 04 4 -21..., Contact Person: - Special Instructions: 1 Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: fieri/t` --7 - PThikfit 1, - Coy/ 'L r- ilatAitirb n Permits: ------Yj vl cc s) 5ej 57/76A173 _cam r SF ---11,-/;4.-(6---)J /v`LL' S7'6S' 2h6- I7f et 6 i -7-e265-- d2&S" akl ._ 17. 25 - Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: c- --- Date://7b1.._- Hrs.: / / $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 Lighting Summary LGT-SUM 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all RI Revised August 2016 Project Info Compliance forms do not requirea password to use. Instructional and calcculatingngcells are write - protected. Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 Applicant Information. Provide contact information for individual who can respond to inquiries about compliance form information provided. For Buildjq epar I Vnt Use e CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 2 2017 PERMIT CENTER Company Name: M -Engineering Company Address: 750 Brooksedge Blvd, Westerville, OH 43081 Applicant Name: Shige Moroi Applicant Phone: 614-839-4639 Applicant Email: smoroi@mengineering.us.com Project Description ❑ New Building ❑ Addition Include PROJ-SUM form (included in envelope forms workbook) 4 Alteration ❑ Plans Included with lighting complliance forms. Building Additions Refer to Section C502.2.6 for additional requirements. rIL :11/11. Compliance Method Interior lighting Exterior lighting Lighting systems in addition area comply with all applicable provisions as a stand alone new construction project ❑ ❑ Lighting systems in addition are combined with existing building lighting systems to demonstrate compliance ❑ ❑ Addition is combined with existing: For interior lighting projects, include new + existing interior lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD or LTG -INT -SPACE form. For exterior lighting projects, include new + existing exterior lighting Tradable and Proposed Non -Tradable Lighting Wattage tables fixture wattage in fixture wattage in LTG -EXT form. Proposed Lighting in Proposed Interior and Exterior Lighting Alterations Select all Lighting Power and Lighting Control elements that apply to the scope of the retrofit project. If project includes a combination of spaces where less than 50% of the existing fixtures are replaced in some spaces, and 50% or more of the fixtures are replaced in others, then provide separate lighting power compliance forms for the two retrofit conditions. Spaces undergoing the same type of retrofit may be combined into one lighting power compliance form. Refer to Section C503.6 for additional requirements. Lighting Power Interior lighting Parking garage Exterior lighting 50% or more of existing are replaced ❑ ❑ ❑ Less than 50% of existing are replaced ❑ ❑ ❑ Lamp and/or ballast replacement only — existing total wattage not increased ❑ ❑ 50% or more replaced - Total lighting power of new + existing -to -remain fixtures shall comply with total LPA per Sections C405.4.2 and C405.5.2. Include new + existing -to -remain fixtures in Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD, LTG -INT -SPACE or LTG -EXT form. Less than 50% replaced - Total lighting power of new + existing -to -remain fixtures shall not exceed the total lighting power prior to alteration. Include new + existing -to -remain fixtures in the Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD, LTG -INT -SPACE or LTG -EXT form. 50% threshold applies to number of luminaires for interior spaces and parking garages, and total installed wattage for exterior luminaires. Lighting Controls Interior lighting Parking garage Exterior lighting All co i .I� Iteraynl >lr c Ds�i4�a /�e GMPLIANCE � DE°Ci�.i' ,S APPROVED OCT 0 2 2017 • City of Tukwila ��� A ` ' xt-etiasystems and existing space uses and configuration are not changed. New wiring installed to serve added fixtures and/or fixtures relocated to new circuit(s) ❑ ❑ ❑ New or moved lighting panel ❑ ❑ ❑ Interior space is reconfigured - luminaires unchanged or relocated only New wiring or circuit - For interior light ng, provide required manual controls per C405.2.3, occupancy sensor controls per C405.2.1, daylight responsive controls per C405.2.4 and application specific lighting controls per C405.2.5. For exterior lighting, provide required controls per C405.2.7. New or moved panel - Provide all applicable lighting controls as noted for New Wiring and automatic time switch controls per C405.2.2. Reconfigured interior space - Provide all required lighting controls that apply to a new interior space. Application specific lighting control provisions per C405.2.5 do not apply to reconfigured spaces. Change of Space Use ❑ Existing interior lighting systems in areas under -going a change in space use are upgraded to comply with LPAs for the new space types per Tables C405.4.2(1) or C405.4.2(2). Identify interior spaces requiring LPD upgrade to the current Code in Proposed Lighting Wattage table in LTG -INT -BLD or LTG -INT -SPACE form. Lighting Summary, con 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 r,LGT-SUM; Revised August 2016 Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 Interior Lighting System Description Interior Lighting Power Allowance Method ❑ Building Area Method " Space -by -space Method Select method used in project. Interior Lighting Controls ❑ All C405.2.1 - C405.2.8 Controls ❑ C405.2 Exception 5 Luminaire Level Lighting Control (LLLC) Additional Efficiency Package Option C406.4 Enhanced digital lighting controls To comply with C406.4, no less than 90% of the total installed interior lighting power shall comply with the required controls per C406.4. Dwelling Unit Interior Lighting Permanently installed interior lighting fixtures in dwelling units comply with: QQ 0 C405.2 thru C405.5 Commercial Lighting Controls and LPA 0 C406.3 High Efficacy Lighting 0 Exterior Lighting System Description Interior Lighting Space -By -Space Method LTG -INT -SPACE 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised August 2016 Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 Calculation Area NOTE 9 Q Q Addition - Q Addition stand alone + existing O Spaces where < 50% of Q Spaces where >_ 50% of Q luminaires are replaced luminaires are replaced For Building Department Use LPA Calculation Type Q Standard Q Additional Efficiency Package Option Q C406.3 Reduced Interior Lighting Power To comply with C406.3, the Proposed LPD shall be 25% lower than the Target LPA. Refer to C406.3 for additional requirements. Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage NOTE 1 5 Location (plan #, room #) Space Type Ceiling Height NOTE 2 Gross Interior Area in ft2 Allowed Watts per ft2 Watts Allowed (watts/ft2 x area) Stockroom Storage room 900 0.500 450 Lobby Art/Exhibit Display Allowance from LTG -INT -DISPLAY NOTE 8 Total Area Retail Display 900 LTG -INT -DISPLAY Allowed Watts Allowance from 450 Proposed Lighting Wattage "'t' Location (plan #, room #) Fixture Description NOTE 4, 5, 6 Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture NOTE 7• - - t J , Watts Proposed Stockroom Existing 2 -lamp Fluorescent fixtures to remain 5 64 320 Proposed Retail Display Lighting from LTG -INT -DISPLAY Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Lighting Total Proposed Watts 32 0 Interior Lighting Power Allowance COMPLIES Note 1 - List all unique space types per Table C405.4.2(2) that occur in the project scope. Select space type category per from drop down menu. Note 2 - Indicate ceiling height for atriums and spaces utilizing the ceiling height adjustment per Table C405.4.2(2), Footnotes d thru f. Note 3 - List all proposed lighting fixtures including exempt lighting equipment and existing -to -remain fixtures. Note 4 - For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. Note 5 - For lighting equipment eligible for exemption per C405.4.1, note exception number and leave Watts/Fixture blank. Note 6 - Existing -to -remain fixtures shall be included in the Proposed Lighting Wattage table in the same manner as new fixtures. Identify as existing in fixture description. Note 7 - For proposed Watts/Fixture enter the luminaire wattage for installed lamp and ballast using manufacturer or other approved source. For luminaires with screw-in lamps, enter the manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not the lamp wattage). For low voltage lighting, enter the wattage of the transformer. For line voltage track/busway systems, enter the larger of the attached luminaire wattage or 50 watts/lineal foot, or enter the wattage limit of permanent current limiting device. Note 8 - Lobby Art/Exhibit Display Allowance is independent of the Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage. Note 9 - Calculation Area Details: a. Lighting fixtures in a building addition may comply as a stand alone project, or they may be combined with the overall existing building lighting systems to demonstrate compliance. Refer to C502.1. b. For alterations and building additions, provide Space Types and gross interior areas in the Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage table. If a building addition will comply as combined with the overall existing building lighting systems, include all applicable existing Space Types and gross interior areas. c. If less than 50% of existing lighting fixtures will be replaced, provide total existing lighting wattage (prior to alteration) in the space provided Lighting, Motor, and Electrical Permit Checklist, Pg. 1 LTG -CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised August 2016 Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS NA C405.2 Lighting controls, general For all lighting fixtures, indicate lighting control method on plans for spaces and lighting zone(s) served, or exception taken Existing to remain, no newwork NA C405.2 Luminaire level lighting controls (LLLC) Indicate on plans all fixtures provided with LLLC in lieu of C405.2 lighting controls; provide description of control capabilities and performance parameters Existing to remain, no new -work NA C405.1 Lighting in dwelling units For permanently installed lighting fixtures in dwelling units, indicate lighting control method on plans for spaces and lighting zone(s) served, or demonstrate compliance with high efficacy exception NA C405.2.3 C405.2.1.1 C405.2.2.2 C405.2.4 C405.2.5 Manual controls Indicate on plans the method of manual lighting control (whether combined with occupancy sensor, automatic light reduction, daylight responsive or specific application controls), location of manual control device and area or specifice application it serves Existing to remain, no newwork NA C405.2.2.1 C405.2.2.2 C405.2.3 Manual interior lighting controls Indicate on plans which method of manual 50% lighting load reduction is provided, or whether lighting load is reduced via occupancy sensors or daylight responsive controls Existing to remain, no newwork NA C405.2.2 Method of automatic shut-off control Indicate on plans the method of automatic shut-off control during unoccupied periods (occupancy sensor or time switch) for all lighting zones; Existing to remain, no newwork Indicate locations where automatic shutoff is provided by other methods (occupancy sensor or digital timer switch) or which time switch control exception applies Existing to remain, no new work NA C405.2.1 C405.2.1.1 Occupancy sensor controls Indicate on plans the spaces served by occupancy sensors; Indicate whether occupancy sensor controls are configured to be manual -on, automatic 50% -on, or serve a space eligible for automatic 100% -on per exception Existing to remain, no newwork NA C405.2.1.2 Occupancy sensor controls - warehouses Indicate aisleways and open areas in warehouse spaces provided with occupancy sensor controls that reduce lighting power by 50% Existing to remain, no new work NA C405.2.6 Digital timer switch Indicate required digital timer switch control function when control is used NA C405.2.2.1 Automatic time switch controls Indicate locations of override switches on plans and the lighting zone(s) served, include area sq. ft. Existing to remain, no new work NA C405.2.4.2 C405.2.4.3 Daylight zones - Sidelight and toplight Indicate primary and secondary sidelight daylight zone areas on plans, include sq. ft.; Indicate toplight daylight zone areas on plans, include sq. ft.; For small vertical fenestration assemblies (rough opening less than 10 percent of primary daylight zone) where daylight responsive controls are not required, provide fenestration area to daylight zone calculation(s) NA . C405.2.4 Daylight responsive controls Indicate on plans lighting zone(s) served by daylight responsive controls; Identify sidelight and toplight daylight zones that are not provided with daylight sensing controls and the exception(s) that apply; Indicate on plans the lighting load reduction method - continuous dimming, or stepped dimming that provides at least two even steps between 0%-100% of rated power; Indicate that daylight sensing controls are configured to completely shut off all controlled lights in the lighting zone NA C405.2.5 Additional controls Specific application lighting controls Identify spaces and lighting fixtures on plans that require Existing to remain, specific application lighting controls per this section no new work NA C405.2.5 - Items 1&2 Display and accent lighting Indicate on plans that display and accent lighting, and display case lighting are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; Indicate manual and automatic lighting control method E05.02 1Li htin • Motor and Electrical Permit Checklist, Pg 2 LTG -CHK 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised August 2016 Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes C405.NA Item 325 rootmismotel guest Indicate method of automatic control - vacancy or captive key control of all installed luminaires and switched receptacles in guest room NA C405.2.5 - Item 4 Supplemental task lighting Indicate method and location of automatic shut-off vacancy control for supplemental task lighting, including under -shelf or under -cabinet lighting NA C405.2.5 - Item 5 Lighting for non- visual applications Indicate on plans eligible non -visual lighting applications, include sq. ft. area of each lighting control zone; Indicate on plans that non -visual lighting are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; Indicate method of manual lighting control and applicable automatic lighting control NA C405.2.5 - Item 6 Lighting equipment for sale or demonstration Indicate on plans that lighting equipment for sale or demonstration are controlled independently from both general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space; Indicate method of manual lighting control and applicable automatic lighting control NA C405.2.5 - Item 7 Means of egress lighting Identify on plans egress fixtures that function as both normal and emergency means of egress illumination; Provide calculation of lighting power density of total egress lighting; If total egress lighting power density is greater than 0.02 W/sq. ft., indicate on plans egress fixtures requiring automatic shut-off during unoccupied periods; Indicate method of automatic shut-off control NA C405.2.7 Exterior lighting controls Indicate on exterior lighting plans and fixture schedules the automatic lighting control method, control sequence, and locations served; For building facade and landscape lighting, indicate automatic controls shut off lighting as a function of dawn/dusk and fixed opening/closing time; For all other exierior lighting, indicate automatic controls shut off lighting as a function of available daylight; include control sequence that also reduces lighting power by at least 30% between 12am-6am, or from 1 hour after closing to 1 hour before opening, or based upon motion sensor NA C405.5.1 Exterior building grounds lighting controls For building grounds fixtures greater than 100 watts, indicate on plans whether fixtures have efficacy greater than 80 lumens or; are controlled by motion sensor, or are exempt lighting per C405.5.2 NA C405.2.5 Area controls Master control switches and circuit power limit Indicate location(s) of master control switch(es) intended to control multiple independent switches; circuit breaker may not be used as a master control switch; Verify that no 20 amp circuit controlled by a single switch or automatic control is loaded beyond 80% NA C406.4 Enhanced digital lighting controls To comply with additional efficiency package option, indicate on plans all interior lighting fixtures that are individually addressed and provided with continuous dimming, or exception taken; Include calculation of percent total installed interior lighting power that is configured with required enhanced lighting control functions (min 90% to comply with additional efficiency package option) NA C405.13 C408.3 Lighting system functional testing If claiming lighting system commissioning exemption provide supporting calculation; Identify applicable commissioning documentation requirements per Section C408 or eligibility for exception; Provide written procedures for functional testing of all automatic controls and describe the expected system response .Lighting Motor, and Electrical Permit Checklist, Pg. 3 LTG -CHK, 2015 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised August 2016 Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes INTERIOR LIGHTING POWER & EFFICACY NA C405.4.1 C405.4.1 C405.4.2 Total connected interior lighting power Include all luminaires in lighting fixture schedule; indicate fixture types, lamps, ballasts, and manufacturer's rated watts per fixture; Existing to remain, no newwork Identify spaces eligible for lighting power exemption on plans and in compliance forms; indicate the exception applied; Identify lighting equipment eligible for lighting power exemption in fixture schedule and in compliance forms; indicate the exception applied; Indicate that exempt lighting equipment is in addition to general area lighting and is controlled independently NA C405.3 Exit signs Indicate location of exit signs on plans and rated watts per fixture in lighting fixture schedule (maximum 5 watts per fixture) Existing to remain, no new -work NA C405.1 Lighting in dwelling units - lamp efficacy If high efficacy exception is applied to permanently installed lighting fixtures in dwelling units, indicate in lighting fixture schedule if lamps in fixtures are high efficacy per R404.1. Calculate percentage of fixtures with high efficacy lamps in project (min 75% to comply with exception). NA C406.3 Reduced lighting power density - dwelling unit lamp efficacy For project with dwelling units, to comply with additional efficiency package option indicate in lighting fixture schedule if lamps in fixtures have efficacy rating of 60 lumens per watt or more. Calculate percentage of fixtures with lamps that have this efficacy rating (min 95% to comply with option). Lighting Power Calculation - Indicate compliance path taken NA C405.4.2.1 Building Area Method Complete required compliance forms — proposed wattage per building area does not exceed maximum allowed wattage per building area. Identify locations of building areas on plans Yes C405.4.2.2 Space -By -Space Method Complete required compliance forms — total proposed wattage does not exceed maximum allowed wattage. Identify locations of space types on plans, including retail display areas, lobby art & exhibit display areas, and ceiling heights as applicable E07.01 Existing to remain, no new work NA C406.3 Reduced lighting power density To comply with additional efficiency package option, demonstrate in compliance forms that total connected interior lighting wattage is 75% less than the total maximum allowed lighting wattage via Building Area Method or Space -By -Space Method EXTERIOR LIGHTING POWER & EFFICACY NA C405.5.2 Total connected exterior lighting power Include all luminaires in lighting fixture schedule; indicate fixture types, lamps, ballasts, and manufacturer's rated watts per fixture; Identify exterior applications eligible for lighting power exemption on plans and in compliance forms; indicate exception applied; Indicate that exempt exterior lighting is controlled independently from non-exempt exterior lighting; include exception claimed for each fixture or group of fixtures under exception category NA Table C405.5.2(1) Exterior lighting zone Indicate building exterior lighting zone as defined by the AHJ NA C405.5.1 Exterior building grounds lighting For building grounds fixtures rated at greater than 100 watts that are complying based on efficacy, indicate rated lamp efficacy (in lumens per watt) in fixture schedule NA C405.5.2 Exterior lighting power calculations Complete required compliance form — proposed wattage for exterior lighting plus base site allowed does not exceed maximum allowed Lighting, 2015 Washington Motor, and Electrical Permit Checklist, Pg. 4 LTG -CHK Revised August 2016 State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2, R3, R4 over 3 stories and all R1 Project Title: Victoria's Secret Remote Storage - Southcenter Date 9/15/2017 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and electrical requirements in the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicability (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Location in Documents Building Department Notes MOTORS & TRANSFORMERS NA C405.6 Electrical tranformers Include electrical transformer schedule on electrical plans; indicate transformer size, efficiency, or exception taken NA C405.7 Dwelling unit electrical energy consumption Indicate on electrical plans that each dwelling unit in Group R-2 has a separate electrical energy meter NA C405.8 Electric motor efficiency Include all motors, including fractional hp motors, in electric motor schedule on electrical plans; indicate hp, rpm, rated efficiency, or exception applied NA C405.9.1 Elevator cabs For luminaires in each elevator cab, provide calculated average efficacy of combined fixtures that indicates efficacy is not less than 35 lumens per watt; Indicate rated watts per cfm for elevator cab ventilation fans do not exceed 0.33 watts per cfm; Indicate automatic controls that de -energize lighting and ventilation fans when elevator is stopped and unoocupied for a period of 15 minutes or more NA C405.9.2 Escalators and moving walks Indicate escalators comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44; automatic controls are configured to reduce operational speed to the minimum permitted when not in use NA C405.9.3 Regenerative drive Indicate all one-way down or reversible escalators are provided with a variable frequency regenerative drive NA C405.10 Controlled receptacles Identify all controlled and uncontrolled receptables on electrical plans in each space in which they are required; include receptacle configuration such as spacing between controlled and uncontrolled, duplex devices, etc; Indicate on plans whether the method of automatic control for each controlled receptable zone is by occupant sensor or programmable time -of -day control If "no" is selected for any question, provide explanation: End of Lighting, Motor & Transformer Permit Documents Checklist CPERMIT COORD COPY Q PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D17-0258 DATE: 09/25/17 PROJECT NAME: PINK STORE — REMOTE STOCKROOM SITE ADDRESS 2800 SOUTHCENTER MALL — S14 X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter #, Revision # before Permit Issued Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: f (/ Building Division Public Works Mk 4WL q--,)-7-4 Fire Prevention U Structural El LA/ a3 A1/41 -1-A-1 Planning Division NI Permit Coordinator ❑ PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable n (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: 09/26/17 Structural Review Required DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) Notation: DUE DATE: Approved with Conditions Denied (ie: Zoning Issues) 10/24/17 REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire ❑ Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC° Home Espanol Contact Safety & Health Claims & Insurance Washington State Department of ks Labor & Industries Search L&I A -Z Index. Help Page 1 of 2 My L&I Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Owner or tradesperson Principals ESTERLING, VONNIE RAE, PRESIDENT Doing business as PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC WA UBI No. 601 744 941 Parent company PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC. P.O. BOX 368 22060 221ST STREET GLENWOOD, IA 51534 712-527-9745 Business type Corporation Governing persons GREG A ESTERLING VONNIE R ESTERLING; MONTGOMERY C DIXON; GREG A ESTERLING; DOUGALS J HOFFMAN; License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor License specialties GENERAL License no. PINNACI941 K3 Effective — expiration 05/31/2006— 04/06/2019 Bond ................ MERCHANTS BONDING CO (MUTUAL) Bond account no. WA16600 Active. Meets current requirements. $12,000.00 Received by L&I Effective date 05/31/2006 05/26/2006 Expiration date Until Canceled Insurance ..._........._............. Employers Mutual Casualty Co $1,000,000.00 Policy no. 1D24213 Received by L&I Effective date 03/28/2016 04/01/2015 Expiration date 04/01/2018 Insurance history Savings No savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=601744941 &LIC=PINNACI941 K3&SAW= 11/2/2017 PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Lawsuits against the bond or savings No lawsuits against the bond or savings acc.as during the previous 6 year period. L&I Tax debts No L&I tax debts are recorded for this contractor license during the previous 6 year period, but some debts may be recorded by other agencies. License Violations ........................................................ No license violations during the previous 6 year period. Workers' comp Do you know if the business has employees? If so, verify the business is up-to-date on workers' comp premiums. This company has multiple workers' comp accounts. Active accounts L&I Account ID 927,014-01 .............................:... Doing business as PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION INC Estimated workers reported Quarter 3 of Year 2017 "0" Workers L&l account contact T2 / MATT PEDERSEN (360)902-5476 • Email: PEDM235@Ini.wa.gov Track this contractor Account is current. Public Works Strikes and Debarments Verify the contractor is eligible to perform work on public works projects. Contractor Strikes ....................................................... No strikes have been issued against this contractor. Contractors not allowed to bid ........................_..._.........._.........._.................................... No debarments have been issued against this contractor. Workplace safety and health No inspections during the previous 6 year period. Page 2 of 2 C! Washington State Dept. of Labor & Industries. Use of this site is subject to the laws of the state of Washington. Help us improve https://secure.lni.wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=601744941 &LIC=PINNACI941 K3 &SAW= 11/2/2017 / / / / / /////////////////////////////////// 0 FREESTANDING SHELVES - ANCHOR EACH POST TO 0 5I4ELVES AT WALL - ANCHOR EACH POST TO THE 1/4" DIA. KWIK BOLT 11 (14ILTI) WITH 2" EMBEDMENT 1/4-20 LOCK NUT - 1/4 WASHER NOTE: G.C. 15 TO INSTALL BRACING AND FURRING STRIPS FOR 5I•IELVING UNITS. SHELVING UNITS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY. ASSEMBLY FOR SHELVING UNITS ARE PER MANUFACTURE'S INSTRUCTIONS. NOTE: (1) ROW OF FURRING IS TO BE INSTALLED 24" DOWN FROM TOP OF SHELVING UNIT POST IN ALL SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES. FOR SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E, * F AN ADDITIONAL ROW OF FURRING 15 TO BE INSTALLED AT 48" A.F.F. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. WHEN WALL 15 CONCRETE BLOCK, ATTACK FURRING TO CONCRETE W/ (3) 3/16" x 3 1/2" LONG MASONRY SCREWS @ 16" O.C. CL OF STUDS MAX 16" O.C. SH REMSHOCK Shremshock Architects, Inc. 7400 W. Campus Rd. Suite 150 New Albany, OH 43054 t: 614 545 4550 1 f: 614 545 4555 1 shremshock.com Gerald S. hremshock, Architect Timothy Shremshock, Architect CONT. 2 X 6 (SPF #2, OR DF #2) FURRING STRIP (USE FRT WHERE REQUIRED 8Y CODE). BOTTOM 514ELF CONT. 2 X 6 (SPF #2, OR DF #2) FURRING STRIP AT WALL FOR SECURING SHELVING. ATTACH W/ (3) #12 X 3" LONG NTL SCREWS. ALIGN SCREWS WITH WALL STUDS W/ MAXIMUM SPACING OF 16" O.C. (USE FRT WHERE REQ'D BY CODE) 14 GA. ANCHOR CLIP COUNTER SINK FURRING SCREWS FLUSH WITH BUT NOT LOWER THAN THE SURFACE OF THE FURRING. INSTALL WASHERS WITH THE SCREWS WHERE EVER FURRING WOOD 15 DETERMINED TO BE SOFT. ELEVATION (3) EQUALLY SPACED #12 x 3" LONG STEEL SCREWS. COUNTER SINK SCREWS FLUSH W/ BUT NO LOWER THAN THE SURFACE OF THE FURRING. INSTALL WASHERS AT LOCATIONS WHERE FURRING IS SOFT. ALIGN SCREWS IN/ WALL STUDS, MAX. SPACING OF 16" O.C. INSTALL STANDARD W/ #14 X 2" LONG FH WOOD SCREWS IN EA. HOLE THAT ALIGNS WITH A RUN OF FURRING. cn w EVERY "L' OR "T" POST AT WALL SHALL BE ATTACHED TO FURRING STRIP IN/ #12 x 2" LONG HEX HEAD WOOD SCREWS. (USE (2) SCREWS AT "L" POST AND (4) SCREWS AT "T" POST) RIVET RACK - ANCHOR DET DRYWALL SCREWS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE SHELF 51-1OWN CUT AWAY FOR CLARITY. WALL STANDARD DRYWALL SCREWS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE IL 3" = 1'-0" M RIVET RACK - FURRING ATTACHMENT 09.0913 3" : 1'-0" WALL MOUNTED SHELVING H FURRING ATTACHMENT DETAIL 09 09.13 1 1/2" : 1'-0" 05D-A1401-M00-DETL 05D-A1401-HOO-DETL 05D-A1401-D00-DETL NOTES: THIS BLOCKING IS FOR ELEMENTS WITH A MAXIMUM VERTICAL LOAD OF 100 LBS PER LINEAR FOOT AT A MAXIMUM OF 7" FROM THE FACE OF WALL. METAL STUD FRAMING. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND INDIVIDUAL DETAILS FOR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR METAL STUD FRAMING GAUGE REQUIREMENTS. NOTE: DETAILS SHOWN ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION. REFER TO MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 3. REFER TO INDIVIDUAL DETAILS AND MFG INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUIRED SCREW TYPE TO ATTACH ITEMS TO BLOCKING. WHEN NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED USE MIN. #8 SELF TAPPING SHEET METAL SCREWS. NOTE: SHELF SUPPORTS TO BE INSTALLED "UPSIDE-DOWN" SO THAT THE WIRE SHELVES SIT ON TOP OF SUPPORT AND DO NOT CREATE A LIP WHICH PREVENTS SLIDING BOXES OFF OF THE SHELF. THE WIRE SHELF IS INSTALLED WITH THE TOP WIRE RUNNING FRONT TO BACK. THE BOTTOM SHELF SUPPORTS FOR PARTICLE BOARD SHELVES SHALL BE INSTALLED "RIGHT-SIDE-UP" TO BETTER SUPPORT THE SHELF AND 50 AS NOT TO REDUCE THE GAP BETWEEN THE SHELVES. NOTE: AT F -4/M-4 SHELVING, EXTRA SIDE AND BACK BRACKETS ARE PROVIDED TO MATCH F -3/M-3. ONLY TWO FRONT BRACKETS ARE PROVIDED. NOTE: REFER TO THE FLOOR FIXTURE PLAN ON A02.XX FOR THE ACTUAL LAYOUT OF THE SHELVING. LOOSE PVC TOP CAP 1/4" DIAMETER THRU BOLT IN/ TOGGLE (TYP. OF 2) 2X4 WOOD BLOCKING 3'-6" A.F.F.T.Q. TUBE THE STORE WILL BE SENT A 5% OVERAGE OF SHELVES, SHELF SUPPORTS, HANGBARS, AND BRACKETS. PAN HEAD SCREW TO SECURE STRAP 3/4" x 2" WOOD TRIM SECURED TO BLOCK W/ #8 WOOD SCREWS G.C. MUST PROVIDE AND ATTACH A LABEL (WITH CLEAR TAPE) STATING: z 0 t!) Z 0 V z t1) W 0 W Ce 0 t) L r C0 x LL • 0 0 0 N.r (0 0 0. H THIS TUBE CONTAINS STORE DRAWINGS AND IS NOT TO BE REMOVED WITHOUT THE CONSENT OF THE STORE MANAGER. THANK YOU. 8" DIAMETER PVC TUBE 6" X 18 GA. BACKING TRACK. LENGTH AS REQUIRED FOR INDIVIDUAL ELEMENTS. REFER TO SPECIFIC DETAILS. PVC BOTTOM CAP GLUED IN PLACE SPECIFIC SHELF/HANGBAR LAYOUT VARIES PER UNIT. ELEVATION UPON COMPLETION OF PROJECT, GENERAL CONTRACTOR MUST RUN A NEW SET OF PLANS OF THE COMPLETED STORE DRAWINGS (ARCHITECTURAL, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, STRUCTURAL) AND PLACE INTO PLAN TUBE HOLDER CONSTRUCTED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. BACKING - HEAVY DUTY 05D-A1201-FOO-DETL Ft 10.28.13 PLAN TUBE HOLDER 05D-A1401-COO-DETL 0q.0q.13 NOTES: 1. THIS BLOCKING 15 FOR ELEMENTS WITH A MAXIMUM VERTICAL LOAD OF 40 LB5 PER LINEAR FOOT AT A MAXIMUM OF 7" FROM FACE OF WALL. 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR METAL STUD FRAMING GAUGE REQUIREMENTS. METAL STUD FRAMING. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND INDIVIDUAL DETAILS FOR SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT SIDE FRONT F -3/M-3 BRA SHELVING (1) MDF SHELF, (9) WIRE SHELVES SIDE F -4/M-4 HANG FRONT SIDE 0 '' FRONT F -5/M-5 UTILITY/BEAUTY (1) MDF SHELF, (4) WIRE SHELVES O==-zz Z3C/y-2 O O W O E ZF 1 di =( 0.. N W = S = 0.c6 Z0Z 0 OCE2aui W 23yN m W' � O=I-T. W 3 = � w a = W = « eE U = 3 O L. . W Ln O � a6 LL C C Z W W o O 7 La 15 = W W <0 0- cmZ W EE 4 0 0 ao=a=� �z3c3'o� Z p C W 5 O W m :Et] C W W � 4�1.. N _OOH = OS Z N CA W O O H W I O 0mE. W > per. NW 2 i=<C<O NaO Z p GZ0 ac ZFQ dOp L9 Li si O1/, 6-`12 E a da0L..NUUO N8yO1- n Hja = Q O W n = W > O N 9 Z K 0 = _ syas2<=� = 0 o I -n 2 O �- V �' O U U LL N C O W O 0 d Q ^ 3 > V H a La eecn N Qy .R i= WW, V O O ', . C Z ED O ,:= = C Z ozli =i y =3 326IN O yHj U E M U O J 2 U m 8 W = W E 8' HIGH SHELVING FOR 10'-O" - 11'-9" CEILING HEIGHT cg 3. REFER TO INDIVIDUAL DETAILS AND MFG INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUIRED SCREW TYPE TO ATTACH ITEMS TO BLOCKING. WHEN NOT SPECIFICALLY INDICATED USE MIN. #8 SELF TAPPING SHEET METAL SCREWS. NOTE: AT F -4/M-4 SHELVING, EXTRA SIDE AND BACK BRACKETS ARE PROVIDED TO MATCH F -3/M-3. ONLY TWO FRONT BRACKETS ARE PROVIDED. 000 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 022011 (1) SHELF (2) SHELVES OFFICE ,`,TRAINING RM (2) SHELVES iY.'L (1) SHELF 113 111 ■ ■uj CO Co FlemC 00 co 1— w WNU 0 3 �—Zo� UN cza 0 if_ g In(01- 6" X 18 GA. BACKING PLATE. LENGTH AS REQUIRED FOR INDIVIDUAL ELEMENTS. REFER TO SPECIFIC DETAILS. SPECIFIC SHELF/HANGBAR LAYOUT VARIES PER UNIT. BACKING - MEDIUM DUTY W i TWW ±18 3/4" ao ±15 1/ 05D-A1201-E00-DETL 10.28.13 SIDE FRONT F -3/M-3 BRA SHELVING (1) MDF SHELF, (12) WIRE SHELVES SIDE 0 F -4/M-4 HANG FRONT (1) MDF SHELF, (1) WIRE SHELF, (5) HANGBARS SIDE 0 FRONT F -5/M-5 UTILITY/BEAUTY (1) MDF SHELF, (5) WIRE SHELVES MOBILE CARRIAGE BACK/BACK FIXED SHELVES SIM. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CONNECTION TO STRUCTURE AB. 10' HIGH SHELVING FOR 12'-0" CEILING HEIGHT (5) SHELVES FULL HGHT PROJECT INFORMATION: w �-- O w d O N 0 Lu 0 a Zots C9 W G I=1 CO (5) SHLVS SHALLOW FULL HGHT (3) SHLVS W/HANG HIGH UTILITY (2) SHELVES REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE AT TENANT SEPARATION WALLS G.C. TO PROVIDE 1"X2" WIRE MESH FROM TERMINATION OF GYP. BD. TO DECK ABOVE FOR SECURITY SCREEN. NOTE: T14I5 DETAIL MAY BE USED FOR A TENANT SEPARATION WALLS IN BUILDINGS WITH A COMMON AIR PLENUM. REFER TO CLG PLAN+ B.O. CEILING LINE OF CLG. REFER TO CEILING PLANS. 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYP BD SHEATHING, BOTH SIDES OVER METAL STUD FRAMING. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR GAUGE REQUIREMENTS. CAULK AT WALL PERIMETER ON BOTH SIDES CONT MTL TRACK SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS (E) SLAB ON GRADE OR FIRE -RESISTANCE RATED FLOOR/CEILING ASSEMBLY FINISHED FLOOR NOTE: CONSTRUCT PER U.L. DESIGN # U-465 FIXED AND MOBILE SHELVING KEYNOTES FIXED AND MOBILE GENERAL NOTES O DOUBLE RIVET SHELF SUPPORT. CLEARANCES SHOWN ARE APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS TAKEN FROM T.O. SUPPORT TO B.O. SUPPORT. SEE BOX NOTE ABOVE FOR SUPPORT ORIENTATION. O LADDER HOOK TO BE INSTALLED AT THE END OF EVERY OTHER MOBILE UNIT OR RUN OF FIXED SHELVING. HEIGHT MAY ADJUST 2 NOTCHES (±3") TO AVOID SHELF BRACKETS 0 WIRE SHELF (2"X4" GRID). INSTALL WITH TOP WIRE RUNNING FRONT TO BACK. SEE BOX NOTE ABOVE FOR ORIENTATION. ® HANGBAR SUPPORT. 5 1 1/4" DIAMETER HANGBAR. STAGGER PLACEMENT PER EXAMPLE SHOWN IN SIDE ELEVATION. O N G SH IN CA PROVI VENDOR. PLACEONEAT6. © D OT LIMB ONSHELVING" DECAL PR V DED BY VE �D R. THE FACE OF EACH UNIT ON A SHELF SUPPORT AT t80 A.F.F. U.O.N. CI FLOOR ANCHORS - REFER TO DETAIL M/A14.01 FOR QTY. AND INSTALLATION. ® ATTACH SHELVING UNIT TO WOOD FURRING AT WALL PER DETAIL 14/A14.01. G.C. TO PAINT FURRING STRIPS TO MATCH WALL FINISH. O MOBILE UNIT CARRIAGE ON FLAT TRACK SYSTEM IN/ ANTI -TIP. CI MOBILE UNIT CRANK SYSTEM WHERE OCCURS. REFER TO CONSTRUCTION FLOOR PLAN. it MOBILE UNIT PULL HANDLE. INSTALL ONE PER EACH MOBILE RUN WITH OR WITHOUT CRANK SYSTEM. 12 BACK-TO-BACK SHELVING UNITS (MOBILE OR FIXED) ARE TO BE FASTENED TO EACH OTHER PER MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. 101 MOBILE UNIT FOOTBRAKE ASSEMBLY TO BE INSTALLED (1) PER MOBILE RUN WITHOUT CRANK SYSTEM ONLY. 14 PARTICLE BOARD BOTTOM SHELF AT ALL UNITS. SEE BOX NOTE ABOVE FOR SUPPORT ORIENTATION. CLEAR SHELVING DIMENSIONS ARE TAKEN FROM TOP OF SHELF SUPPORT TO 15 BOTTOM OF NEXT SHELF I SUPPORT. THIS DIMENSION IS REQUIRED TO REMAIN CLEAR IN ORDER TO FIT THE NECESSARY 130X SIZE. NOTE: THE WIRE SHELVES WHICH SIT ATOP THE SUPPORTS INTRUDE UPON THIS CLEARANCE, HOWEVER THIS WAS BEEN ACCOUNTED FOR. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. THESE DETAILS ARE FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY. G.C. TO INSTALL SHELVING UNITS PER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES. ALL FRONT SHELVING ELEVATIONS ARE SHOWN AS FIXED UNITS. SHELF/ HANGBAR LAYOUT IS IDENTICAL FOR MOBILE UNITS, PLUS THE CARRIAGE. THE TOPS OF ALL SHELVING UNITS SHALL BE MIN. 18" CLEAR OF BOTTOM OF SPRINKLER HEADS. NOTE: THIS DOES NOT NECESSARILY MEAN FROM BOTTOM OF CEILING. ALL SHELF FRAMES, MOUNTING HARDWARE, BRACKETS, HANGRODS, ACCESSORIES, ETC. ARE SUPPLIED BY LSD$C AND INSTALLED BY G.C. G.C. TO SURVEY AND EVALUATE CONDITION AND LEVEL OF STOCKROOM FLOOR FOR TRACK ATTACHMENT. CONSULT WITH MFG. FOR FLOOR TOLERANCE. G.C.SEQUENCEOF E TO PLAN EVENTS AND P R G' MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS TO ENSURE A FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM. WALL ATTACHED SHELVING KEYNOTES 2" X 6" WOOD FURRING. REFER TO DETAIL D/A14.01 016" DEEP PARTICLE BD. SHELF IN/ 16" BRACKET ® 12" DEEP PARTICLE BD. SHELF W/ 12" BRACKET ® NOT USED O WALL STANDARDS - G.G. TO CUT TO LENGTH. G.G. TO INSTALL IN -WALL METAL BLOCKING PER DETAIL E/Al2.01. SPACE BLOCKING AS INDICATED. O 24" WIDE SI-IELF FOR TELEPHONE. REFER TO PLAN. G.C. TO PROVIDE 2" CHAMFER AT ALL � OUTSIDE CORNERS. 1/2" QUARTER ROUND ROUTED AT TOP EDGE ® STANDARDS IN TOILET ROOM TO BE INSTALLED AT 18" 0.C. WHERE MOUNTED TO METAL BLOCKING ATTACH STANDARDS IN/ #12 X 2" LONG CS STEEL SCREWS IN EVERY HOLE. CI MANAGER'S OFFICE DESK 11 (2) SHELF CLIPS TO BE INSTALLED PER 12" AND 160 BRACKETS, (3) CLIPS FOR 18" BRACKETS. 12 IF INSTALLED AT CEILING LOWER THAN ID' -0", THEN REDUCE HEIGHT OFF OF FLOOR ACCORDINGLY. 13 1 MOO HANGBAR W/ 16" BRACK RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 2 201 PERIVIIT ER SHELF HOLD DOWN CLIP LOCATIONS GENERAL NOTES 09/15/17 AM HMG SKM 1. ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE FOR PARTICLE BOARD IS 3/4"% 3/WHITE MELAMINE IN/ BULLNOSE EDGE FRONT AND SIDES. U5F FRT PLY. IF REQ. BY CODE. 2. G.C. TO FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL SHELVES WITH SANDED SURFACES TO PREVENT SNAGGING. DO NOT PAINT. 3. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE PERMITTED ON ANY OF THE MATERIALS OR HARDWARE SPECIFIED IN THESE DETAILS. 4. G.C. TO PROVIDE WOOD SUPPORT SPLICES AT ALL SEAMS AND INSIDE CORNERS. 5. WALL STANDARDS TO BE INSTALLED AT 24" 0.C. AND 6" FROM EACH END U.0.N. SHELVING & GENERAL DETAILS DRAWING NUMBER: FIRE PARTITION - 1 HOUR W/ COMMON RETURN AIR PLENUM 05D-A1201-X02-DETL 08.14.12 FIXED AND MOBILE SHELVING DETAILS 05D-A1401-E00-DETL 10.2q.14 WALL MOUNTED SHELVING DETAIL 05D-A1401-A00-MTL A 11.04.14 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 007200 GENERAL CONDITIONS 007300 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 01: 011000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY 013000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016200 PRODUCT OPTIONS 017000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 017300 _ EXECUTION 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 03: CONCRETE 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 034900 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED CEMENT 039250 CONCRETE RESURFACING AND REHABILITATION DIVISION 04: MASONRY 042200 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 044000 STONE ASSEMBLIES DIVISION 05: METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 057000 DECORATIVE METAL DIVISION 06: 061053 062000 064000 061600 DIVISION 07: 071416 072100 072400 075900 076000 078100 078400 079200 079513 DIVISION 08: 081000 081400 081433 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY FINISH CARPENTRY ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SHEATHING THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION WATERPROOF MEMBRANE THERMAL INSULATION EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (El FS) ROOF REPAIRS FLASHING AND SHEET METAL APPLIED FIREPROOFING FIRE STOPPING JOINT SEALANT EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES OPENINGS METAL DOORS AND FRAMES WOOD DOORS STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 083100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 083326 OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES 083516 FOLDING GRILLES 084113 ALUMINUM- FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 085200 WOOD WINDOWS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088100 GLASS GLAZING 088300 MIRRORS DIVISION 09: 092900 092950 093000 095123 0'15323 096429 096516 096519 096800 097216 0'17216.16 098100 099000 DIVISION 10: 102113 102613 102800 105100 105626 107313 FINISHES GYPSUM BOARD GYPSUM BOARD METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS TILING ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING RESILIENT TILE FLOORING CARPETING VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING RIGID SHEET VINYL WALL COVERINGS (F.R.P. PANELS ) ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PAINTING AND COATING SPECIALTIES TOILET COMPARTMENTS CORNER GUARDS TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES LOCKERS MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING AWNINGS DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS 124813 WALK -OFF MATS AND FRAMES DIVISION 13: SPECIAL. CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 14: CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 THRU 20: RESERVED DIVISION 21: FIRE SUPPRESSION (REFER TO SPRINKLER DRAWINGS) DIVISION 22: PLUMBING (REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS) DIVISION 23: HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 24: RESERVED DIVISION 25: INTEGRATED AUTOMATION DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL (REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 27: COMMUNICATIONS (REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 29: RESERVED DIVISION 30 THRU 39: SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE (NOT USED) DIVISION 40 THRU 49: PROCESS EQUIPMENT (INDUSTRIAL) (NOT USED) DIVISION 00: PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS SECTION 007200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS: OWNER'S STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION ARE INCORPORATED INTO THE CONTROLLING CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. 1. A COPY WILL BE MADE AVAILABLE BY OWNER UPON REQUEST. SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS A. CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS: GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS CONTAIN INFORMATION NECESSARY FOR COMPLETION OF EVERY PART OF PROJECT. 5. DIVISION 1: WHERE PROVISIONS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS RELATE TO PROJECT ADMINISTRATION OR WORK-RELATED REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT, THOSE PARAGRAPHS ARE EXPANDED IN DIVISION 1. C. MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS: 1. APPROVED: REQUIRES WRITTEN ACTION BY OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER AS DOES TERMS SUCH AS DIRECTED, SELECTED, REQUIRED, ORDERED, DESIGNATED, ACCEPTED, ACCEPTABLE, AND SATISFACTORY. 2. FURNISH: SUPPLY AND DELIVER TO PROJECT, UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED IN GREATER DETAIL. 3. INSTALL: OPERATIONS AT PROJECT, FROM INSPECTING AND UNLOADING, TO COMPLETION IN PLACE, READY FOR INTENDED USE. 4. PROVIDE: FURNISH AND INSTALL, COMPLETE AND READY FOR INTENDED USE, UNLESS OTHERWISE STATED IN GREATER DETAIL. DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 011000 SUMMARY A. PROJECT CONSISTS OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE LBRANDS STORE AS INDICATED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1. ITEMS NOTED "NIC" (NOT IN CONTRACT) WILL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY OWNER OR UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT 2. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: NOT IN CONTRACT; OWNER WILL PROVIDE FOR HANDLING OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACT PRIOR TO THIS PROJECT. IF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ARE SUSPECTED, NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY. 5. WORK SEQUENCE: COORDINATE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, OPERATIONS AND USE OF PREMISES WITH BUILDING MANAGEMENT. C. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES: LIMIT TO AREAS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS AND AS SPECIFIED; LIMIT ACCESS AS DIRECTED BY OWNER. D. LINES AND LEVELS ENGINEERING: ESTABLISH LINES AND LEVELS BY USE OF RECOGNIZED ENGINEERING PRACTICES. LOCATE AND PROTECT CONTROL AND REFERENCE POINTS. E. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: PROJECT 14A5 BEEN DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE CODES. COMPLY WITH CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION. INFORM OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER OF DISCREPANCIES OBSERVED OR NOTED BY OTHERS. F. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH STANDARDS REFERENCED EXCEPT WHERE MORE RIGID REQUIREMENTS ARE REQUIRED BY CODE. DATE OF STANDARD IS TWAT IN EFFECT AS OF DATE DOCUMENTS ARE ISSUED, EXCEPT WHEN SPECIFIC DATE IS SPECIFIED. G. OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS: OWNER WILL ARRANGE AND PAY FOR PRODUCT AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS TO BE DELIVERED TO PROJECT SITE FOR CONTRACTOR INSTALLATION. 1. CONTRACTOR SHALL INSPECT, RECEIVE, UNLOAD, STORE, INSTALL AND FINISH. SECTION 013000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. PROCEDURES: CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW AND APPROVE SUBMITTALS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING TO OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER. INFORM OWNER'S PM IN WRITING AT TIME OF SUBMISSION OF ANY PROPOSED DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1. REVIEW OF SUBMITTALS BY OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER Sl -TALL BE FOR DESIGN CONCEPT ONLY AND SHALL NOT BE CONSTRUED AS APPROVING DEPARTURES FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. B. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE: BAR CHARTS OR CONTRACTOR'S STANDARD COMPUTERIZED SCHEDULES, UPDATED REGULARLY, NO LESS THAN MONTHLY. C. SCHEDULE OF VALUES: AIA FORM G703 OR APPROVED FORMAT. D. SHOP DRAWINGS: SUBMIT ONE REPRODUCIBLE AND TWO PRINTS; PROVIDE FOR CUSTOM PRODUCTS AND PRODUCTS NOT FULLY IDENTIFIED BY PRODUCT DATA. E. PRODUCT DATA: SUBMIT NUMBER REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR PLUS TWO FOR OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER; INDICATE ITEM TO BE USED WHERE DATA FOR MORE THAN ONE PRODUCT OR OPTION IS INCLUDED; PROVIDE FOR EACH STOCK MANUFACTURED ITEM. F. SAMPLES: PROVIDE SAMPLES FOR EACH TYPE OF EXPOSED FINISH, COLOR, AND TEXTURE; MINIMUM SIZE 6", MAXIMUM SIZE 12" UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED; SUBMIT ONE SAMPLE FOR OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER TO RETAIN, ONE SAMPLE FOR FIELD OFFICE, AND NUMBER REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES: PROVIDE TWO. COORDINATE SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK; CONCEAL PIPES, DUCTS, AND WIRING IN FINISHED AREAS; COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF FIXTURES AND OUTLETS WITH FINISHES. 1. MAKE PROVISIONS FOR OWNER INSTALLED ITEMS AND FOR SEPARATE CONTRACTS. 2. VERIFY CHARACTERISTICS OF INTERRELATED OPERATING EQUIPMENT ARE COMPATIBLE; 3. COORDINATE WORK HAVING INTERDEPENDENT RESPONSIBILITIES FOR INSTALLING, CONNECTION TO, AND PLACING OF SUCH EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE. PROJECT MEETINGS: SCHEDULE AND ADMINISTER MEETINGS, MAKE PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT, PREPARE AGENDA, PRESIDE AT MEETINGS AND RECORD MINUTES. G. H. SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL: MAINTAIN QUALITY CONTROL OVER SUPPLIERS, MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS, SERVICES, SITE CONDITIONS, AND WORKMANSHIP, TO PRODUCE WORK OF SPECIFIED QUALITY. 5. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: WHEN SPECIFIED IN RESPECTIVE SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, REQUIRE MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER TO HAVE QUALIFIED PERSONNEL PROVIDE ON-SITE OBSERVATIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. 1. REPRESENTATIVE SHALL: a. OBSERVE FIELD CONDITIONS, INCLUDING CONDITIONS OF SURFACES. OBSERVE QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP AND METHODS OF INSTALLATION. b. PROVIDE RECOMMENDATIONS FOR INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP. c. WHERE REQUIRED, START, TEST, AND ADJUST EQUIPMENT AS APPLICABLE. d. SUBMIT WRITTEN REPORT TO OWNER'S PM OF OBSERVATIONS. C. MOCK-UPS: CONSTRUCT FIELD SAMPLES AND MOCK-UPS ON SITE AS REQUIRED. D. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES: TESTING SHALL BE BY AN APPROVED TESTING LABORATORY, AS REQUIRED BY SPECIFICATIONS AND BY APPLICABLE CODES. 1. TESTING REQUIRED WILL BE PAID FOR BY OWNER EXCEPT RETESTING WILL BE PAID FOR BY CONTRACTOR WHERE REQUIRED BY FAILURE TO MEET ORIGINAL TESTS. 2. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH MATERIALS AND SAMPLES FOR TESTS AND SHALL ASSIST TESTING LABORATORY AS REQUESTED. SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. GENERAL: PROVIDE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS AS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE PROJECT IN ACCORDANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TO CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF APPLICABLE AUTHORITIES. 1. CONTACT GOVERNING AUTHORITIES TO ESTABLISH EXTENT OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS REQUIRED BY AUTHORITIES. B. TEMPORARY POWER: PROVIDE POWER SERVICE AND LIGHTING REQUIRED FOR OPERATIONS, WITH BRANCH WIRING AND DISTRIBUTION BOXES LOCATED TO ALLOW SERVICE AND LIGHTING BY MEANS OF CONSTRUCTION -TYPE POWER CORDS. C. TEMPORARY WATER AND SANITARY SERVICES: PROVIDE AND MAINTAIN REQUIRED DRINKING WATER AND SANITARY FACILITIES WITH ENCLOSURES. D. NOISE, DUST, AND POLLUTION CONTROL: PROVIDE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY TO COMPLY WITH LOCAL REQUIREMENTS FOR NOISE, DUST, AND POLLUTION CONTROL. E. BARRIERS: PROVIDE AS REQUIRED TO PROTECT ADJACENT PROPERTIES FROM DAMAGE FROM OPERATIONS; AND AS REQUIRED BY GOVERNING AUTHORITIES. 1. SOLID WOOD CONSTRUCTION FENCE; EQUIP WITH GATES WITH LOCKS. 2. SECURITY: MAINTAIN SITE AND MATERIALS SECURE DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD. F. CLEANING: CONTROL ACCUMULATION OF WASTE MATERIALS AND RUBBISH; DISPOSE OF OFF-SITE AT INTERVALS APPROVED BY OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER AND ACCEPTABLE TO APPLICABLE AUTHORITIES. G. FIELD OFFICE: PROVIDE WEATHER -TIGHT FIELD OFFICE, WITH LIGHTING, ELECTRICAL OUTLETS, HEATING, AND VENTILATING EQUIPMENT, AND EQUIPPED WITH FURNITURE. 1. TELEPHONE SERVICE: PROVIDE TELEPHONE SERVICE AND FAX SERVICE TO SITE DURING ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. 2. TELEPHONE SERVICE: PROVIDE CELLULAR PHONE WITH ON-SITE PERSON IN CHARGE; PROVIDE PHONE NUMBER TO OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER. H. STORAGE: LIMIT ON-SITE STORAGE TO AREAS DESIGNATED FOR CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS AND APPROVED IN WRITING IN ADVANCE BY OWNER; PROVIDE ADDITIONAL WEATHER -TIGHT, SECURED OFF-SITE STORAGE AS REQUIRED. I REMOVAL AND CLEANING: REMOVE CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES, CLEAN AND REPAIR DAMAGE IN EXCESS OF CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, CAUSED BY OPERATIONS OR USE OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES. SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. CONTRACT AMOUNT: BASE ON MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; WHERE LISTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS BY MANUFACTURERS NOT LISTED SHALL NOT BE USED WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL. B. PRODUCTS: COMPONENTS SUPPLIED IN QUANTITY SHALL BE INTERCHANGEABLE; PROVIDE NEW MATERIALS UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. C. INSTALLATION: INSTALL ITEMS PLUMB, LEVEL AND SECURE, AND IN CORRECT RELATION TO ADJACENT PRODUCTS; SECURE IN PLACE WITH POSITIVE ANCHORAGE DEVICES DESIGNED AND SIZED TO WITHSTAND STRESSES, VIBRATION, AND RACKING. 1. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS EXCEPT WHERE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED. D. TRANSPORTATION: TRANSPORT PRODUCTS TO AVOID PRODUCT DAMAGE, DELIVER IN UNDAMAGED CONDITION IN MANUFACTURER'S UNOPENED CONTAINERS OR PACKAGING. E. HANDLING: PROVIDE EQUIPMENT AND PERSONNEL TO HANDLE PRODUCTS BY METHODS TO PREVENT SOILING AND DAMAGE; PROMPTLY INSPECT TO ASSURE PRODUCTS ARE CORRECT, COMPLETE, AND UNDAMAGED, AND QUANTITIES ARE CORRECT. F. STORAGE: STORE MATERIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS, WITH SEALS AND LABELS INTACT AND LEGIBLE. G. PROTECTION: PROVIDE COVERINGS TO PROTECT PRODUCTS FROM DAMAGE FROM TRAFFIC AND CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS, REMOVE WHEN NO LONGER NEEDED. H. SPECIFIED PRODUCTS: FOR PRODUCTS SPECIFIED BY NAMING ONE OR MORE PRODUCTS OR MANUFACTURERS, SELECT PRODUCTS OF ANY NAMED MANUFACTURER MEETING SPECIFICATIONS. SECTION 016200 - PRODUCT OPTIONS A. SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS: PROVIDE PRODUCTS INDICATED OR APPROVED; REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS OF OTHER PRODUCTS WILL BE CONSIDERED IF SUBMITTED IN WRITING. 1. CONTRACTOR OPTIONS: PROVIDE PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS NAMED IN SPECIFICATIONS, SUBMIT REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FOR PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS NOT SPECIFICALLY NAMED WHERE NAMES ARE LISTED. 2. SUBSTITUTIONS: CONTRACTOR SHALL INVESTIGATE PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS AND DETERMINE IF EQUIVALENT TO PRODUCTS SPECIFIED. SUBMITTALS SHALL INCLUDE COST OR TIME BENEFITS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS; FAILURE TO INDICATE COST OR TIME BENEFIT IS JUSTIFICATION FOR REJECTION. 3. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION: REQUESTS CONSTITUTE THAT CONTRACTOR HAS INVESTIGATED PROPOSED PRODUCTS AND DETERMINES IT MEETS OR EXCEEDS SPECIFIED PRODUCTS AND WAIVES CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COSTS THAT SUBSEQUENTLY BECOME APPARENT. 4. APPROVALS: OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER SHALL BE THE JUDGE OF ACCEPTABILITY AND RESERVES RIGHT TO REJECT PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION BASED ON INSUFFICIENT INFORMATION; USE ONLY SUBSTITUTIONS APPROVED IN WRITING. SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS A. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: INSTALLERS TO HAVE MINIMUM FIVE YEARS SUCCESSFUL EXPERIENCE INSTALLING ITEMS SIMILAR TO THOSE REQUIRED FOR PROJECT, EXCEPT FOR INDIVIDUALS IN TRAINING UNDER DIRECT SUPERVISION OF EXPERIENCED INSTALLER. 5. EXAMINATION: BEGINNING INSTALLATION OF A PRODUCT SIGNIFIES INSTALLER HAS EXAMINED SUBSTRATES, AREAS, AND CONDITIONS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS FOR TOLERANCES AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS: WHEN WORK IS SPECIFIED TO COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS OR INSTRUCTIONS, DISTRIBUTE COPIES TO PERSONS INVOLVED, AND MAINTAIN ONE SET IN FIELD OFFICE. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS UNLESS MORE RESTRICTIVE REQUIREMENTS ARE SPECIFIED. PROTECTION: COVER PRODUCTS SUBJECT TO DETERIORATION WITH IMPERVIOUS SHEET, PROVIDE VENTILATION TO AVOID CONDENSATION AND TRAPPING WATER. CUTTING AND PATCHING: CUT AND FIT COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED; PATCH DISTURBED AREAS TO MATCH ADJACENT MATERIALS AND FINISHES. 1. REFINISHING: REFINISH ENTIRE SURFACES AS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE EVEN FINISH TO MATCH ADJACENT FINISHES; FOR CONTINUOUS SURFACES REFINISH TO NEAREST INTERSECTION, FOR AN ASSEMBLY REFINISH ENTIRE UNIT. FINAL CLEANING: CLEAN INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR SURFACES EXPOSED TO VIEW, REMOVE TEMPORARY LABELS, STAINS, AND FOREIGN SUBSTANCES; POLISH TRANSPARENT AND GLOSSY SURFACES; VACUUM CARPETED AND SOFT SURFACES; CLEAN DUCTS; CLEAN SITE. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: PROVIDE DOCUMENTATION STATING WORK HAS BEEN SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED. WHERE OWNER REQUIRES USE OF SPACE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION, PROVIDE LIST OF ITEMS TO BE COMPLETED. 1. OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER WILL REVIEW LIST OF ANY ITEMS TO BE COMPLETED AND SUPPLEMENT LIST WITH ITEMS CONSIDERED TO BE INCOMPLETE OR UNACCEPTABLE. C. D. E. F. G. H. K. FINAL COMPLETION: PROVIDE WRITTEN CERTIFICATION INDICATING WORK 15 IN COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN TESTED AND ARE OPERATIONAL, AND WORK IS READY FOR FINAL INSPECTION. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: MAINTAIN COMPLETE AND UP-TO-DATE RECORD DOCUMENTS; KEEP SEPARATE FROM FIELD DOCUMENTS. SUBMIT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS, MATERIAL AND FINISH DATA, OPERATION AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS, WARRANTIES AND BONDS AT COMPLETION. 1. SUBMIT BOUND IN 8-1/2" X 11" THREE RING BINDERS WITH DURABLE PLASTIC COVERS. ARRANGE IN FORMAT SIMILAR TO SPECIFICATIONS. WARRANTIES: PROVIDE WARRANTIES AS INDICATED, SIGNED BY CONTRACTOR AND MANUFACTURER; FORM AS APPROVED BY OWNER PRIOR TO EXECUTION. 1. WARRANTIES SHALL BE IN ADDITION TO AND NOT A LIMITATION OF OTHER RIGHTS OWNER MAY HAVE AGAINST CONTRACTOR UNDER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND AS PRESCRIBED BY LAW, REGARDLESS OF WORDING OF WARRANTY. SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION A. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION: REMOVE FROM SITE EXISTING MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION AND UTILITIES AS NEEDED TO COMPLETE PROJECT. REMOVE EXISTING ELEMENTS INDICATED AND ENCOUNTERED DURING CONSTRUCTION, AS NEEDED TO COMPLETE WORK. 1. REMOVE ONLY THOSE ELEMENTS NECESSARY FOR COMPLETION OF PROJECT, REPLACE OR REPAIR ELEMENTS UNNECESSARILY REMOVED OR DAMAGED DURING CONSTRUCTION. 2. CAREFULLY REMOVE AND STORE ITEMS INDICATED FOR REUSE IN PROJECT AND COORDINATE WITH OTHER TRADES FOR MODIFICATIONS AND REINSTALLATION. 3. PROTECTION: PREVENT MOVEMENT AND SETTLEMENT OF ADJACENT STRUCTURE; PROVIDE BRACING, SHORING, AND UNDERPINNING AS NEEDED AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SAFETY AND SUPPORT OF STRUCTURES. ASSUME LIABILITY FOR SUCH MOVEMENT AND SETTLEMENT. 4. UTILITIES: CONTACT APPLICABLE UTILITY COMPANIES PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING UTILITIES; DISCONTINUE WORK IF UNEXPECTED UTILITY LINES ARE ENCOUNTERED. DETERMINE LINE SOURCE AND USE PRIOR TO REMOVAL. CAP AND IDENTIFY EXISTING UTILITY LINES REMOVED. SECTION 017°00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. SUMMARY: PROJECT INCLUDES SPECIAL FACILITY START-UP PROCESS TO BRING FACILITY TO FULLY OPERATIONAL STATE, FREE OF DEFICIENCIES, IN MOST EFFICIENT AND TIMELY MANNER ACHIEVABLE. DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS (NOT USED) DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 033000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. CONCRETE SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 3500 P5I AT 28 DAYS, WITH A WATER CEMENT RATIO = .50 (MAXIMUM). CONCRETE EXPOSED TO WEATHER SHALL BE AIR -ENTRAINED AT 6% ± 1.5% ALL REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE NEW DOMESTIC DEFORMED BILLET STEEL CONFORMING TO ASTM A-615 GRADE 60. WELDED WIRE REINFORCEMENT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM A-185 DELIVERED IN FLAT SHEETS. ALL CONCRETE WORK SHALL SE IN ACCORDANCE WITH "THE BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR REINFORCED CONCRETE" ACI 518 -XX. ALL REINFORCING DETAILS SHALL CONFORM TO "MANUAL OF STANDARD PRACTICE FOR DETAILING REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES" ACI 315-q4, UNLESS DETAILED OTHERWISE ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATIONS OF ALL OPENINGS, SLEEVES, ANCHOR BOLTS, INSERTS, ETC., AS REQUIRED BY OTHER TRADES BEFORE CONCRETE IS PLACED. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SPACERS, CHAIRS, BOLSTERS, ETC., NECESSARY TO SUPPORT REINFORCING STEEL. CHAIRS WHICH BEAR ON EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES SHALL HAVE ENDS WHICH ARE PLASTIC TIPPED OR STAINLESS STEEL. CHAIRS WHICH BEAR ON EXPOSED CONCRETE SURFACES TO RECEIVE SANDBLAST FINISH SHALL BE STAINLESS STEEL. MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR REINFORCEMENT: (REFER TO THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS 4 SPECIFICATIONS). REFER TO STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS. SECTION 039250 - CONCRETE RESURFACING AND REHABILITATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. GENERAL: CONCRETE SURFACE SHALL BE IMPROVED AND/OR REPAIRED TO PROVIDE A SUITABLE SURFACE FOR INSTALLATION OF ALL FLOOR FINISH MATERIALS AND TO COMPLY WITH ALL PROJECT AND/OR FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS. SUBMITTALS: 1. NO SUBMITTALS SHALL BE REQUIRED. 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. NATIONAL ACCOUNTS 1. THE MAPEI OR LATICRETE PRODUCTS LISTED THROUGHOUT 11415 SPECIFICATION SHALL BE PURCHASED BY THE GC THROUGH THE FOLLOWING NATIONAL ACCOUNT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. a. MAPEI: PRO TILE, 914.665.0654. PLACE ORDER AS A VICTORIA'S SECRET OR PINK STORE. MATERIAL WILL BE PROVIDED FROM THE NEAREST MAPEI DISTRIBUTION CENTER. b. LATICRETE: DALTILE, CONTACT DAVE MEYERS, LATICRETE NATIONAL ACCOUNT REPRESENTATIVE 203.376.8113. PLACE ORDER AS A VICTORIA'S SECRET OR PINK STORE. MATERIAL WILL BE PROVIDED FROM THE NEAREST LATICRETE DISTRIBUTION CENTER. 2. WHICH MANUFACTURER IS USED DEPENDS ON WHICH ONE IS BEING SPECIFIED FOR THE FLOORING MATERIAL GOING OVER THIS FLOOR PREP. THE SAME MANUFACTURER MUST BE USED THROUGHOUT ANY GIVEN FINISH FLOOR MATERIAL TO MAINTAIN PRODUCT WARRANTIES. 3. ALL OTHER PRODUCTS LISTED WHICH ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC SHALL BE PURCHASED THROUGH LOCAL RESOURCES. EXISTING STATIC SUBSTRATE CRACKS: 1. CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE COMPLYING WITH ANSI 118.12 (FOR TREATMENT ALONG CRACKS ONLY; MUST BE INSTALLED OVER ANY REQUIRED SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT). a. MAPEI MAPELASTIC AQUADEFENCE b. LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL HYDROBAN PATCHING, RAMPING, AND SMALL FILL AREAS: 1. PRE -BLENDED POLYMER -MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS FAST SETTING HIGH FLOW PATCHING MORTAR, SUITABLE FROM FEATHER EDGE TO 3 INCH (76MM) APPLICATION IN CONFINED AREAS AND AS A WEAR SURF a. MAPEI MAPECEM QUICKPATCH b. LATICRETE NXT PATCH LARGE FILL AREAS AND LEVELING: 1. POURABLE CEMENTITIOUS, HIGH-STRENGTH, FAST -SETTING, NON -SHRINK, SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT ACHIEVING A MINIMUM OF 4000 P51 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS, COMPLYING WITH ASTM 0349 AND SUITABLE FROM 1/8 INCH TO 1 INCH (3MMTO 25MM). a. MAPEI ULTRAPLAN 1 PLUS IN CONJUNCTION WITH PRIMER T (SELF -LEVELING PRIMER) b. LATICRETE NXT LEVEL PLUS IN CONJUNCTION WITH LATICRETE NXT PRIMER 2. SUBSTRATE MUST BE PREPARED BY SHOT-BLASTING PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ANY SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT TO ACHIEVE A SURFACE PROFILE BETWEEN CSP -3 AND CSP -6 AS PER ICRI STANDARDS. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH ALL MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 1. INCLUDE ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 2. DO NOT INSTALL CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE BELOW ANY REQUIRED SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT; CRACKS MUST BE MARKED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT; OTHERWISE, FULL COVERAGE OF CRACK ISOLATION MAY BE REQUIRED. DIVISION 04 - MASONRY SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. 5. C. D. E. F. G. H. J. K. MASONRY CONSTRUCTION SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF ASCE 5-05 "BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES" AND ASCE 6-05 "SPECIFICATIONS FOR MASONRY STRUCTURES". HOLLOW LOAD BEARING UNITS SHALL BE NORMAL WEIGHT, CONFORMING TO ASTM C90, WITH A MINIMUM NET COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2500 PSI (F'M = 1900 PSI). MORTAR SHALL BE TYPE M OR 5, CONFORMING TO ASTM C270. COURSE GROUT SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM C476 WITH A MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE OF 3/8" AND A MINIMUM COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF 2500 P5I. (STANDARD MINIMUM 15 2000) VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE AS NOTED ON THE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS WITH CELLS FILLED WITH COARSE GROUT. VERTICAL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE HELD IN POSITION AT THE TOP AND BOTTOM AND AT A MAXIMUM SPACING OF 8'-0". REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE PLACED IN THE CENTER OF THE MASONRY CELL, TYPICAL UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. REINFORCING STEEL SHALL BE LAPPED MINIMUM 48 BAR DIAMETERS WHERE SPLICED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. WHEN A FOUNDATION DOWEL DOES NOT LINE UP WITH A VERTICAL CORE, IT SHALL NOT BE SLOPED MORE THAN ONE HORIZONTAL IN SIX VERTICALS. DOWELS SHALL BE GROUTED INTO A CORE IN VERTICAL ALIGNMENT, EVEN THOUGH IT IS IN THE CELL ADJACENT TO THE VERTICAL WALL REINFORCEMENT. HORIZONTAL WALL REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE STANDARD TRUSS TYPE DUR-O-WAL AT 16" C/C., UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. SPLICED WIRE REINFORCEMENT SHALL BE LAPPED AT LEAST 6" AND CONTAIN AT LEAST ONE CROSS WIRE OF EACH PIECE OF REINFORCEMENT WITHIN THE 6 INCHES. LAP WITH STANDARD "T" AND "L" SHAPED PIECES AT INTERSECTIONS AND CORNERS. PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 3 COURSES HIGH BY 2 COURSES WIDE GROUTED SOLID MASONRY AT BEAM BEARING POINTS. PROVIDE PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS OVER ALL OPENINGS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. LINTELS SHALL BE OF SUFFICIENT SIZE AND REINFORCEMENT FOR THE GIVEN SPANS AND LOADING CONDITIONS. SUBMIT SHOP DRAWINGS WITH RATED LOAD CAPACITIES TO THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW. PROVIDE A KNOCK -OUT BLOCK OR U -BLOCK REINFORCED WITH (1)-#5 CONTINUOUS AT THE SILL OF ALL WINDOW OPENINGS. EXTEND 16" BEYOND EACH SIDE OF THE OPENING TYPICALLY. M. BOND PILASTERS TO ADJOINING MASONRY WALLS WITH INTERLOCKING UNITS. N. PROVIDE 2 COURSES BY 16" WIDE SOLID OR GROUTED SOLID MASONRY AT JOIST AND LINTEL BEARING POINTS. SECTION 044000 - STONE ASSEMBLIES A. GENERAL: PROVIDE STONE FABRICATIONS FOR CLADDING AS INDICATED, INCLUDING ANCHORS, MORTAR, GROUT, AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE, FINISHED INSTALLATION. B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: OBTAIN EACH STONE FROM SINGLE QUARRY SOURCE, WITH CONSISTENT COLOR RANGE AND TEXTURE THROUGHOUT WORK; DO NOT CHANGE SOURCES OR KINDS OF MATERIALS DURING COURSE OF WORK. C. QUALITY CONTROL: OBSERVE STONE DURING FABRICATION AND ENSURE CONSISTENCY OF APPEARANCE; DO NOT USE PIECES WITH DEFECTS AND BLEMISHES BEYOND NORMAL CHARACTERISTICS ANTICIPATED FOR STONE. L DEFECTS AND BLEMISHES: CONTRASTING SPOTS, FOREIGN ELEMENTS, IRREGULAR COLOR VARIATIONS, AND IRREGULARITIES IN TYPICAL CHARACTERISTICS SHALL BE CONSIDERED DEFECTS AND BLEMISHES. D. AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS; EACH TYPE OF STONE SHALL COME FROM A SINGLE QUARRY TO ENSURE CONSISTENT COLOR. E. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS: ASTM C150, TYPE 1 PORTLAND CEMENT, ASTM C207, TYPE 5 HYDRATED LIME, AND ASTM C144 SAND, CLEAN, FREE OF HARMFUL SUBSTANCES; USE WHITE CEMENT AT COLORED MORTAR AND GROUT, COLOR TO MATCH STONE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. F. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. G. FABRICATION: FABRICATE AS 51-1OWN AND AS DETAILED ON FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS WITH EXPOSED SURFACES SMOOTH, TRUE, AND FLAT. 1. CUT ACCURATELY TO SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON FINAL SHOP DRAWINGS; COMPLY WITH FABRICATION TOLERANCES OF STONE ASSOCIATION FOR SPECIFIED FINISHES. ZERO TOLERANCE WHERE HAIRLINE JOINTS ARE REQUIRED. H. INSTALLATION: DO NOT USE MATERIAL WITH CHIPS, CRACKS, VOIDS, DISCOLORATIONS OR OTHER DEFECTS THAT MIGHT BE VISIBLE OR CAUSE STAINING IN FINISHED WORK. 1. STONE APPLICATION: INSTALL CURBS WITH SOFT STAINLESS STEEL WIRE ANCHORS, MINIMUM 1/8" DIAMETER SET WITH PORTLAND CEMENT WITH SHRINKAGE REDUCER (EXTERIOR); GROUT JOINTS. 2. EXECUTE WORK WITH SKILLED MECHANICS AND EMPLOY SKILLED FITTERS AT SITE TO DO NECESSARY FIELD CUTTING AS STONE IS SET. 3. TOOL JOINTS SLIGHTLY CONCAVE. DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS A. 5. C. D. E. F. G. H. J. GENERAL: PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS METAL SHAPES AND FABRICATIONS AS REQUIRED AND NOT INCLUDED AS PART OF OTHER SECTIONS, WITH ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH SHOP DRAWINGS FOR CUSTOM FABRICATIONS, PRODUCT DATA FOR MANUFACTURED ITEMS; PROVIDE TEMPLATES FOR ANCHOR INSTALLATION BY OTHERS. STEEL SHAPES: ASTM A36 STEEL. PROVIDE NON -SHRINK, NON-METALLIC, PRE -MIXED, FACTORY PACKAGED, NON -STAINING, NON -CORROSIVE, NON-GASEOUS GROUT; TYPE SPECIFICALLY RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATIONS INDICATED. FASTENERS AND ROUGH HARDWARE: TYPE REQUIRED FOR SPECIFIC USAGE; PROVIDE ZINC -COATED FASTENERS FOR EXTERIOR USE OR WHERE SU! LT INTO EXTERIOR WALLS. WELDING MATERIALS: ANS D1.1, TYPE REQUIRED FOR MATERIALS BEING WELDED. PROVIDE PRIMERS AS RECOMMENDED BY PAINT MANUFACTURERS FOR SUBSTRATES AND PAINTS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING. 1. GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT: HIGH ZINC -DUST CONTENT PAINT FOR RE -GALVANIZING WELDS IN GALVANIZED STEEL. FABRICATION: FABRICATE ITEMS WITH JOINTS NEATLY FITTED AND PROPERLY SECURED; GRIND EXPOSED WELDS CONTINUOUS, SMOOTH AND FLUSH WITH ADJACENT FINISHED SURFACES AND EASE EXPOSED EDGES TO APPROXIMATE 1/32" UNIFORM RADIUS. 1. MAKE EXPOSED JOINTS FLUSH BUTT TYPE, HAIRLINE JOINTS WHERE MECHANICALLY FASTENED. FIT AND SHOP ASSEMBLE IN LARGEST PRACTICAL SECTIONS FOR DELIVERY. FINISHES: GALVANIZE AND PRIME PAINT EXTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS METAL, PRIME PAINT INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS METAL; GALVANIZE COATING MINIMUM G90 COATING, GALVANIZED AFTER FABRICATION. 1. CLEAN SURFACES OF RUST, SCALE, GREASE AND FOREIGN MATTER PRIOR TO APPLYING GALVANIZED OR PAINTED FINISH. INSTALLATION: INSTALL ITEMS SQUARE AND LEVEL, ACCURATELY FITTED AND FREE FROM DISTORTION OR DEFECTS DETRIMENTAL TO APPEARANCE OR PERFORMANCE; ENSURE ALIGNMENT WITH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION; COORDINATE WITH RELATED WORK TO ENSURE NO INTERRUPTION IN INSTALLATION. 1. SUPPLY ITEMS TO BE CAST INTO OR EMBEDDED IN OTHER MATERIALS TO APPROPRIATE TRADES. 2. AFTER INSTALLATION, TOUCH-UP FIELD WELDS AND SCRATCHED AND DAMAGED SURFACES; USE PRIMER CONSISTENT WITH 5140P COAT OR RECOMMENDED FOR GALVANIZED SURFACES, AS APPLICABLE. SECTION 057000 - DECORATIVE METAL A. B. C. D. E. F. G. GENERAL: PROVIDE CUSTOM ORNAMENTAL METAL ITEMS AS INDICATED WITI.4 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENT DEVICES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE, FINISHED INSTALLATION 1. ORNAMENTAL METAL ITEMS: PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL AND BRAKE METAL SHAPES AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA, 5140P DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES OF EACH EXPOSED METAL FINISH. STAINLESS STEEL: ASTM A666, TYPE 302/304 CORROSION RESISTANT STAINLESS STEEL WITH NO. 4 SATIN DIRECTIONAL FINISH. BRACKETS AND ANCHORS: UNEXPOSED PLATES, ANGLES AND SUPPORTS MAY BE STEEL; EXPOSED ITEMS TO MATCH ORNAMENTAL METAL TYPE AND FINISH. FASTENERS: TYPE REQUIRED FOR SPECIFIC USAGE; PROVIDE CONCEALED FASTENERS EXCEPT WHERE SPECIFICALLY APPROVED; WHERE EXPOSED MATCH TYPE AND FINISH OF METAL BEING FASTENED. 1. CONCEALED STEEL FASTENERS: HOT -DIPPED GALVANIZED MINIMUM G90 WHERE BUILT INTO EXTERIOR WALLS OR SUBJECT TO HIGH HUMIDITY. FABRICATION: FABRICATE COMPONENT CONNECTIONS TO SUPPORT SPECIFIED DESIGN LOADS. 1. SELECT MATERIALS FOR STRAIGHTNESS, FREE OF DEFECTS AND IRREGULARITIES 2. EXPOSED -TO -VIEW SURFACES EXHIBITING PITTING, SEAM MARKS, ROLLER MARKS, "OIL CANNING", STAINS, DISCOLORATIONS, AND IMPERFECTIONS ON FINISHED UNITS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE. 3. MAKE EXPOSED JOINTS FLUSH BUTT TYPE, HAIRLINE JOINTS WHERE MECHANICALLY FASTENED; PROVIDE CONCEALED CONNECTION DEVICES WITH HIDDEN FASTENERS. 4. SEPARATE DISSIMILAR MATERIALS WITH BITUMINOUS PAINT WHERE CONCEALED, WITH PREFORMED SEPARATORS, OR SIMILAR METHOD TO PREVENT CORROSION. INSTALLATION: INSTALL ORNAMENTAL METAL ITEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. 1. INSTALL PLUMB, TRUE AND IN CORRECT RELATION TO ADJACENT WORK, FREE FROM DISTORTION OR DEFECTS DETRIMENTAL TO APPEARANCE AND PERFORMANCE. 2. PRIOR TO SECURING CONTINUOUS ITEMS, ADJUST TO ENSURE PROPER MATCHING AT BUTT JOINTS AND CORRECT ALIGNMENT THROUGHOUT THEIR LENGTH. 3. REPAIR OR REPLACE ITEMS DAMAGED OR MARRED DURING CONSTRUCTION. DIVISION 06 - 10400D, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY A. GENERAL: PROVIDE MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY. 5. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION (APA) AND APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS. C. PLYWOOD: PROVIDE MINIMUM APA C -D PLUGGED PLYWOOD; STRESS RATED WHERE SPANNING SUPPORTING MEMBERS; FIRE RETARDANT TREATED; MINIMUM 3/4" THICK UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED (AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS PROVIDE MINIMUM APA C -D EXTERIOR CDX PLYWOOD). 1. PLYWOOD STANDARD: COMPLY WITH P51 (NBS P51). 2. PLYWOOD PANEL BOARDS: PROVIDE PANEL BOARDS FOR ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION PANEL BOARDS; APA C -D PLUGGED, INTERIOR TYPE PLYWOOD WITH EXTERIOR GLUE, FIRE RETARDANT TREATED; MINIMUM 1/2" THICK. D. FASTENERS: PROVIDE FASTENERS AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE, SECURE INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY; GALVANIZED AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS AND PRESSURE TREATED WOOD; SIZE AND TYPE TO SUIT APPLICATION; PROVIDE WASHERS FOR NUTS AND BOLTS. E. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH REFERENCED STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS. 1. PLYWOOD: COMPLY WITH RECOMMENDATIONS OF AMERICAN PLYWOOD ASSOCIATION (APA) FOR FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD WORK. 2. PLACE MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY TRUE TO LINES AND LEVELS. 3. CORRELATE LOCATION SO ATTACHED WORK WILL COMPLY WITH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS AND BE PROPERLY LOCATED. 4. CONSTRUCT MEMBERS OF CONTINUOUS PIECES OF LONGEST POSSIBLE LENGTHS. 5. FIT CARPENTRY WORK TO OTHER WORK; SCRIBE AND COPE AS REQUIRED FOR ACCURATE FIT. 6. SECURELY ATTACH CARPENTRY WORK TO SUBSTRATES BY ANCHORING AND FASTENING AS REQUIRED BY RECOGNIZED STANDARDS. 7. PROVIDE WASHERS UNDER BOLT HEADS AND NUTS IN CONTACT WITH WOOD. SECTION 062000 - FINISH CARPENTRY A. GENERAL: PROVIDE WOOD TRIM, WOOD SHELVING, AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. 5. STANDARDS: CONFORM TO ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (MI )/QUALITY STANDARDS OR WOODWORK INSTITUTE (FORMERLY WOODWORK INSTITUTE OF CALIFORNIA) "MANUAL OF MILLWORK" STANDARDS; NOT LESS THAN CUSTOM GRADE WHERE GRADE IS NOT OTHERWISE INDICATED. C. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA FOR MANUFACTURED ITEMS, SHOP DRAWINGS FOR CUSTOM ITEMS, SAMPLES OF EACH EXPOSED FINISH. D. CERTIFICATION: CERTIFICATION WILL NOT BE REQUIRED. E. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: COMPLY WITH REFERENCED STANDARDS AND MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. F. WOOD TRIM: PREMIUM GRADE WOOD TRIM AS INDICATED; REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE. G. WOOD SHELVING: CUSTOM GRADE 3/4" WOOD BOARD, PARTICLEBOARD, OR HARDWOOD -EDGED PLYWOOD. 1. ADJUSTABLE SHELVING BRACKETS: PROVIDE HEAVY DUTY STANDARDS AND BRACKETS WITH SLOTS 2" ON CENTER, SUPPORTS MAXIMUM 24" APART, AND MINIMUM 12" SHELF BRACKETS UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED; COLOR AS SELECTED BY OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER. H. ANCHORS, NAILS AND SCREWS: SELECT MATERIAL, TYPE, SIZE AND FINISH REQUIRED BY EACH SUBSTRATE FOR SECURE ANCHORAGE; PROVIDE TOOTHED STEEL OR LEAD EXPANSION BOLT SCREWS FOR DRILLED- IN-PLACE ANCHORS. I. WOOD FILLER: COLOR TO MATCH WOOD BEING FILLED. J. FABRICATION: FABRICATE FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFIED QUALITY STANDARD. K. INSTALLATION: INSTALL WORK CONSISTENT WITH SPECIFIED QUALITY GRADE, PLUMB, AND LEVEL. L. PREPARATION FOR FIELD FINISHING: SAND WORK SMOOTH AND SET EXPOSED NAILS AND SCREWS; APPLY WOOD FILLER IN EXPOSED NAIL AND SCREW INDENTATIONS AND LEAVE READY TO RECEIVE SITE -APPLIED FINISHES UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 1. SEAL CONCEALED AND SEMI -CONCEALED SURFACES; BRUSH APPLY ONLY, USING PRIMER CONSISTENT WITH FINISH COATS SPECIFIED UNDER SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING. SECTION 064000 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK A. GENERAL: INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED CASEWORK AND COUNTERTOPS; PROVIDE ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. 5. STANDARDS: CONFORM TO ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)/QUALITY STANDARDS OR WOODWORK INSTITUTE (FORMERLY WOODWORK INSTITUTE OF CALIFORNIA) "MANUAL OF MILLWORK" STANDARDS; NOT LESS THAN PREMIUM GRADE UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. C. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA FOR CONTRACTOR FURNISHED ACCESSORIES INCLUDING SAMPLES OF EXPOSED MATERIALS. D. STORAGE AND HANDLING: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. E. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK: OWNER FURNISHED CASEWORK AND COUNTERTOPS. F. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE AS INDICATED AND AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK AS INDICATED; COORDINATE ACCESSORIES REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK NOT FURNISHED WITH ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK. G. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND REFERENCED STANDARDS. TAKE SPECIAL CARE COORDINATING INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 1. INSTALL WORK CONSISTENT WITH SPECIFIED QUALITY GRADE, PLUMB, LEVEL, TRUE AND STRAIGHT WITH NO DISTORTIONS. 2. SCRIBE AND CUT FOR ACCURATE FIT TO OTHER FINISHED WORK. 3. ENSURE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS AFFECTING ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ARE PROPERLY PLACED, COMPLETE, AND HAVE BEEN INSPECTED BY OWNER'S PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF INSTALLATION. 4. SECURE WORK TO GROUNDS, STRIPPING AND BLOCKING WITH COUNTERSUNK, CONCEALED FASTENERS AND BLIND NAILING AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 5. SCRIBE AND CUT FOR ACCURATE FIT TO OTHER FINISHED WORK. 6. INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK UNDER SUPERVISION OF FACTORY -TRAINED MECHANICS. 7. ATTACH ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK SECURELY IN PLACE WITH UNIFORM JOINTS PROVIDING FOR THERMAL AND BUILDING MOVEMENTS. 8. ACCEPTABLE TOLERANCES: a. VARIATION FROM TRUE POSITION: MAXIMUM 1/16" AT ANY POSITION AND MAXIMUM 1/8" IN ANY 10'-0" LENGTH b. ADJOINING SURFACES OF SAME MATERIAL: NO VARIATION PERMITTED. SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARIES A. SECTION INCLUDES WALL SHEATHING AND SHEATHING JOINT AND PE PART 2 - PRODUCTS REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 0 2 2011 City of Tul€ ;ii1a 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FIRE -TEST -RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS: FOR ASSEMBLIES WITH FIRE -RESISTANCE RATINGS, PROVIDE MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION IDENTICAL TO THOSE OF ASSEMBLIES TESTED FOR FIRE RESISTANCE PER ASTM E 119 BY A TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAYING JURISDICTION. FIRE -RESISTANCE RATINGS ARE INDICATED BY DESIGN DESIGNATIONS FROM UL'S "FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY." 2.02 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. EMISSIONS: PRODUCTS SHALL MEET THE TESTING AND PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS OF THE CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES' "STANDARD PRACTICE FOR THE TESTING OF VOLATILE ORGANIC EMISSIONS FROM VARIOUS SOURCES USING SMALL-SCALE ENVIRONMENTAL CHAMBERS." 2.03 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED PLYWOOD A. GENERAL: WHERE FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS ARE INDICATED, USE MATERIALS COMPLYING WITH REQUIREMENTS IN THIS ARTICLE THAT ARE ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION AND WITH FIRETEST - RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS SPECIFIED AS DETERMINED BY TESTING IDENTICAL PRODUCTS PER TEST METHOD INDICATED BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AGENCY. B. FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED PLYWOOD BY PRESSURE PROCESS: PRODUCTS WITH A FLAME -SPREAD INDEX OF 25 OR LESS WHEN TESTED ACCORDING TO ASTM E 84, AND WITH NO EVIDENCE OF SIGNIFICANT PROGRESSIVE COMBUSTION WHEN THE TEST IS EXTENDED AN ADDITIONAL 20 MINUTES, AND WITH THE FLAME FRONT NOT EXTENDING MORE THAN 10.5 FEET (3.2 M) BEYOND THE CENTERLINE OF THE BURNERS AT ANY TIME DURING THE TEST. 1. EXTERIOR TYPE: TREATED MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ABOVE FOR FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED PLYWOOD BY PRESSURE PROCESS AFTER BEING SUBJECTED TO ACCELERATED WEATHERING ACCORDING TO ASTM D 2898. USE FOR EXTERIOR LOCATIONS AND WHERE INDICATED. 2. INTERIOR TYPE A: TREATED MATERIALS SHALL HAVE A MOISTURE CONTENT OF 28 PERCENT OR LESS WHEN TESTED ACCORDING TO ASTM D 3201 AT 92 PERCENT RELATIVE HUMIDITY. USE WHERE EXTERIOR TYPE IS NOT INDICATED. 3. DESIGN VALUE ADJUSTMENT FACTORS: TREATED LUMBER PLYWOOD SHALL BE TESTED ACCORDING ASTM D 5516 AND DESIGN VALUE ADJUSTMENT FACTORS SHALL SE CALCULATED ACCORDING TO ASTM D 6305. SPAN RATINGS AFTER TREATMENT SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN SPAN RATINGS SPECIFIED. WHERE HIGH-TEMPERATURE FIRE -RETARDANT TREATMENT IS INDICATED, SPAN RATINGS FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 170 DEG F (76 DEG C) SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN SPAN RATINGS SPECIFIED. KILN -DRY MATERIAL AFTER TREATMENT TO A MAXIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT OF 15 PERCENT. IDENTIFY FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED PLYWOOD WITH APPROPRIATE CLASSIFICATION MARKING OF QUALIFIED TESTING AGENCY. E. APPLICATION: TREAT ALL PLYWOOD UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. C. D. 2.04 WALL SHEATHING A. EXTERIOR PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING: EXTERIOR, STRUCTURAL I, EXPOSURE 1. THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 5. INTERIOR PLYWOOD WALL SHEATHING: INTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD. THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS; %" MINIMUM. C. PAPER -SURFACED GYPSUM WALL SHEATHING: ASTM C 1396/C 1396111 GYPSUM SHEATHING; WITH WATER -RESISTANT -TREATED CORE AND WITH WATER-REPELLENT PAPER BONDED TO CORE'S FACE, BACK, AND LONG EDGES. THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. D. GLASS -MAT GYPSUM WALL SHEATHING: ASTM C 1177/1177M. THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS E. CELLULOSE FIBER -REINFORCED GYPSUM SHEATHING: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, GYPSUM SHEATHING. THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. F. CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS: ASTM C 1325, TYPE A. THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2.05 CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD A. MATERIALS: ALL CEMENT BOARD WALL PANELS SHALL COMPLY WITH EN 634-2 FOR CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARDS; AND SHALL BE INSTALLED ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER'S MOST CURRENT PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS. WALL PANEL THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 5. FIRE RESISTANCE PROPERTIES: ALL CEMENT BOARD WALL PANELS SHALL BE RATED FOR "0" FLAME SPREAD AND "0" SMOKE DEVELOPMENT PER ASTM E84 AND SHALL HAVE PASSED A MODIFIED ASTM E136 TEST FOR A MINIMUM DURATION OF TEN (10) MINUTES. C. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: 1. DELIVER, STORE AND HANDLE MATERIALS TO PREVENT BREAKAGE, WARPING OR'DAMAGE BY WATER. 2. ACCLIMATIZE MATERIALS BY STORING ON SITE NOT LESS THAN THREE (3) DAYS BEFORE INSTALLATION. 3. MATERIALS TO BE STORED INDOORS ON LEVELED DUNNAGE NOT EXCEEDING 32" ON CENTERS. IF TEMPORARILY STORED OUTDOORS, BOARDS MUST BE ELEVATED .ABOVE GROUND, AND PROTECTED FROM THE WEATHER WITH WATERPROOF COVERING. 4. PANELS TO BE STORED FLAT AND NOT ON EDGES. D. SURFACE TREATMENTS: VERIFY CEMENT BOARD WILL ACCEPT PAINT AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS - REFER TO THE PAINT MANUFACTURER IN ALL INSTANCES. FOR SURFACE TREATMENTS THAT ARE NOT VAPOR OR MOISTURE PERMEABLE, THE REVERSE AND ALL EDGES OF THE PANEL SHOULD ALSO BE TREATED IN THE SAME WAY TO AVOID THE PANEL BEING UNBALANCED AND EXHIBITING WARPING UNDER EXTREME CONDITIONS OF HUMIDITY VARIANCE SHREMSHOCK Shremshock Architects, Inc. 7400 W. Campus Rd. ite 150 New Albany, OH 43054 t: 614 545 4550 1 f .14 545 4555 1 shremshock.com Gerald .. Shremshock, Architect Timot J. Shremshock, Architect 0) U � U O 000 w S ow crtz fV LUI z 0 0 c U) z 0 oa0 z w 0 w IX 0 cn 0 M co _O t 0 vi E U A co its" 0 E J ON 1• -- REQUIRED BY: IT LENTER 09/15/17 AM HMG SKM ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: 2.06 FASTENERS A. GENERAL: PROVIDE FASTENERS OF SIZE AND TYPE INDICATED THAT COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED IN THIS ARTICLE FOR MATERIAL AND MANUFACTURER. FOR WALL SHEATHING, PROVIDE FASTENERS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2.07 SHEATHING JOINT -AND -PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. SEALANT FOR PAPER -SURFACED GYPSUM SHEATHING: ELASTOMERIC, MEDIUM -MODULUS, NEUTRAL -CURING SILICONE JOINT SEALANT COMPATIBLE WITH JOINT SUBSTRATES FORMED BY GYPSUM SHEATHING AND OTHER MATERIALS, RECOMMENDED BY SHEATHING MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATION INDICATED AND COMPLYING WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS SPECIFIED IN DIVISION 07 SECTION 079200 "JOINT SEALANTS." B. SEALANT FOR GLASS -MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING: SILICONE EMULSION SEALANT COMPLYING WITH ASTM C 834, COMPATIBLE WITH SHEATHING TAPE AND SHEATHING AND RECOMMENDED BY TAPE AND SHEATHING MANUFACTURERS FOR USE WITH GLASS -FIBER SHEATHING TAPE AND FOR COVERING EXPOSED FASTENERS. 1. SHEATHING TAPE: SELF -ADHERING GLASS -FIBER TAPE, MINIMUM 2 INCHES (50 MM) WIDE, 10 BY 10 OR 10 BY 20 THREADS/INCH (390 BY 390 OR 390 BY 780 THREADS/M), OF TYPE RECOMMENDED BY SHEATHING AND TAPE MANUFACTURERS FOR USE WITH SILICONE EMULSION SEALANT IN SEALING JOINTS IN GLASS -MAT GYPSUM SHEATHING AND WITH A HISTORY OF SUCCESSFUL IN-SERVICE USE. C. SEALANT FOR CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD: 1. EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS: USE PREMIXED ELASTOMERIC JOINT CAULKING OR SEALANT AS APPROVED BY THE SYNTHETIC COATINGS MANUFACTURER'S FINISH SYSTEM. USE ONLY FULLY ELASTOMERIC SYNTHETIC COATINGS. 2. INTERIOR APPLICATIONS: DESIGN FOR VISIBLE PANEL JOINTS OR USE METAL OR PLASTIC BATTEN COVER STRIPS AT PANEL JOINTS. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. ADHESIVES FOR FIELD GLUING PANELS TO FRAMING: FORMULATION COMPLYING WITH ASTM D 3498 THAT IS APPROVED FOR USE WITH TYPE OF CONSTRUCTION PANEL INDICATED BY MANUFACTURERS OF BOTH ADHESIVES AND PANELS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. DO NOT USE MATERIALS WITH DEFECTS THAT IMPAIR QUALITY OF SHEATHING OR PIECES THAT ARE TOO SMALL TO USE WITH MINIMUM NUMBER OF JOINTS OR OPTIMUM JOINT ARRANGEMENT. ARRANGE JOINTS SO THAT PIECES DO NOT SPAN BETWEEN FEWER THAN THREE SUPPORT MEMBERS. B. CUT PANELS AT PENETRATIONS, EDGES, AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS OF WORK; FIT TIGHTLY AGAINST ABUTTING CONSTRUCTION UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. C. SECURELY ATTACH TO SUBSTRATE BY FASTENING AS INDICATED, COMPLYING WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1. NES NER-272 FOR POWER -DRIVEN FASTENERS. 2. TABLE 2304.9.1, "FASTENING SCHEDULE," IN ICC'S "INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE." D. COORDINATE WALL SHEATHING INSTALLATION WITH FLASHING AND JOINT -SEALANT INSTALLATION 50 THESE MATERIALS ARE INSTALLED IN SEQUENCE AND MANNER THAT PREVENT EXTERIOR MOISTURE FROM PASSING THROUGH COMPLETED ASSEMBLY. E. DO NOT BRIDGE BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS; CUT AND SPACE EDGES OF PANELS TO MATCH SPACING OF STRUCTURAL SUPPORT ELEMENTS. 3.02 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE RECOMMENDATIONS IN APA FORM N0. E30, "ENGINEERED WOOD CONSTRUCTION GUIDE," FOR TYPES OF STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS AND APPLICATIONS INDICATED. B. FASTEN PANELS AS INDICATED BELOW FOR WALL SHEATHING: 1. NAIL OR STAPLE TO WOOD FRAMING. APPLY A CONTINUOUS BEAD OF GLUE TO FRAMING MEMBERS AT EDGES OF WALL SHEATHING PANELS. a. EXTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD USES WATERPROOF GLUE; INTERIOR GRADE PLYWOOD USES GLUE THAT 15 NOT WATERPROOF. 2. SCREW TO COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING. 3. SPACE PANELS 1/8 INCH (3 MM) APART AT EDGES AND ENDS 3.03 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH GA -253 AND WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 1. FASTEN GYPSUM SHEATHING TO WOOD FRAMING WITH NAILS OR SCREWS. 2. FASTEN GYPSUM SHEATHING TO COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING WITH SCREWS. 5. SEAL SHEATHING JOINTS ACCORDING TO SHEATHING MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. 3.04 CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD INSTALLATION A. A SUPPORT FRAMING MEMBER MUST ALWAYS OCCUR BEHIND FASTENER LOCATION. B. DO NOT NAIL OR SCREW ANY COLLATERAL BUILDING MATERIALS TO PANELS WITHOUT A SECURE BACKING SURFACE BEHIND THE PANEL TO RECEIVE THE FASTENER. TOGGLE BOLTING 15 REQUIRED WHERE NO SECURE BACKING SURFACE 15 PROVIDED. C. DEFLECTION OF PANELS SHALL BE LIMITED TO L/240. D. IN EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS, CONTROL JOINTS (WHERE APPLICABLE) SHALL BE DESIGNED TO PREVENT TRANSFER OF ANY MOVEMENT OR STRESS TO EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEMS. THROUGH -WALL CONTROL JOINTS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO ISOLATE A NAXIMUM OF 250 5Q. FT. OF WALL AREA. PROVIDE SEPARATE FRAMING MEMBER AT EACH SIDE OF CONTROL JOINT. E. COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE BUILDING CODES FOR WIND, SEISMIC AND OTHER LOAD REQUIREMENTS. F. INSTALL PANELS WITH LONG DIMENSIONS VERTICAL. ALL PANEL JOINTS MUST OCCUR OVER A FRAMING MEMBER. ALL PANEL EDGES ARE TO BE SUPPORTED BY A FRAMING MEMBER. G. PROVIDE 1/8" VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL JOINTS BETWEEN PANELS. H. USE PANEL THICKNESS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. I. USE 2" MINIMUM FLANGE WIDTH STUD FRAMING FOR SINGLE STUD BACK-UP AT PANEL JOINTS. IF STUD FRAMING AT PANEL JOINTS USES LESS THAN 2" FLANGE WIDTH, USE DOUBLE STUDS AT PANEL JOINT LOCATIONS. OPPOSITE SIDE OF STUD WALL TO BE RESTRAINED AGAINST STUD ROTATION. J. NEVER INSTALL PANELS WHILE WET OR DAMP. K. INSTALL BOARDS WITH A 3/8 -INCH GAP WHERE NON -LOAD-BEARING CONSTRUCTION ABUTS STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. L. INSTALL BOARDS WITH A 1/4 -INCH GAP WHERE THEY ABUT MASONRY OR SIMILAR MATERIALS THAT MIGHT RETAIN MOISTURE, TO PREVENT WICKING. 3.05 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION A. INSTALL PANELS AND TREAT JOINTS ACCORDING TO ANSI A108.11 AND MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR TYPE OF APPLICATION INDICATED. DIVISION 07 - T1-IERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 071416 - WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. GENERAL: INTEGRAL WATERPROOFING: LIQUID RUBBER INTEGRAL TILE SETTING WATERPROOFING SYSTEM WITH NO BITUMINOUS EXTENDERS, DESIGNED FOR APPLICATION UNDER TILE; EXTEND 6" UP WALL. B. SUBMITTALS: 1. NO SUBMITTALS SHALL BE REQUIRED. 2. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. C. PROVIDE A WATERPROOF MEMBRANE WHEN REQUIRED BY THE FOLLOWING: 1. THE BUILDING OWNER (LANDLORD) OR LOCAL BUILDING OFFICIAL 2. ABOVE GRADE TOILET ROOM INSTALLATIONS D. ALLOWABLE PRODUCTS 1. MAPEI CORP: MAPELASTIC AQUADEFENSE 2. LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL: HYDROBAN E. INSTALLATION: 1. FOLLOW ALL MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION. 2. PROVIDE ALL ACCESSORIES AND EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 3. WHEN USING FIBER MESH LAP AT LEAST 2 INCHES AT JOINTS. 4. CAREFULLY PLACE TILE AND SETTING MATERIALS OVER WATERPROOFING SO PROTECTION MATERIALS ARE NOT DISPLACED AND WATERPROOFING IS NOT PUNCTURED OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED. REPLACE PROTECTION MATERIALS THAT BECOME DISPLACED AND ARRANGE FOR REPAIR OF DAMAGED WATERPROOFING BEFORE COVERING WITH TILE. 5. PROVIDE CORK JOINT FILLER, WHERE INDICATED, AT WATERPROOFING THAT IS TURNED UP ON VERTICAL SURFACES OR, IF NOT INDICATED, PROVIDE TEMPORARY FILLER OR PROTECTION UNTIL TILE INSTALLATION 15 COMPLETE. SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION A. GENERAL: PROVIDE THERMAL INSULATION WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 1. INSULATION INTEGRAL WITH ROOFING REPAIRS 15 PROVIDED WITH ROOFING, AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION IS PROVIDED WITH GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES. 5. THERMAL BATT INSULATION: OWENS CORNING/FS-25 (1.800.438.7465), THERMAFIBER FS25 (1.888.834.2371), OR JOHNS MANVILLE/FSK-25 (1.800.654.3103); FOIL FACED VAPOR RETARDER FACED, VAPOR RETARDER TOWARD INSIDE. 1. THICKNESS/R-VALUE: R-13 (WALLS), OTHERS, AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. C. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE TAPE OR PENETRATION ANCHORS WHERE REQUIRED TO ENSURE PERMANENT INSTALLATION. D. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION OF EIFS 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. 5. C. D. E. F. G. SECTION 061600: SHEATHING SECTION 072100: THERMAL INSULATION SECTION 075900: ROOF REPAIRS SECTION 076000: FLASHING AND SHEET METAL SECTION 079200: JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 084113: ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS SECTION 088100: GLAZING 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. SUBSTRATE SYSTEMS SHOULD BE DESIGNED TO WITHSTAND APPLICABLE LOADS, INCLUDING LIVE, DEAD, POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE WIND, SEISMIC, ETC. BOND STRENGTH, FASTENER STRENGTH AND CONNECTION STRENGTH SHALL BE ANALYZED AND ENGINEERED, AND APPROPRIATE FACTORS OF SAFETY SHALL BE USED. MAXIMUM DEFLECTION OF SUBSTRATE SYSTEMS SHALL NOT EXCEED L/240TH OF THE SPAN. 5. DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES: 1. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING USED TO SUPPORT THE El F5 SYSTEM SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION. 2. BRICK, MASONRY AND CONCRETE SUBSTRATES AND EXTERIOR GRADE SHEATHING SHALL BE FLAT WITHIN 1/4" DEPTH WITHIN ANY 4' RADIUS. C. LIGHT GAUGE STEEL FRAMING: 1. THICKNESS SHALL BE DETERMINED BY LOADS USING ACCEPTED ENGINEERING PRACTICES WITH MINIMUM THICKNESS BEING 20 GAGE AT MAXIMUM 16" STUD SPACING. 2. SECTION PROPERTIES OF MEMBERS SHALL MEET THE LATEST AISI STANDARDS. 3. ALL STUD, TRACK, BRIDGING AND BRACING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE ELECTRIC FUSION WELDED. FIELD ERECTED FRAMING SHALL BE SCREW FASTENED. 4. FRAMING WILL INCLUDE STUD, TRACK, BRIDGING AND BRACING AND BE GALVANIZED OR PAINTED WITH RUST -RESISTANT PRIMER. 5. NI-IEN LIGHT GAUGE STEEL FRAMING 15 CONTINUED PAST THE FLOORLINE, THE STUD CAVITY FLUE SHALL BE CONTINUOUSLY FIRESTOPPED AT THE FLOORLINE. THE SPACE BETWEEN THE EDGE OF THE FLOOR AND THE SLAB SHALL BE SEALED WITH SAFING MATERIAL AS PER BUILDING CODE REQUIREMENTS. ACCEPTABLE SUBSTRATES: 1. AS DETAILED AND INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2. SHEATHING 51-4ALL BE PROTECTED AT ALL TIMES PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF THE EIFS SYSTEM TO ENSURE THAT DAMAGE TO THE SHEATHING DOES NOT OCCUR AND THAT THE BOND BETWEEN THE GYPSUM AND ITS FACING HAS NOT BEEN COMPROMISED. MIN. SLOPE OF INCLINED SURFACES SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 6" OF RISE IN 12" OF HORIZONTAL PROJECTION. INCLINED AREAS DEFINED AS ROOF SHALL NOT USE THE PRECOR SYSTEM. WIND LOAD: DESIGN FOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SYSTEM DEFLECTION, NORMAL TO THE PLANE OF THE WALL, OF L/240. DESIGN FOR WIND LOAD IN CONFORMANCE WITH CODE REQUIREMENTS. MOISTURE CONTROL: PREVENT THE ACCUMULATION OF WATER BEHIND THE EIFS SYSTEM, EITHER BY CONDENSATION OR LEAKAGE TIROUGI-I THE WALL CONSTRUCTION, IN THE DESIGN AND DETAILING OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY. 1. PROVIDE FLASHING TO DIRECT WATER TO THE EXTERIOR WHERE IT 15 LIKELY TO PENETRATE COMPONENTS IN THE WALL ASSEMBLY, INCLUDING, ABOVE WINDOW AND DOOR HEADS, BENEATH WINDOW AND DOOR SILLS, AT ROOF/WALL INTERSECTIONS, DECKS, ABUTMENTS OF LOWER WALLS WITH HIGHER WALLS, ABOVE PROJECTING FEATURES, AND AT THE BASE OF THE WALL. 2. VAPOR DIFFUSION AND CONDENSATION: PERFORM A DEW POINT ANALYSIS OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY TO DETERMINE THE POTENTIAL FOR ACCUMULATION OF MOISTURE IN THE WALL ASSEMBLY AS A RESULT OF WATER VAPOR DIFFUSION AND CONDENSATION. ADJUST INSULATION THICKNESS AND/OR OTHER WALL ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS ACCORDINGLY TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF CONDENSATION. AVOID THE USE OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE WALL IN WARM, HUMID CLIMATES. IMPACT RESISTANCE PER 2.06 REINFORCING MESHES, PROVIDE ULTRA-HIGH IMPACT RESISTANCE TO A MIN. HEIGHT OF 6'-0" (1.8 M) ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AT ALL AREAS ACCESSIBLE TO PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC AND OTHER AREAS EXPOSED TO ABNORMAL STRESS OR IMPACT. JOINTS: 1. DESIGN MINIMUM 3/4" WIDE EXPANSION JOINTS IN THE EIFS WHERE THEY EXIST IN THE SUBSTRATE OR SUPPORTING CONSTRUCTION, WHERE THE EIFS ADJOINS DISSIMILAR CONSTRUCTION OR MATERIALS, AT CHANGES IN BUILDING HEIGHT, AND AT FLOOR LINES IN MULTI-LEVEL WOOD FRAME CONSTRUCTION. 2. MINIMUM 1/2" WIDE SEALANT JOINTS AT ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH THE EIFS (WINDOWS, DOORS, ETC.) 3. INSTALL ROD ANDH T LL BACKER SEALANT THAT HAS BEEN EVALUATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 1382, "TEST METHOD FOR DETERMINING TENSILE ADHESION PROPERTIES OF SEALANTS WHEN USED IN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) JOINTS", AND THAT MEETS MINIMUM 50% ELONGATION AFTER CONDITIONING. 4. DESIGN JOINTS WITH SECONDARY MOISTURE PROTECTION AND DRAIN JOINTS TO THE EXTERIOR. REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS FOR LOCATIONS IF REQUIRED. TRIM, PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND REVEALS: ALL TRIM AND PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES MUST HAVE A MINIMUM 1:2 [271 SLOPE ALONG THEIR TOP SURFACE. HO 0REVEALS ALL R 1 Z NTAL MUST HAVE A MINIMUM 1:2 UT) SLOPE ALONG THEIR BOTTOM SURFACE. TERMINATIONS: 1. WHERE WINDOW AND DOOR HEADS AND JAMBS AND OTHER ELEMENTS PENETRATE THE SUBSTRATE, A MINIMUM 1/2" WILL BE LEFT BETWEEN THE EIFS AND THAT ELEMENT, IN ORDER TO ACCOMMODATE THE INSTALLATION OF BACKER ROD AND SEALANT. THE SINGLE EXCEPTION 15 IN A SILL CONDITION, WHERE SILL FLASHING 15 INSTALLED AND TURNS DOWN ONTO THE VERTICAL FACE OF THE PRECOR-S5 SYSTEM. OTHER EXCEPTIONS SHALL BE ONLY AS APPROVED BY COREV AMERICA. 2. WINDOWS MUST BE DESIGNED WITH THE PROPER SILL PAN, END DAMS, OR OTHER DESIGN ELEMENTS TO ENSURE THAT ANY WATER PENETRATING THE WINDOW ASSEMBLY 15 DIVERTED TO THE EXTERIOR OF THE BUILDING. 3. THE EIFS SHALL TERMINATE AT LEAST 8" ABOVE -GRADE. 4. AT ROOFLINES, BALCONIES AND OTHER TERMINATIONS, ADEQUATE FLASHING, INCLUDING DIVERTER FLASHING, SHALL BE DESIGNED AND INSTALLED TO PREVENT WATER INFILTRATION INTO THE WALL ASSEMBLY. SEALANTS: SEALANT SHALL BE INSTALLED PER THE SEALANT MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS, USING ACCESSORIES AND COMPONENTS APPROVED BY THAT MANUFACTURER. BACKER RODS SHALL BE CLOSED CELL. DETAILS: FOLLOW COREY AMERICA'S LATEST PUBLISHED INFORMATION FOR STANDARD DETAIL TREATMENTS, UTILIZING PRECOR-SB SYSTEM. D. E. F. G. H. J. K. L. M. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. SHALL COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS AS SPECIFIED BY MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. SAMPLES: 1. G.C. SHALL PROVIDE ONE 12" X 12" SAMPLE OF THE PRECOR-SB SYSTEM, REPRESENTATIVE OF THE PROPER FINISH COATING, TEXTURE AND COLOR, SHALL BE PREPARED USING THE SAME TOOL AND TECHNIQUE AS REQUIRED BY THE JOB. 2. ONE SAMPLE SHALL REMAIN AT THE JOBSITE FOR COMPARISON OF TEXTURE AND COLOR. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLATION COMPANY: 1. SHALL BE A COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN THE WORK OF THIS SECTION AND APPROVED BY COREV AMERICA. 2. SHALL EMPLOY INSTALLATION PERSONNEL QUALIFIED IN THE TROWEL TRADES AND EXPERIENCED IN El F5 INSTALLATION. 5. INSULATION BOARD MANUFACTURER: 1. SHALL BE APPROVED IN WRITING BY COREV AMERICA AND BE COMPETENT IN THE MANUFACTURE OF EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION BOARD. 2. SHALL MANUFACTURE THE INSULATION BOARD ACCORDING TO COREY AMERICA'S SPECS. C. SEALANT CONTRACTOR: 1. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR OR OWNER SHALL ENSURE THAT THE SEALANT CONTRACTOR IS QUALIFIED TO PERFORM THE SEALANT WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SEALANT MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 2. THE APPLICATOR SHALL BE PROPERLY TRAINED SO THAT A COMPETENT INSTALLATION OF THE SPECIFIED SEALANT SYSTEM 15 ACHIEVED. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. DELIVER MATERIALS TO THE JOBSITE IN COREV AMERICA'S ORIGINAL UNOPENED PACKAGING WITH LABELS INTACT. 5. PROTECT MATERIALS FROM DAMAGE BY STORING IN A COOL, DRY SPACE, PROTECTED FROM DIRECT SUN AND FREEZING TEMPS. BUCKETS SHALL NOT BE STACKED MORE THAN THREE HIGH. 1.08 JOB CONDITIONS / ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. MATERIALS SHALL NOT BE APPLIED TO A SUBSTRATE WITH A TEMPERATURE LOWER THAN 40° F OR HIGHER THAN 100° F. B. THE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE WILL BE A MINIMUM OF 40° F AND RISING AT THE TIME OF INSTALLATION AND REMAIN SO FOR TWENTY-FOUR (24) HOURS THEREAFTER. C. FOR EIFS INSTALLATION IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURES LOWER THAN 40° F, ENCLOSE THE AREA AND APPLY SUPPLEMENTARY HEAT DURING INSTALLATION AND FOR A MINIMUM OF TWENTY-FOUR (24) HOURS AFTER THE INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS 15 COMPLETE. D. DO NOT INSTALL El F5 MATERIALS DURING RAIN OR OTHER INCLEMENT WEATHER, AND AFTER SUCH WEATHER, WAIT UNTIL SURFACES ARE COMPLETELY DRY BEFORE RESUMING WORK. E. ADJACENT AREAS AND MATERIALS 514ALL BE PROTECTED TO PRECLUDE DAMAGE DURING MATERIALS INSTALLATION. F. THE El F5 ASSEMBLY SHALL BE PROTECTED FROM WEATHER IMMEDIATELY AFTER INSTALLATION THROUGH USE OF FLASHING. PLASTIC SHOULD BE USED TO COVER AREAS THAT MAY BE EXPOSED TO MOISTURE PRIOR TO DRYING. G. PROPER SCHEDULING OF THE INSTALLATION WILL BE COORDINATED WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE JOB WILL BE STAFFED TO MAINTAIN THE SCHEDULE ESTABLISHED. H. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ACCESS TO ELECTRIC POWER AND CLEAN WATER WHERE THE EIFS SYSTEM 15 T0. BE INSTALLED. 1.09 WARRANTY A. COREV AMERICA WILL PROVIDE A WRITTEN I0 -YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTIVE MATERIALS. COREV AMERICA SHALL MAKE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. COREV AMERICA DOES NOT WARRANT WORKMANSHIP ASSOCIATED WITH INSTALLATION OF El F5 SYSTEM. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. PROVIDE El F5 SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES FROM SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER OR APPROVED SUPPLIER. THE FOLLOWING ARE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. COREV AMERICA - PRECOR-SB EIFS SYSTEM (1.713.937.3437) 2. PLASTIC COMPONENTS, INC. -ACCESSORIES (1.800.327.7077) 2.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. COREV AMERICA APPROVED PRODUCT FOR SURFACE PREPARATION, COMPATIBLE WITH PRECOR-5B SYSTEM COMPONENTS. 2.03 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE: A. IMPERCOREV ACRYLIC POLYMER ELASTOMERIC WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE 2.04 ADHESIVE A. UNIBASE ADHESIVE: ACRYLIC POLYMER CEMENT MODIFIER MIXED AT JOBSITE WITH PORTLAND CEMENT, USED TO ADHERE THE EPS TO APPROVED SUBSTRATE. 2.05 INSULATION BOARD A. NOMINAL 1.OLB./CUBIC FOOT EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE (EPS) INSULATION BOARD COMPLYING WITH ASTM C 578 TYPE 1 REQUIREMENTS AND EIMA GUIDELINE SPECIFICATION FOR EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE INSULATION BOARD. SUCH INSULATION BOARD SHALL BE PRODUCED FOR COREV AMERICA BY MANUFACTURERS APPROVED BY COREV AMERICA. MINIMUM THICKNESS OF EPS FOR THE PRECOR SYSTEM SHALL BE 3/4" AFTER ALL RASPING 15 COMPLETE, INCLUDING ANY POINT WHERE IT HAS BEEN ROUTERED OR GROOVED. MAXIMUM THICKNESS OF EPS SHALL BE 1" U.0.N. 2.06 BASE COAT A. UNIBASE-WP: AN ACRYLIC POLYMER CEMENT MODIFIER WITH A HIGH RESISTANCE TO MOISTURE. AN ELEMENT OF THE BASE COAT MIXTURE. 1. UNIBASE-WP BASECOAT: A COMBINATION OF UNIBASE-WP ACRYLIC POLYMER CEMENT MODIFIER AND PORTLAND CEMENT. MIXED AT THE J01351 TE. 2.07 REINFORCING MESHES A. COREVNET-DTA REINFORCING MESH (ADHESIVE -BACKED DETAIL): USED WITH PRECOR-SB SYSTEM TO TAPE SHEATHING JOINTS, AS AN ELEMENT OF THE SECONDARY WATER -RESISTIVE BARRIER. 5. COREVNET-DT REINFORCING MESH (DETAIL): A COREV-SUPPLIED TREATED GLASS -FIBER REINFORCING MESH IN THE UNIBASE LAMINA USED IN DETAILED WORK AND FOR BACKWRAP AT ALL SYSTEM TERMINATIONS TO STRENGTHEN THE SURFACE OF THE EPS INSULATION BOARD. 2.0 OZ./SY C. COREVNET-ST REINFORCING MESH (STANDARD): A COREV-SUPPLIED TREATED GLASS -FIBER REINFORCING MESH IN THE UNIBASE LAMINA USED TO STRENGTHEN THE SURFACE OF THE EPS INSULATION BOARD. 4.4 OZ./SY D. COREVNET-RF REINFORCING MESH (REINFORCED): A COREV-SUPPLIED TREATED GLASS -FIBER REINFORCING MESH IN THE UNIBASE LAMINA USED IN HIGH -TRAFFIC AREAS TO STRENGTHEN THE SURFACE OF THE EPS INSULATION BOARD. 10.6 OZ./SY E. COREVNET-HD REINFORCING MESH (HEAVY DUTY): A COREY -SUPPLIED TREATED GLASS -FIBER REINFORCING MESH IN THE UNIBASE LAMINA USED IN HIGH -TRAFFIC AREAS TO STRENGTHEN THE SURFACE OF THE EPS INSULATION BOARD. 14.0 OZ./SY F. COREVNET-SHD REINFORCING MESH (SUPER HEAVY DUTY): A COREV-SUPPLIED TREATED GLASS -FIBER REINFORCING MESH IN THE UNIBASE LAMINA USED IN HIGH -TRAFFIC AREAS TO STRENGTHEN THE SURFACE OF THE EPS INSULATION BOARD. 20.0 OZ./SY COREV-CORNER: A COREV-SUPPLIED TREATED GLASS -FIBER REINFORCING MESH TO ADD INCREASED IMPACT RESISTANCE TO CORNERS. 7.0 OZ./SY G. 2.08 PRIMER A. PINTUPRIME (VAPOR PERMEABLE, ACRYLIC PRIMER) 2.09 FINISH COAT A. QUARRY: FACTORY -MIXED, ACRYLIC POLYMER BASED FINISH COATING CONTAINING INTEGRAL COLOR. COLOR: QR7070F, TEXTURE: SMOOTH. 2.10 PENETRATING SEALER A. VITROCOREV (CLEAR, ACRYLIC SEALER) 2.11 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTS A. WATER: CLEAN AND CLEAR, FREE OF FOREIGN MATTER, AND POTABLE. 5. PORTLAND CEMENT: ASTM C 150 TYPE I OR II PORTLAND CEMENT, GRAY COLOR, WITH FINE POWDER CONSISTENCY AND FREE OF LUMPS. 2.12 MIXING A. MIX IN COMPLIANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS. B. MIX ONLY AS MUCH MATERIAL AS CAN READILY BE USED. C. DO NOT USE ANTI -FREEZE COMPOUNDS OR OTHER ADDITIVES. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. PREQUALIFY UNDER QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SPECIFICATION (SECTION 1.06.5). 3.02 EXAMINATION A. VERIFY THE SUBSTRATE IS APPROPRIATE FOR USE WITH THE COREV PRECOR SYSTEM. B. INSPECT SUBSTRATE SURFACES FOR: 1. CONTAMINATION: ALGAE, CHALKINESS, DIRT, DUST, EFFLORESCENCE, FORM OIL, FUNGUS, GREASE, LAITANCE, MILDEW OR OTHER FOREIGN SUBSTANCES. 2. SURFACE ABSORPTION AND CHALKINESS. 3. CRACKS: MEASURE CRACK WIDTH AND RECORD LOCATION OF CRACKS. 4. DAMAGE AND DETERIORATION. 5. MOISTURE CONTENT AND MOISTURE DAMAGE: USE A MOISTURE METER TO DETERMINE IF THE SURFACE IS DRY ENOUGH TO RECEIVE THE EIFS AND RECORD ANY AREAS OF MOISTURE DAMAGE. 6. COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION TOLERANCES: RECORD AREAS THAT ARE OUT OF TOLERANCE (GREATER THAN 1/4 INCH IN 8-0 FEET DEVIATION IN PLANE). C. REPORT DEVIATIONS FROM THE REQUIREMENTS OF PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER CONDITIONS THAT MIGHT ADVERSELY AFFECT THE EIFS INSTALLATION TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. DO NOT START WORK UNTIL DEVIATIONS ARE CORRECTED. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. REMOVE SURFACE CONTAMINANTS ON CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY SURFACES (REFER TO ASTM D 4258 AND D 4261). B. APPLY CONDITIONER BY TO CHALKING OR EXCESSIVELY ABSORPTIVE SURFACES. C. REPLACE WEATHER -DAMAGED SHEATHING AND REPAIR DAMAGED OR CRACKED SURFACES. D. LEVEL SURFACES TO COMPLY WITH REQUIRED TOLERANCES. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. INSTALL IN COMPLIANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS. 3.05 PROTECTION A. PROVIDE PROTECTION OF INSTALLED MATERIALS FROM WATER INFILTRATION INTO OR BEHIND THEM. PROVIDE PROTECTION OF INSTALLED MATERIALS FROM DUST, DIRT, PRECIPITATION, FREEZING AND CONTINUOUS HIGH HUMIDITY UNTIL THEY ARE FULLY DRY. SECTION 072400 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS (EIFS) - STO THERM HURRICANE IMPACT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION OF HURRICANE IMPACT RESISTANT EIF SYSTEM WITH SECONDARY MOISTURE BARRIER AND PROVISIONS FOR DRAINAGE. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. SECTION 072100: THERMAL INSULATION B. SECTION 075900: ROOF REPAIRS C. SECTION 076000: FLASHING AND SHEET METAL D. SECTION 079200: JOINT SEALANTS E. SECTION 084113: ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS F. SECTION 088100: GLAZING G. SECTION 092900: GYPSUM BOARD 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. WIND LOAD: DESIGN FOR MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE SYSTEM DEFLECTION, NORMAL TO THE PLANE OF THE WALL, OF L/240. DESIGN FOR WIND LOAD IN CONFORMANCE WITH CODE REQUIREMENTS. 5. MOISTURE CONTROL: PREVENT THE ACCUMULATION OF WATER BEHIND THE EIFS SYSTEM, EITHER BY CONDENSATION OR LEAKAGE THROUGH THE WALL CONSTRUCTION, IN THE DESIGN AND DETAILING OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY. 1. PROVIDE FLASHING TO DIRECT WATER TO THE EXTERIOR WHERE IT 15 LIKELY TO PENETRATE COMPONENTS IN THE WALL ASSEMBLY, INCLUDING, ABOVE WINDOW AND DOOR HEADS, BENEATH WINDOW AND DOOR SILLS, AT ROOF/WALL INTERSECTIONS, DECKS, ABUTMENTS OF LOWER WALLS WITH HIGHER WALLS, ABOVE PROJECTING FEATURES, AND AT THE BASE OF THE WALL. 2. VAPOR DIFFUSION AND CONDENSATION-- PERFORM A DEW POINT ANALYSIS OF THE WALL ASSEMBLY TO DETERMINE THE POTENTIAL FOR ACCUMULATION OF MOISTURE IN THE WALL ASSEMBLY AS A RESULT OF WATER VAPOR DIFFUSION AND CONDENSATION. ADJUST INSULATION THICKNESS AND/OR OTHER WALL ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS ACCORDINGLY TO MINIMIZE THE RISK OF CONDENSATION. AVOID THE USE OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON THE INTERIOR SIDE OF THE WALL IN WARM, HUMID CLIMATES. C. IMPACT RESISTANCE PER 2.06 REINFORCING MESHES, PROVIDE ULTRA-HIGH IMPACT RESISTANCE TO A MIN. HEIGHT OF 6'-0" (1.8 M) ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AT ALL AREAS ACCESSIBLE TO PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC AND OTHER AREAS EXPOSED TO ABNORMAL STRESS OR IMPACT. D. JOINTS 1. DESIGN MINIMUM 3/4 INCH WIDE EXPANSION JOINTS IN THE EIFS WHERE THEY EXIST IN THE SUBSTRATE OR SUPPORTING CONSTRUCTION, WHERE THE EIFS ADJOINS DISSIMILAR CONSTRUCTION OR MATERIALS, AT CHANGES IN BUILDING HEIGHT, AND AT FLOOR LINES IN MULTI-LEVEL WOOD FRAME CONSTRUCTION. 2. MINIMUM 1/2 INCH WIDE SEALANT JOINTS AT ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH THE EIFS (WINDOWS, DOORS, ETC.). 3. INSTALL BACKER ROD AND SEALANT THAT HAS BEEN EVALUATED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 1382, "TEST METHOD FOR DETERMINING TENSILE ADHESION PROPERTIES OF SEALANTS NHEN USED IN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) JOINTS," AND THAT MEETS MINIMUM 50% ELONGATION AFTER CONDITIONING. 4. DESIGN JOINTS WITH SECONDARY MOISTURE PROTECTION AND DRAIN JOINTS TO THE EXTERIOR. REFER TO STOREFRONT DETAILS FOR LOCATIONS IF REQUIRED. E. TRIM, PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES AND REVEALS 1. ALL TRIM AND PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES MUST HAVE A MINIMUM I:2 U71 SLOPE ALONG THEIR TOP SURFACE. ALL HORIZONTAL REVEALS MUST HAVE A MINIMUM 1:2 [271 SLOPE ALONG THEIR BOTTOM SURFACE. F. FIRE PROTECTION DO NOT USE FOAM PLASTIC IN EXCESS OF 4 INCHES THICK. WHERE A FIRE -RESISTANCE RATING IS REQUIRED BY CODE USE EIFS OVER RATED ASSEMBLY. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL AS DIRECTED BY LSDtC PROJECT MANAGER. 5. PREPARE AND SUBMIT PROJECT -SPECIFIC DETAILS (WHEN REQUIRED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS). C. INSULATION BOARD MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS 1. RECOGNIZED BY STO AS CAPABLE OF PRODUCING INSULATION BOARD TO MEET SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS, AND HOLD A VALID LICENSING AGREEMENT WITH STO. 2. LISTED BY AN APPROVED AGENCY. 3. LABEL INSULATION BOARD WITH INFORMATION REQUIRED BY STO, THE APPROVED LISTING AGENCY AND THE APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS 1. MEMBER IN GOOD STANDING OF THE EIFS INDUSTRY MEMBERS ASSOCIATION (EIMA). 2. SYSTEM MANUFACTURER FOR A MINIMUM OF TWENTY (20) YEARS. MANUFACTURING FACILITIES 150 9002 CERTIFIED. MANUFACTURER'S WALL ASSEMBLY LISTED IN GYPSUM ASSOCIATION FIRE RESISTANCE DESIGN MANUAL. CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS ENGAGED IN APPLICATION OF EIFS FOR A MINIMUM OF THREE (3) YEARS. 2. KNOWLEDGEABLE IN THE PROPER USE AND HANDLING OF STO MATERIALS AND LISTED BY STO AS HAVING ATTENDED STO El F5 CONTINUING EDUCATION. 3. EMPLOY SKILLED MECHANICS WI -10 ARE EXPERIENCED AND KNOWLEDGEABLE IN EIFS APPLICATION, AND FAMILIAR WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFIED WORK. 4. SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF MINIMUM OF THREE (3) PROJECTS OF SIMILAR SIZE AND COMPLEXITY OF THE SPECIFIED PROJECT. 5. PROVIDE THE PROPER EQUIPMENT, MANPOWER AND SUPERVISION ON THE JOB SITE TO INSTALL THE SYSTEM IN COMPLIANCE WITH STO'S PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS AND DETAILS AND THE PROJECT PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. INSULATION BOARD MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS 1. RECOGNIZED BY STO AS CAPABLE OF PRODUCING INSULATION BOARD TO MEET SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS, AND HOLD A VALID LICENSING AGREEMENT WITH STO. 2. LISTED BY AN APPROVED AGENCY 3. LABEL INSULATION BOARD WITH INFORMATION REQUIRED BY STO, THE APPROVED LISTED AGENCY AND THE APPLICABLE BUILDING CODE. 5. C. 3. 1. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. DELIVER ALL MATERIALS IN THEIR ORIGINAL SEALED CONTAINERS BEARING MANUFACTURER'S NAME AND IDENTIFICATION OF PRODUCT. B. PROTECT COATINGS (PAIL PRODUCTS) FROM FREEZING AND TEMPERATURES IN EXCESS OF 90°F STORE AWAY FROM DIRECT SUNLIGHT. C. PROTECT PORTLAND CEMENT BASED MATERIALS (BAG PRODUCTS) FROM MOISTURE AND HUMIDITY. STORE UNDER COVER OFF THE GROUND IN A DRY LOCATION. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. MAINTAIN AMBIENT AND SURFACE TEMPERATURES ABOVE 40°F DURING APPLICATION AND DRYING PERIOD, MINIMUM 24 HOURS AFTER APPLICATION OF EIFS. B. PROVIDE SUPPLEMENTARY HEAT FOR INSTALLATION IN TEMPERATURES LESS THAN 40°F (4°C). C. PROVIDE PROTECTION OF SURROUNDING AREAS AND ADJACENT SURFACES FROM APPLICATION OF MATERIALS. 1.08 COORDINATION/SCHEDULING A. PROVIDE SITE GRADING SUCH THAT EIFS TERMINATES ABOVE FINISHED GRADE A MINIMUM OF 8 INCHE5 (203 MM) OR AS REQUIRED BY CODE. B. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WATERPROOFING, ROOFING MEMBRANE, WINDOWS, DOORS AND OTHER WALL PENETRATIONS TO PROVIDE A LEAK -PROOF BUILDING ENVELOPE. C. PROVIDE PROTECTION OF ROUGH OPENINGS BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS, DOORS, AND OTHER PENETRATIONS THROUGH THE WALL AND PROVIDE SILL FLASHING. D. INSTALL WINDOW AND DOOR HEAD FLASHING IMMEDIATELY AFTER WINDOWS AND DOORS ARE INSTALLED. E. INSTALL DIVERTER FLASHINGS WHEREVER WATER CAN ENTER THE WALL ASSEMBLY TO DIRECT WATER TO THE EXTERIOR. F. INSTALL COPINGS AND SEALANT IMMEDIATELY AFTER INSTALLATION OF THE EIFS SYSTEM AND WHEN El F5 COATINGS ARE DRY. G. ATTACH PENETRATIONS THROUGH EIFS TO STRUCTURAL SUPPORT AND PROVIDE WATER TIGHT SEAL AT PENETRATIONS. I.09 WARRANTY A. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER'S 7 YEAR STANDARD LABOR AND MATERIAL WARRANTY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. PROVIDE MOISTURE BARRIER, EIF SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES FROM SINGLE SOURCE MANUFACTURER OR APPROVED SUPPLIER. B. TI -4E FOLLOWING ARE ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 1. STO CORP. --MOISTURE BARRIER, EIF SYSTEM (1.888.786.3437) a. STO HI- AT SYSTEM- SMALL MISSILE: MIAMI- DADE COUNTY PRODUCT APPROVAL: NOA#03-0527.12 b. STO W- AT SYSTEM- LARGE MISSILE, MIAMI- DADE COUNTY PRODUCT APPROVAL: NOA#03-0422.01 2. PLASTIC COMPONENTS, INC. --ACCESSORIES (1.800.327.7077) C. ACCESSORIES 1. STARTER TRACK RIGID PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) PLASTIC TRACK PART NO. STDE AS FURNISHED BY PLASTIC COMPONENTS, INC., 9051 NW 97T1-1 TERRACE, MIAMI, FLORIDA 33178 (1.800.327.7077). 2.02 MOISTURE BARRIER A. STO GUARD AIR AND MOISTURE BARRIER SYSTEM. 1. STO GOLD FILL AND STO GUARD MESH JOINT TREATMENT SYSTEM FOR ROUGH OPENING PROTECTION AND JOINT TREATMENT OF WALL SHEATHING. 2. STO GOLD COAT READY MIXED ACRYLIC BASED WATER PROOFING COATING. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. CEMENTITIOUS ADHESIVE 1. STO PR IMER/ADHESIVE-B--ONE COMPONENT POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT BASED, FACTORY BLEND, ADHESIVE WITH LESS THAN 33 PERCENT PORTLAND CEMENT CONTENT BY WEIGHT (FOR USE OVER EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING, DENS -GLASS GOLD SHEATHING, EXTERIOR CEMENTITIOUS SHEATHING , CONCRETE, MASONRY OR PLASTER SURFACES). 2.04 INSULATION BOARD A. STO EPS INSULATION BOARD 1. NOMINAL 1.0 LB./FT3 (16 KG/M3) EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE (EPS) INSULATION BOARD IN COMPLIANCE WITH ASTM C 578 TYPE I REQUIREMENTS, AND EIMA GUIDELINE SPECIFICATION FOR EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE (EPS) INSULATION BOARD. (NOTE: MINIMUM REQUIRED THICKNESS IS 2 INCHES [25 MM] AND MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE THICKNESS IS TYPICALLY 4 INCHES [100 MM] UNLESS THICKER DIMENSIONS ARE APPROVED BY THE CODE OFFICIAL). 2.05 BASE COAT A CEMENTITIOUS BASE COAT 1. STO PRIMER/ADHESIVE-B--ONE COMPONENT POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENT BASED FACTORY. BLEND, BASE COAT WITH LESS THAN 33 PERCENT PORTLAND CEMENT CONTENT BY WEIGHT. B. WATERPROOF BASE COAT 1. STO FLEXYL--TWO COMPONENT FIBER REINFORCED ACRYLIC BASED WATERPROOF BASE COAT MIXED WITH PORTLAND GEMENT (FOR USE AS A WATERPROOF BASE COAT TO WATERPROOF FOUNDATIONS, PARAPETS, SPLASH AREAS, TRIM AND OTHER PROJECTING ARCHITECTURAL FEATURES). 2.06 REINFORCING MESHES A. HIGH IMPACT MESH 1. STO INTERMEDIATE MESH --NOMINAL 11.2 OZ./YD2 (380 G/M2), HIGH IMPACT, INTERWOVEN, OPEN WEAVE GLASS FIBER FABRIC WITH ALKALINE RESISTANT COATING FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH STO MATERIALS (ACHIEVES HIGH IMPACT CLASSIFICATION). 5. ULTRA-HIGH IMPACT MESH 1. STO ARMOR MAT --NOMINAL 15 OZ./YD2 (509 G/M2), ULTRA-HIGH IMPACT, DOUBLE STRAND, INTERWOVEN, OPEN -WEAVE GLASS FIBER FABRIC WITH ALKALINE RESISTANT COATING FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH STO MATERIALS (RECOMMENDED TO A MINIMUM HEIGHT OF 6'-0" [1.8N] ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AT ALL AREAS ACCESSIBLE TO PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC AND OTHER AREAS EXPOSED TO ABNORMAL STRESS OR IMPACT. ACHIEVES ULTRAHIGH IMPACT CLASSIFICATION WHEN APPLIED BENEATH STO MESH OR STO INTERMEDIATE MESH). C. SPECIALTY MESHES 1. STO DETAIL MESH --NOMINAL 4.5 OZ./YD2 (153 G/M2), FLEXIBLE, SYMMETRICAL, INTERLACED GLASS FIBER FABRIC, WITH ALKALINE RESISTANT COATING FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH STO MATERIALS (USED FOR STANDARD EIFS BACKWRAPP I NG, AESTHETIC DETAILING, SPLICE JOINTS IN INTERMEDIATE MESH, AND PROTECTION OF ROUGH OPENINGS WITHMOISTURE BARRIER). 2. STO CORNER MAT --NOMINAL 7.8 OZ./YD2 (265 G/M2), PRE -CREASED, HEAVY-DUTY, OPEN -WEAVE WOVEN GLASS FIBER FABRIC WITH ALKALINE RESISTANT COATING FOR COMPATIBILITY WITH STO MATERIALS (USED FOR MAXIMUM IMPACT PROTECTION AT INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS). 2.07 PRIMER A. STO PRIMER ACRYLIC BASED TINTED PRIMER. 2.08 FINISH COAT A. STO LIMESTONE FINISH (2 -STEP PROCESS, USING STO): 1.0 MM AGGREGATE AS 1ST COAT AND STOUT FREEFORM AS 2ND COAT), CUSTOM FINISH AS INDICATED ON STOREFRONT DRAWINGS. 2.09 PENETRATING SEALER A. STO PENETRATING SEALER (CLEAR, SILOXANE-BASED) 2.10 JOB MIXED INGREDIENTS A. WATER --CLEAN AND POTABLE. B. PORTLAND CEMENT --TYPE I IN CONFORMANCE WITH ASTM C 150. 2.11 MIXING A. STO PLEX W: ADD WATER AS DIRECTED ON LABELING. B. STO LEVELER: MIX RATIO WITH WATER: 6-7 QUARTS (5.7-6.6 L) OF CLEAN WATER PER 60 POUND (27.3 KG) BAG OF STO LEVELER. POUR WATER INTO A CLEAN MIXING PAIL ADD STO LEVELER, MIX TO A UNIFORM CONSISTENCY AND ALLOW TO SET FOR APPROXIMATELY 5 MINUTES. ADJUST MIX IF NECESSARY WITH ADDITIONAL STO LEVELER OR WATER AND REMIX TO A UNIFORM TROWEL CONSISTENCY. AVOID RETEMPERING. KEEP MIX RATIO CONSISTENT. DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM WATER AMOUNT IN MIX RATIO. C. STO RFP --MIX WITH A CLEAN, RUST -FREE HIGH SPEED MIXER TO A UNIFORM CONSISTENCY. D. STO FLEXYL--MIX RATIO WITH PORTLAND CEMENT: 1:1 RATIO BY WEIGHT. POUR STO FLEXYL INTO A CLEAN MIXING PAIL. ADD PORTLAND CEMENT, MIX TO A UNIFORM CONSISTENCY AND ALLOW TO SET FOR APPROXIMATELY FIVE MINUTES. ADJUST MIX IF NECESSARY WITH ADDITIONAL STO FLEXYL AND REMIX TO A UNIFORM TROWEL CONSISTENCY. AVOID RE -TEMPERING. KEEP MIX RATIO CONSISTENT. E. STO PRIMER --MIX WITH A CLEAN, RUST -FREE HIGH SPEED MIXER TO A UNIFORM CONSISTENCY. F. STOLIT--MIX WITH A CLEAN, RUST -FREE HIGH SPEED MIXER TO A UNIFORM CONSISTENCY. A SMALL AMOUNT OF WATER MAY BE ADDED TO ADJUST WORKABILITY. LIMIT ADDITION OF WATER TO AMOUNT NEEDED TO ACHIEVE THE FINISH TEXTURE. G. MIX ONLY AS MUCH MATERIAL AS CAN READILY BE USED. H. DO NOT USE ANTI -FREEZE COMPOUNDS OR OTHER ADDITIVES. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS A. PREQUALIFY UNDER QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SPECIFICATION (SECTION 1.05.5). 3.02 EXAMINATION A. INSPECT SURFACES FOR: 1. CONTAMINATION -- ALGAE, CHALKINESS, DIRT, DUST, EFFLORESCENCE, FORM, OIL, FUNGUS, GREASE, LAITANCE, MILDEW OR OTHER FOREIGN SUBSTANCES. 2. SURFACE ABSORPTION AND CHALKINESS. 3. CRACKS -- MEASURE CRACK WIDTH AND RECORD LOCATION OF CRACKS. 4. DAMAGE AND DETERIORATION. 5. MOISTURE CONTENT AND MOISTURE DAMAGE -- USE A MOISTURE METER TO DETERMINE IF THE SURFACE 15 DRY ENOUGH TO RECEIVE THE EIFS AND RECORD ANY AREAS OF MOISTURE DAMAGE. 6. COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION TOLERANCES -- RECORD AREAS THAT ARE OUT OF TOLERANCE (GREATER THAN 1/4 INCH IN 8-0 FEET DEVIATION IN PLANE). INSPECT SHEATHING APPLICATION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE REQUIREMENT: 1. EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING--GA-253 2. EXTERIOR GRADE AND EXPOSURE I WOOD BASED SHEATHING --APA ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION E 30 3. GLASS MAT FACED GYPSUM SHEATHING --GEORGIA PACIFIC PUBLICATION 101514 4. CEMENTITIOUS SHEATHING --CONSULT MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED RECOMMENDATIONS REPORT DEVIATIONS FROM THE REQUIREMENTS OF PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER CONDITIONS THAT MIGHT ADVERSELY AFFECT THE EIFS INSTALLATION TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. DO NOT START WORK UNTIL DEVIATIONS ARE CORRECTED. 5. C. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. REMOVE SURFACE CONTAMINANTS ON CONCRETE AND CONCRETE MASONRY SURFACES (REFER TO ASTM D 4258 AND D 4261). B. APPLY CONDITIONER BY SPRAYER OR ROLLER TO CHALKING OR EXCESSIVELY ABSORPTIVE SURFACES. C. REPLACE WEATHER -DAMAGED SHEATHING AND REPAIR DAMAGED OR CRACKED SURFACES. D. LEVEL SURFACES TO COMPLY WITH REQUIRED TOLERANCES. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. INSTALL El F5 IN COMPLIANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS (SEE ADDENDUM). 3.05 PROTECTION A. PROVIDE PROTECTION OF INSTALLED MATERIALS FROM WATER INFILTRATION INTO OR BEHIND THEM. 5. PROVIDE PROTECTION OF INSTALLED MATERIALS FROM DUST, DIRT, PRECIPITATION, FREEZING AND CONTINUOUS NIGH HUMIDITY UNTIL THEY ARE FULLY DRY. SECTION 076000 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL A. 5. C. D. E. F. G. H. GENERAL: PROVIDE FLASHING AND SHEET METAL, REGLETS, AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR ROOF REPAIRS AND A COMPLETE, WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION. FLASHING/SHEET METAL AT STOREFRONT 15 PREF INISHED. STANDARDS: CONFORM TO SMACNA "ARCHITECTURAL SHEET METAL MANUAL" REQUIREMENTS FOR FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS: ALLOW FOR MOVEMENT OF COMPONENTS WITHOUT CAUSING BUCKLING, FAILURE OF JOINT SEALS, UNDUE STRESS ON FASTENERS OR OTHER DETRIMENTAL EFFECTS, WHEN SUBJECT TO 100 YEAR SEASONAL TEMPERATURE RANGES. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA FOR MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS. WARRANTY: CORRECT FAILURE OF METAL FLASHING SYSTEM TO RESIST PENETRATION OF WATER AND DAMAGE FROM WIND; WARRANTY PERIOD TWO YEARS. 1. FLASHING AND SI-IEET METAL: MATCH EXISTING, BUT NOT LESS THAN FOLLOWING.GALVANIZED METAL FLASHING: ASTM A924 AND A653 G90 GALVANIZED STEEL; MINIMUM 24 GAGE. 2. PREFINISHED METAL FLASHING: 24 GAGE GALVANIZED STEEL WITH FACTORY FINISHED KYNAR 500 TYPE FLUOROPOLYMER COATING AND STRIPPABLE PROTECTIVE FILM; COLOR AS SELECTED FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE OF COLORS. 3. ALUMINUM FLASHING: ASTM 5209, ALLOY AS REQUIRED TO MATCH FINISH SPECIFIED FOR OTHER ALUMINUM COMPONENTS; THICKNESS MINIMUM 0.050" AT FLASHINGS. 4. STAINLESS STEEL 51-IEET METAL: ASTM A666, 2D ANNEALED FINISH, SOFT TEMPER EXCEPT WHERE HARDER TEMPER IS REQUIRED FOR FORMING OR PERFORMANCE; 0.015" (28 GAGE) TYPICAL. 5. COPPER SHEET METAL: ASTM 5370, COLD ROLLED 16 OZ. (0.0216") THICK; SOFT TEMPER WHERE REQUIRED FOR FORMING. REGLETS: FRY/SPRINGLOK OR; FABRICATE OF SAME METAL AS ADJACENT FLASHING AND SHEET METAL. METAL TO METAL SEALANT: BUTYL TYPE; NON -STAINING, NON -CORROSIVE, NON -SHRINKING, NON -SAGGING, ULTRA -VIOLET AND OZONE RESISTANT. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 0 2 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SHREMSHOCK Shremshock Architects, Inc. 7400 W. Campus Rd. Suite 150 New Albany, OH 43054 t: 614 545 4550 1 f: 614 545 4555 1 shremshock.com Gerald S. Shremshock, Architect Timothy J. remshock, Architect z 0 V D cc F - z 0 V tz V w 0 w 0 1- >z s = ,=oa<W tan,„ W fA 0 = ▪ 3 g O N- p W Vl W W K a -o = W N O n-20 • 3� m H z W IL Z w 8 o F z K R'= O d 4 V O = U U n ~ zr"'�"� Qao� v�=zaoo ea 6 I_ O2Q Z •IS W C N E W V) p W W m o W m o N�00W Z W = 2 = O= z N 1lEp NWW.LO.N..W4oprC oW0aO aoazd: ita�aEi's. cv e imma LLJ wCi) 11== e03 w 00 00 Z� V O II- �ZO =UN'S ) „ N0 u,t, to1 PROJECT INFORMATION: Y Y O) U Z 0 - 1 00 V) 0 V) W W 0 0 os J REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE RECEIVED SEP 2 2 2017 PERMIT CENTER DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 AM HMG SKM ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING A. GENERAL: PATCH EXISTING FIREPROOFING AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CODES FOR CONSTRUCTION TYPE; NO ASBESTOS PERMITTED. B. CONFORM TO APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR BOTH F AND T RATINGS. C. STANDARDS: PASS ASTM E814 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRE STOPS, ASTM E119 FIRE TESTS AND ASTM E84 FLAME SPREAD/SMOKE CONTRIBUTION MAXIMUM 25/25. 1. FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS: COMPLY WITH REQUIRED RATINGS BASED ON TESTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E11'1. 2. SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS: MAXIMUM 25 FLAME SPREAD AND 25 SMOKE DENSITY WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E84. D. CERTIFICATE: SUBMIT MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION INDICATING APPLICATOR ACCEPTABILITY AND MATERIAL COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. 1. CERTIFICATION SHALL INDICATE NEW MATERIALS USED TO PATCH EXISTING FIREPROOFED MEMBERS AT NEW AND EXISTING WORK ARE COMPATIBLE WITH EXISTING FIREPROOFING MATERIALS AND MEET ALL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. E. QUALIFICATION OF APPLICATOR: FIRM ACCEPTABLE TO MANUFACTURER OF FIREPROOFING MATERIALS, WITH MINIMUM FIVE YEARS SUCCESSFUL EXPERIENCE ON PROJECTS OF SIMILAR SCOPE. F. MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS: MATCH EXISTING BUT NOT LESS THAN N.R. GRACE/MONOKOTE OR ALBI MANUFACTURING DIVISION STANCHEM/DURASPRAY. G. INSTALLATION: INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND FIRE TEST RESULTS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS. 1. PROTECT ADJACENT SURFACES AND EQUIPMENT FROM DAMAGE BY OVERSPRAY, FALLOUT, AND DUSTING; MASK ADJACENT WORK AS REQUIRED. CLOSE OFF AND SEAL DUCT WORK IN AREAS WHERE FIREPROOFING 15 BEING APPLIED. 2. CLEAN SUBSTRATE OF DIRT, DUST, GREASE, OIL, LOOSE MATERIAL, PAINTS, PRIMERS, AND OTHER MATTER WHICH AFFECTS BOND OF SPRAYED FIREPROOFING. T TT G 3. APPLY FIREPROOFING IN SUFFICIENT THICKNESS AND DENSITY TO ACHIEVE REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS. 4. APPLY FIREPROOFING OVERSUBSTRATE, BUILD ING TO REQUI RED THICKNESS WITH AS MANY PASSES OR STAGES NECESSARY TO COVER WITH MONOLITHIC BLANKET OF UNIFORM DENSITY AND TEXTURE. SECTION 078400 - FIRESTOPPING A. GENERAL: PROVIDE EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR FIRESTOPPING NOT PROVIDED ELSEWHERE; TYPE SUITABLE FOR APPLICATION INDICATED WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 5. CODES: CONFORM TO APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS FOR BOTH F AND T RATINGS. C. STANDARDS: PASS ASTM E814 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRE STOPS, ASTM E119 FIRE TESTS AND ASTM E84 FLAME SPREAD/SMOKE CONTRIBUTION MAXIMUM 25/25. D. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND APPLICABLE CODES. E. MANUFACTURERS: 3M/FIRE BARRIER, STI/SPECSEAL OR PENSIL, OR HILTI/FIRESTOP SYSTEMS. F. GENERAL: CHOOSE PRODUCTS AND METHODS MEETING APPLICABLE CODES AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EACH FIRESTOPPING APPLICATION, SUBJECT TO ARCHITECT'S ACCEPTANCE. G. FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS: FURNISH MATERIALS FOR PENETRATIONS IN TIME -RATED FLOOR, WALL, AND PARTITION ASSEMBLIES CAPABLE OF PREVENTING PASSAGE OF FLAME, SMOKE, AND HOT GASES. 1. PENETRATION TEST: FURNISH MATERIALS PASSING ASTM E814 FOR PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING INDICATING MAINTENANCE OF TIME -RATED ADJACENT ASSEMBLIES. 2. FIRESTOPPING: MAINTAIN FIRE RATING OF ASSEMBLY IN WHICH FIRESTOPPING IS INSTALLED, SUCH AS FLOOR, PARTITION, OR WALL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E119 TESTS. H. INSTALLATION: INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND FIRE TEST RESULTS AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE REQUIRED FIRE RATINGS. 1. FIELD INSPECTIONS: MAINTAIN COPY OF MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS AT EACH WORK AREA. SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANT A. GENERAL: PROVIDE EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR JOINT SEALERS NOT PROVIDED ELSEWHERE; TYPE SUITABLE FOR APPLICATION INDICATED WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. B. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: FIRM WITH MINIMUM FIVE YEAR'S SUCCESSFUL EXPERIENCE ON PROJECTS OF SIMILAR TYPE AND SIZE, USING SPECIFIED PRODUCTS C. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES OF EXPOSED JOINT SEALERS IN REQUIRED COLORS. D. WARRANTY: REPAIR OR REPLACE JOINT SEALERS WHICH FAIL TO PERFORM AS INTENDED, BECAUSE OF LEAKING, CRUMBLING, HARDENING, SHRINKAGE, BLEEDING, SAGGING, STAINING AND LOSS OF ADHESION; WARRANTY PERIOD TWO YEARS. EXTERIOR NON -TRAFFIC JOINTS: GE/SILPRUF, DOW/790-795, PECORA/864 NST, OR TREMCO/SPECTRUM 3 LOW MODULUS SILICONE SEALANT. TRAFFIC BEARING JOINTS: TREMCO/VULKEM 345, PECORA/NR-200 UREXPAN, OR SONNEBORN DIVISION CHEMREX/SL 2 MULTI-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE, SELF -LEVELING JOINT SEALER. MILDEW -RESISTANT SANITARY SEALANTS: GE/SCS 1700 SANITARY SEALANT, DOW/786 BATHTUB CAULK, PECORA/863 #345 WHITE, OR TREMCO/TREMSIL 200; PROVIDE AT INTERIOR AREAS WHERE SEALANT WILL BE EXPOSED TO WATER. I.1. GENERAL INTERIOR JOINT SEALER: PECORA/AC-20, SONNEBORN/SONOLAC, OR LATEX EMULSION. I MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: PRIMERS, SEALERS, JOINT CLEANERS, BOND BREAKER TAPE, AND SEALANT BACKER RODS AS RECOMMENDED BY SEALANT MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATIONS INDICATED. 1. OVERSIZE BACKER -ROD MINIMUM 30% TO 50% OF JOINT OPENING. AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS HEREIN. J PREPARATION: CLEAN JOINT SURFACES IMMEDIATELY BEFORE INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALER, AND PRIME OR SEAL JOINT SURFACES AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER. K. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND ASTM C1193. 1. EMPLOY INSTALLATION TECHNIQUES WHICH WILL ENSURE JOINT SEALERS ARE DEPOSITED IN UNIFORM, CONTINUOUS RIBBONS WITHOUT GAPS OR AIR POCKETS, WITH COMPLETE "WETTING" OF BOND SURFACES. G. SECTION 079513 - EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES A. GENERAL: 1. JOINT COVER SYSTEMS SHALL ALLOW UNRESTRAINED MOVEMENT OF JOINT WITHOUT DISENGAGEMENT OF COVER. 2. JOINT SIZES SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 3. FIRE RATING CHARACTERISTICS: a. PREFABRICATED FIRE BARRIER ASSEMBLIES SHALL NAVE RATINGS NOT LESS THAN THE RATING OF ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, UL 263, NFPA 251, ASTM E119 AND ASTM E1399 b. SYSTEM SHALL BE CAPABLE OF ANTICIPATED MOVEMENT WHILE MAINTAINING FIRE RATING. 4. PROVIDE MANUFACTURERS STANDARD ONE YEAR MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP WARRANTY. 5. PRODUCTS: 1. MM SYSTEMS CORPORATION (50 MM WAY, P.O. SOX 98, PANDERGRASS, GEORGIA 30567; 1.800.241.3460 OR 1.706.824.7500). OR EQUAL AS APPROVED BY LSD*C PROJECT MANAGER AND ARCHITECT; SUBMIT FOR REVIEW OF EQUAL PRODUCT. 2. PRODUCTS JOINT SIZES AS INDICATED IN DRAWINGS. REFER TO MANUFACTURER FOR CORRESPONDING MODEL NUMBER: a. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING CONDITION = FLEXIBLE WALL * CEILING VSW SERIES b. ACT CEILING CONDITION = FLEXIBLE WALL $ CEILING VSG SERIES c. FLOOR TO WALL CONDITION = FLUSHLINE FSE SERIES d. FLOOR TO FLOOR CONDITION = FLUSHLINE FS SERIES e. WALL TO WALL CONDITION = FLUSHLINE FSWP SERIES f. CORNER WALL CONDITION = FLUSHLINE FSWPL SERIES CARPET TO WALL CONDITION = FLUSHLINE FSSTE SERIES h. CARPET TO CARPET CONDITION = FLUSHLINE FSST SERIES 3. FINISH: MILL FINISH ALUMINUM FRAMES WITH COLORS AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. ALUMINUM WALL COVERS TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM C. EXECUTION: 1. PREPARE SURFACE TO RECEIVE EXPANSION JOINT SYSTEM IN ACCORD WITH MANUFACTURE'S PRODUCT DATA AND WITH SI -IOP DRAWINGS. 2. INSTALL EXPANSION JOINT ASSEMBLIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT DATA AND APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. 3. COVER AND PROTECT EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES FROM CONSTRUCTION TRAFFIC. 9• DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 081000 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. GENERAL: PROVIDE STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION; COORDINATE WITH SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE. 5. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE "STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES" OR NAAMM HOLLOW METAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION "HOLLOW METAL MANUAL". 1. FIRE RATED STANDARDS: FURNISH MATERIALS -TESTED, LABELED AND INSPECTED PER UL, WARNOCK HERSEY, OR TESTING AGENCY ACCEPTABLE TO APPLICABLE AUTHORITIES. C. SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT PRODUCT DATA. D. MANUFACTURERS: AMWELD (1.330.527.4385), CECO (1.888.232.6366), OR PIONEER (1.201.933.1900). E. HOLLOW METAL DOORS: FLUSH HOLLOW METAL DOORS FULL FLUSH TYPE WITH FLUSH EDGE; CLOSE TOP AT EXTERIOR DOORS. 1. CORE: PROVIDE STEEL STIFFENED. CORE; INSULATED AT EXTERIOR DOORS. 2. GAGE: PROVIDE MIN 18 GAGE AT INTERIOR DOORS, MIN 16 GAGE AT EXTERIOR DOORS. F. PRESSED STEEL (HOLLOW METAL) FRAMES: MINIMUM 16 GAGE KNOCK -DOWN (FIELD -ASSEMBLED) FRAMES. G. FIRE RATED UNITS: CONFORM TO NFPA 80; PROVIDE UL OR WARNOCK HERSEY LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES AS REQUIRED. J. K. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE DOOR SILENCERS, ANCHORS, AND ACCESSORIES. FABRICATION: CONFORM TO REQUIREMENTS OF SDI OR NAAMM. 1. DOOR SILENCERS: PLACE MINIMUM T1 -TREE SINGLE BUMPERS ON SINGLE DOOR FRAMES; SPACE EQUALLY ALONG STRIKE JAMBS; PLACE TWO SINGLE BUMPERS ON DOUBLE DOOR FRAME HEADS. PRIME PAINT INTERIOR UNITS, GALVANIZE AND PRIME PAINT EXTERIOR UNITS; MINIMUM A60 GALVANIZING; CLEAN, DEGREASE AND FACTORY PRIME PAINT. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND EITHER SDI OR NAAMM STANDARDS. 1. INSTALL FIRE RATED UNITS IN CONFORMANCE WITI-I FIRE LABEL REQUIREMENTS AND NFPA80. 2. INSTALL DOORS AND FRAMES PLUMB AND SQUARE, AND WITH MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTORTION OF 1/16". SECTION 081400 - WOOD DOORS A. 5. C. D. E. F. G. H. J. K. L. M. GENERAL: PROVIDE WOOD DOORS AND WOOD DOOR FRAMES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION; COORDINATE WITH HARDWARE IN SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (WDMA): GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS. SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE AND SHOP FINISHED DOOR SAMPLES. PROJECT CONDITIONS: DO NOT DELIVER OR INSTALL DOORS UNTIL CONDITIONS FOR TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE 1 -TUMIDITY HAVE BEEN STABILIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITI.1 REFERENCED STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO PROJECT LOCATION WARRANTY: PROVIDE FOR REPLACING, REHANGING AND REFINISHING WOOD DOORS EXHIBITING DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP INCLUDING WARP AND DELAMINATION; WARRANTY PERIOD TWO YEARS. MANUFACTURERS: ALGOMA (1.800.678.8910), EGGERS (1.920.722.6444), OR MARSHFIELD (1.800.869.3667). FLUSH SOLID CORE DOORS: FIVE PLY NOT PRESS, 1-3/4" THICK SOLID WOOD FRAMED GLUED BLOCK CONSTRUCTION OR PARTICLEBOARD CORE. 1. CONFORM WITH WDMA TYPE II BOND, INTERIOR; BOND STILES AND RAILS TO CORE AND SAND PRIOR TO ASSEMBLY OF FACE VENEERS; EDGES TO MATCH FACE VENEER, MINIMUM 1-1/8" THICK. 2. FACE VENEERS: PREMIUM QUALITY WHITE BIRCH VENEERS. 3. EDGES: STILE EDGES TO MATCH FACE VENEER, MINIMUM 1-1/8" THICK AFTER TRIM. WOOD DOOR FRAMES: PREMIUM GRADE TO MATCH PROFILES INDICATED AND COMPATIBLE WITH WOOD DOORS; WHITE BIRCH OR POPLAR FOR OPAQUE PAINT FINISH. FABRICATION: FABRICATE DOORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFIED STANDARDS; PREFIT WOOD DOORS; SHOP PREPARE DOORS TO RECEIVE HARDWARE, REFER TO SECTION 087100 FOR HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS AND TEMPLATES; FACTORY MACHINE DOORS FOR MORTISE HARDWARE. BEVEL STRIKE EDGE OF SINGLE -ACTING DOORS, 1/8" IN 2". SHOP FINISH: PROVIDE SHOP FINISH ON WOOD DOORS AND FRAMES; PREMIUM GRADE SEMIGLOSS ACRYLIC FINISH; COLOR AS DIRECTED BY ARCHITECT. INSTALLATION: INSTALL WOOD DOORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, AND REFERENCE STANDARDS, PLUMB AND SQUARE, AND WITH MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTORTION OF 1/16". PROTECTION: PROTECT DOORS AS RECOMMENDED SY DOOR MANUFACTURER TO ENSURE DOORS ARE WITHOUT DAMAGE AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. 1. SHOP FINISHED DOORS: REFINISH OR REPLACE DOORS DAMAGED PRIOR TO SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS A. GENERAL: PROVIDE WOOD DOORS AND WOOD DOOR FRAMES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION; COORDINATE WITH HARDWARE IN SECTION 087100. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (WDMA): GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS. SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE AND SHOP FINISHED DOOR SAMPLES. PROJECT CONDITIONS: DD NOT DELIVER OR INSTALL DOORS UNTIL CONDITIONS FOR TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY NAVE BEEN STABILIZED IN ACCORDANCE WITH REFERENCED STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO PROJECT LOCATION. E. WARRANTY: PROVIDE FOR REPLACING, REHANGING AND REFINISHING WOOD DOORS EXHIBITING DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP INCLUDING WARP AND DELAMINATION; WARRANTY PERIOD ONE YEAR. F PRODUCTS: DOORS 1. GRADE: SELECT OR BETTER 2. FINISH: WHITE LATEX PRIMER (FIELD PAINTING BY G.C.). 3. WOOD SPECIES: EXTERIOR DOOR LEAVES TO SE 1 15/16" WHITE OAK/INTERIOR DOOR LEAVES TO BE 1 15/16" RED OAK. 4. RAISED PANELS FOR OPAQUE FINISH: PANEL INFILL TO BE 1/2" EXTERIOR MDF. G. GLASS FOR OPENINGS: CLEAR 1/4" TEMPERED. B. C. D. H. WOOD DOOR FRAMES: PREMIUM GRADE TO MATCH PROFILES INDICATED AND COMPATIBLE WITH WOOD DOORS; INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES TO BE RED OAK/EXTERIOR DOOR FRAMES TO BE WHITE FOR OPAQUE PAINT FINISH 1. FINISH: WHITE LATEX PRIMER (FIELD PAINTING BY G.C.). I. FABRICATION: FABRICATE DOORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFIED STANDARDS; PREFIT WOOD DOORS; SHOP PREPARE DOORS TO RECEIVE HARDWARE, REFER TO SECTION 087100 FOR HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS AND TEMPLATES; FACTORY MACHINE DOORS FOR MORTISE HARDWARE. J INSTALLATION: INSTALL WOOD DOORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS, PLUMB AND SQUARE, AND WITH MAXIMUM DIAGONAL DISTORTION OF 1/16". K. PROTECTION: PROTECT DOORS AS RECOMMENDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER TO ENSURE DOORS ARE WITHOUT DAMAGE AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. SECTION 083100 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. GENERAL: PROVIDE ACCESS DOORS AS REQUIRED FOR ACCESS TO VALVES AND CONTROLS LOCATED BEHIND FINISHED WALLS AND CEILINGS NOT OTHERWISE ACCESSIBLE, WITH ACCESSORIES FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 1. COORDINATE WITH VARIOUS TRADES FOR CONTROLS AND VALVES WHICH MAY BE CONCEALED. 5. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA FOR EACH TYPE OF ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL. C. MANUFACTURERS: KARP ASSOCIATES INC., MASPETI4, N.Y. (718-784-2105); INTEX FORMS INC., 8880 ELDER CREEK ROAD, SACRAMENTO, CA 95828 (916-388-9933) 1. SALES AREA (NON -RATED): INTEX FORMS "LIFT $ SHIFT" ACCESS PANEL W/ RADIUS DOOR CORNERS. SEE CEILING PLAN FOR SIZES AND LOCATIONS. 2. SALES AREA (RATED): KARP MODEL #KATR PRIME COATED STEEL WITH STAINLESS STEEL CAM LATCH ON RECESSED DOOR. SEE CEILING PLAN FOR SIZES AND LOCATIONS. 3. NON -SALES AREA (NON -RATED): KARP MODEL #DSC -214M. PRIME COATED STEEL WITH STUD LATCH. SEE CEILING PLAN FOR SIZES AND LOCATIONS. 4. NON -SALES AREA (RATED): KARP MODEL #KRP-150FR PRIME COATED STEEL WITH RING TURN LATCH. SEE CEILING PLAN FOR SIZES AND LOCATIONS. D. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE RATINGS. 1. SET FRAMES ACCURATELY IN POSITION AND SECURELY ATTACH TO SUPPORTS WITH FACE PANELS PLUMB OR LEVEL IN RELATION TO ADJACENT FINISH SURFACES. 2. ADJUST HARDWARE AND DOORS AFTER INSTALLATION FOR PROPER OPERATION. 3. REMOVE AND REPLACE DOORS OR FRAMES WHICH ARE WARPED, BOWED OR OTHERWISE DAMAGED. SECTION 083326 - OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. ALUMINUM OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: SEE SECTION 013000 1.03 SUMMARY A. ROLLING GRILLE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED SY LSD$C. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY GRILLE I5 TRUE, PLUMB, AND OPERATING PROPERLY, BEFORE INSTALLER LEAVES PREMISES. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. PROVIDED GRILLES MANUFACTURED BY METRO DOOR INC., 3500 SUNRISE HIGHWAY, BUILDING 100, SUITE 210, GREAT RIVER, NY 11739, 800-669-3667 2.02 MODELS AND MATERIALS A. MODELS: PROVIDED OVERHEAD COILING GRILLE MODELS AS FOLLOWS: 1. LEXAN GLAZED 5. MATERIALS: 1. ALUMINUM: BARS, RODS AND EXTRUSIONS TO BE 6063 ALLOY, T5 TEMPERED. 2. STEEL: BAR, PIPE AND PLATE(5) TO MEET MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. LOCKING: STANDARD LOCKING MECHANISM TO CONSIST OF TWO-POINT LOCK TO THROW AT BOTH JAMBS, WITH A KEYED CYLINDER ON THE OUTSIDE AND THUMB -TURN ON THE INSIDE. 2.04 FABRICATION 1. HORIZONTAL RODS T0. CONSIST OF EXTRUDED ALUMINUM, 7/8"X1/2" HORIZONTAL HINGE SYSTEM SPACED AT 40 ON CENTER. 2. WINDOWS TO CONSIST OF 3/32" CLEAR POLYCARBONATE PANELS EVERY 32" TO HORIZONTAL "I" FOR MAXIMUM STRENGTH. WINDOWS TO BE ENCLOSED IN HORIZONTAL ALUMINUM FRAME WITH PVC "H" FOR QUITE OPERATION. 3. CURTAIN SIZE: SEE DRAWINGS B. GUIDES: EXTRUDED ALUMINUM 1A1IT1-I MOHAIR STRIPS TO PREVENT METAL TO METAL CONTACT. C. STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS: 3X3 OR 4X4 STEEL SUPPORTS. D. BOTTOM BAR: 1-IEAVY DUTY EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WIT1-I THUMB -TURN INTERIOR AND KEYED CYLINDER EXTERIOR. E. COUNTERBALANCE: TEMPERED HELICAL TORSION HIGH CYCLE SPRING MOUNTED ON CAST ANCHORS AND CONTINUOUS SOLID TORSION RODS PERMANENTLY LUBRICATED AND ENCLOSED WITHIN A 8" STEEL PIPE SHAFT. F. BRACKET PLATES: STEEL PLATES 1/4" THICK BOLTED TO STRUCTURAL SUPPORT TUBES. G. OPERATION: MANUAL UP TO 120 SQUARE FEET. FOR ROLLING GRILLES 120 SQUARE FEET AND LARGER OR WIDER THAN 12', PROVIDE A MOTOR TO OPERATE. COORDINATE POWER REQUIREMENTS WITH MEP DRAWINGS. 2.05 FINISHES B. ALUMINUM BOTTOM BAR, GUIDES AND CURTAIN TO BE CLEAR BRONZE, BLACK ANODIZED OR WHITE POWDERCOAT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. PREPARE OPENINGS) TO RECEIVE GRILLE(5) AS REQUIRED BY MANUFACTURER. B. GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY GRILLE INSTALLERS WITH FINISH FLOOR ELEVATION FOR PROPER INSTALLATION OF GRILLE LOCK AS WELL AS PRECISE GRILLE LOCATION ON FLOOR LAYOUT. 3.02 INSTALLATION BVENDORINSTALLERS) T (YINS TLLER) A. INSTALL AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WIT1-I MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS ADJUST FOR SMOOTH AND EASY OPERATION. 5. CAREFULLY COORDINATE INSTALLATION AND NOOK -UP OF ROLLING GRILLE WITH ALL AFFECTED TRADES. REFER TO DOOR SCHEDULE. SECTION 083516 - FOLDING GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. MANUALLY- OPERATED FOLDING SECURITY GRILLES. 5. RELATED SECTIONS 1. SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS - FOR MISCELLANEOUS STEEL SUPPORT BRACKETS AND GUIDES. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION. (AAMA): 1. AAMA 611, VOLUNTARY SPECIFICATION FOR ANODIZED ARCHITECTURAL ALUMINUM. 5. ASTM INTERNATIONAL: 1. ASTM B 221, STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR ALUMINUM AND ALUMINUM ALLOY EXTRUDED BARS, RODS, WIRE, PROFILES, AND TUBES. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA: MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED PRODUCT INFORMATION IDENTIFYING ALL COMPONENTS, FINISHES, AND OPTIONS. 5. SHOP DRAWINGS: SH01AI EACH INSTALLATION INCLUDING COMPONENTS NOT DIMENSIONED OR DETAILED IN PRODUCT DATA. INCLUDE ELEVATIONS, PLANS, SECTIONS, DETAILS, AND ATTACHMENT TO OTHER WORK. C. SAMPLES: FOR EACH TYPE OF EXPOSED FINISH REQUIRED. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SOURCE LIMITATIONS: OBTAIN FOLDING METAL GRILLES SPECIFIED IN THIS SECTION THROUGH ONE SOURCE FROM A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. A. DELIVER FOLDING METAL GRILLES IN MANUFACTURER'S ORIGINAL, UNDAMAGED, AND UNOPENED CONTAINERS. PROVIDE IDENTIFICATION LABELS ON EACH CONTAINER. B. STORE FOLDING GRILLES IN LOCATIONS PROTECTED FROM WEATHER AND DAMAGE FROM CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: VERIFY DIMENSIONS OF OPENINGS WHERE FOLDING GRILLES ARE INDICATED TO BE INSTALLED. INDICATE MEASUREMENTS ON SHOP DRAWINGS. 1.07 WARRANTY A. WARRANTY: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD WARRANTY IN WHICH MANUFACTURER AGREES TO REPLACE HINGED PANEL SECTIONS THAT FAIL IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP WITHIN SPECIFIED WARRANTY PERIOD. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. METRO DOOR, INC., 3500 SUNRISE HIGHWAY, BUILDING 100 SUITE 210, GREAT RIVER, NY 11739 (800) 669-3667. WWW.METRODOOR.COM SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS A. 5. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. M. GENERAL: EXTRUDED ALUMINUM ENTRANCE SYSTEMS WITH DOORS, FRAMES, HARDWARE, AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH ARCHITECTURAL ALUMINUM MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA) "ALUMINUM STORE FRONT AND ENTRANCE MANUAL". CODES AND REGULATIONS: COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES, AS INDICATED IN DRAWINGS. STRUCTURAL CERTIFICATES: PROVIDE CERTIFICATION BY STATE REGISTERED ENGINEER INDICATING SYSTEM COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND APPLICABLE CODES. SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY: PROVIDE FOR CORRECTING FAILURES INCLUDING WIND DAMAGE AND WATER PENETRATION TO INTERIOR SURFACES, EXCESSIVE DEFLECTIONS, AND DETERIORATION OF FINISHES, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND ACCESSORIES. SPECIAL WARRANTY PERIOD TWO YEARS. MANUFACTURERS: AS INDICATED IN DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULES. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE IN DRAWINGS TO DETERMINE WHETHER STOREFRONT SYSTEM IS PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY LSD$C VENDOR OR PROVIDED BY LSD$C VENDOR AND INSTALLED BY GC. GLAZING: SEE SECTION 088100. GLAZING ACCESSORIES: SEE SECTION 088100. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. STEELREINFORCEMENT ANDBRACKETS: R F R E E T BRA KET STANDARD WITH MINIMUM 2 OZ. HOT -DIP ZINC COATING, ASTM A123, APPLIED AFTER FABRICATION. 2. BITUMINOUS PAINT: COLD -APPLIED MASTIC, SSPC PAINT 12, COMPOUNDED FOR 30 MIL THICKNESS PER COAT. 3. FLASHING: SEE SECTION 076000. 4. ANCHORING DEVICES: CORROSION RESISTANT TYPE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING ENTRANCE SYSTEM AND SUPERIMPOSED DESIGN LOADS; DESIGN TO ALLOW ADJUSTMENTS OF SYSTEM PRIOR TO BEING PERMANENTLY FASTENED IN PLACE. 5. JOINT SEALANTS: SEE SECTION 079200. FABRICATION: FABRICATE ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM TO ALLOW FOR CLEARANCES AND SHIM SPACING AROUND PERIMETER OF ASSEMBLIES TO ENABLE INSTALLATION; PROVIDE FOR THERMAL MOVEMENT. 1. ACCURATELY FIT TOGETHER JOINTS AND CORNERS; MATCH COMPONENTS ENSURING CONTINUITY OF LINE AND DESIGN; ENSURE JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS ARE FLUSH, HAIRLINE AND WEATHERPROOF. 2. SEPARATE DISSIMILAR MATERIALS WITH BITUMINOUS PAINT OR PREFORMED SEPARATORS WHICH WILL PREVENT CORROSION. INSTALLATION: INSTALL ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT ASSEMBLIES, INCLUDING ENTRANCES, IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND TO MEET DESIGN REQUIREMENTS INDICATED. 1. ENSURE ASSEMBLIES ARE PLUMB, LEVEL AND FREE OF WARP OR TWIST; MAINTAIN DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES AND ALIGNMENT WITH ADJACENT WORK. 2. USE SUFFICIENT ANCHORAGE DEVICES TO SECURELY AND RIGIDLY FASTEN ASSEMBLIES TO BUILDING. 3. INSTALL HARDWARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, USING PROPER TEMPLATES. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF CYLINDERS WITH SECTION 087100. 4. INSTALL SILL MEMBERS AND THRESHOLDS IN BED OF COMPOUND, JOINT FILLERS OR GASKETS TO PROVIDE WEATHERTIGHT CONSTRUCTION. 5. GLASS INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH GANA GLAZING MANUAL AND GLAZING MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. DO NOT ALLOW GLASS TO TOUCH METAL SURFACES. SECTION 084114 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS- HURRICANE RESISTANT A. GENERAL: PROVIDE EXTRUDED ALUMINUM ENTRANCE SYSTEM WITH DOORS, FRAMES, HARDWARE, AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE WEATHERTIGHT INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR LOCATIONS ONLY. ARCH ALUMINUM $ GLASS CO., INC. HURRICANE -RESISTANT ALUMINUM ENTRANCE DOOR, GLASS $ GLAZING, DOOR HARDWARE, AND COMPONENTS 1. MODEL TYPES OF ARCH ALUMINUM ENTRANCES INCLUDE: a. MEDIUM STILE SWING DOOR AND DOORFRAME: 3 1/2" STILE WIDTH X 1 3/4" DEPTH b. 7/16" LAMINATED DOOR GLASS c. MIAMI-DADE COUNTY PRODUCT APPROVAL I5: NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE: 12-0117.05 d. FLORIDA STATE PRODUCT APPROVAL # 16211.1 2. TYPE OF ARCH ALUMINUM -FRAMED STOREFRONTS INCLUDES: a. RESISTOR IMPACT SERIES IMPACT WALL 3100/L3100 - LARGE AND SMALL MISSILE: 1 1/4"X 4 1/2" OFFSET TO FRONT, INTERIOR GLAZED SHEAR BLOCK SYSTEM FOR 1-5/16" (NOM.) AND/OR 9/16" (NOM.) GLAZING b. 1-5/16" LAMINATED INSULATING IMPACT WALL GLASS c. MIAMI-DADE COUNTY, PRODUCT APPROVAL NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE IS: 05-0906.04 11-1117.02 d. FLORIDA STATE PRODUCT APPROVAL IS # 16181.2 3. THIS 'SYSTEM' IS DESIGNED TO COMPLY WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE 1-IIG14-VELOCITY HURRICANE ZONE OF THE FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (FBC). FOR LOCATIONS WHERE THE PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS DO NOT EXCEED THE DESIGN PRESSURE RATING VALUES INDICATED IN THE APPROVED DRAWINGS, REFER TO THE ABOVE REFERENCED NOA DRAWINGS AND CHARTS FOR ACCEPTED CONFIGURATIONS, LIMITS, ANCHOR REQUIREMENTS, AND ALLOWABLE DOOR HARDWARE." B. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH ARCHITECTURAL ALUMINUM MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (HAMA) "ALUMINUM STORE FRONT AND ENTRANCE MANUAL." CODES AND REGULATIONS: COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLES. STRUCTURAL CERTIFICATES: PROVIDE CERTIFICATION BY STATE REGISTERED ENGINEER INDICATING SYSTEM COMPLIES WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND APPLICABLE CODES. SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY: PROJECT WARRANTY: REFER TO DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, WORK COVERED SY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS" FOR PROJECT WARRANTY CONDITIONS. MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT WARRANTY: SUBMIT, FOR OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE, MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT WARRANTY FOR ENTRANCE $ STOREFRONT SYSTEMS AS FOLLOWS: 1. RESISTOR IMPACT DOOR 3000 MEDIUM STILE LARGE MISSILE, HURRICANE -RESISTANT ENTRANCE DOOR AND GLASS SYSTEMS SHALL BE GUARANTEED AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND/OR WORKMANSHIP FOR A PERIOD OF TWO (2) YEARS FROM DATE OF SHIPMENT. 2. THE RESISTOR IMPACT SERIES, IMPACT WALL 3100/L3100 - LARGE AND SMALL MISSILE ALUMINUM STOREFRONT FRAMING AND GLASS SYSTEM SHALL BE GUARANTEED BY LIMITED WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND/OR WORKMANSHIP AS DEFINED BY MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED LIMITED WARRANTY FOR A PERIOD OF TWO (2) YEARS FROM DATE OF SHIPMENT. 3. THE 1-5/16" LAMINATED INSULATING IMPACT WALL GLASS SHALL BE GUARANTEED BY LIMITED WARRANTY AGAINST DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND/OR WORKMANSHIP AS DEFINED BY MANUFACTURER'S PUBLISHED LIMITED WARRANTY FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5) YEARS. MANUFACTURER: TRULITE GLASS $ ALUMINUM SOLUTIONS 8130 NW 7411-1 AVENUE, MEDLEY, FL 33166 CONTACT: JOHN SAUD 888-574-0367 EXT. 159 ALUMINUM - FRAMED ENTRANCES $ STOREFRONTS 1. DOOR AND FRAME SECTIONS SHALL CONFORM TO THE MATERIAL STANDARDS OF ASTM B 221; 6063 - T5 ALLOY 4 TEMPER 2. THE DOOR STILE AND RAIL PROFILE DIMENSIONS FOR THE RESISTOR IMPACT SERIES, IMPACT DOOR 3000 MEDIUM STILE LARGE MISSILE SHALL BE: a. VERTICAL STILES: 3 1/2" b. TOP RAIL: 3 1/2" c. BOTTOM RAIL: 10" 3. MAJOR PORTIONS OF THE DOOR STILES AND RAILS ARE TO BE .125" IN NOMINAL THICKNESS. GLAZING MOLDINGS ARE TO BE 0.05" THICK. 4. THE FRAME PROFILE DIMENSIONS WILL BE: VERTICAL $ HORIZONTAL MULLIONS: 1 1/4" X 4 1/2" HORIZONTAL MULLION FOR CONCEALED OVERHEAD CLOSER: 1 3/4" X 4 1/2". 5. JOINT SEALANT: SEE SECTION 079200 GLAZING: SEE SECTION 088100 GLAZING ACCESSORIES: SEE SECTION 088100 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND BRACKETS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD WITH MINIMUM 2 OZ. HOT -DIP ZINC COATING, ASTM A123, APPLIED AFTER FABRICATION. 2. TBHITUMINICKNEOUS PAINTPER: COLD -APPLIED MASTIC, SSPC PAINT 12, COMPOUNDED FOR 30 MIL SS COAT 3. FLASHING: SEE SECTION 076000 4. ANCHORING DEVICES: CORROSION RESISTANT TYPE CAPABLE OF SUPPORTING ENTRANCE SYSTEM AND SUPERIMPOSED DESIGN LOADS; DESIGN TO ALLOW ADJUSTMENTS OF SYSTEM PRIOR TO BEING PERMANENTLY FASTENED IN PLACE. FABRICATION: FABRICATE ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT SYSTEM TO ALLOW FOR CLEARANCES AND SHIM SPACING AROUND PERIMETER OF ASSEMBLIES TO ENABLE INSTALLATION; PROVIDE FOR THERMAL MOVEMENT. 1. ACCURATELY FIT TOGETHER JOINTS AND CORNERS; MATCH COMPONENTS ENSURING CONTINUITY OF LINE AND DESIGN; ENSURE JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS ARE FLUSH, HAIRLINE AND WEATHERPROOF. 2. SEPARATE DISSIMILAR MATERIALS WITH BITUMINOUS PAINT OR PREFORMED SEPARATORS WHICH WILL PREVENT CORROSION. M. INSTALLATION: INSTALL ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONT ASSEMBLIES, INCLUDING ENTRANCES, IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND TO MEET DESIGN REQUIREMENTS INDICATED. 1. ENSURE ASSEMBLIES ARE PLUMB, LEVEL AND FREE OF WARP OR TWIST; MAINTAIN DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES AND ALIGNMENT WITH ADJACENT WORK. 2. USE SUFFICIENT ANCHORAGE DEVICES TO SECURELY AND RIGIDLY FASTEN ASSEMBLIES TO BUILDING. 3. INSTALL HARDWARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, USING PROPER TEMPLATES. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF CYLINDERS WITH SECTION 087100. 4. INSTALL SILL MEMBERS AND THRESHOLDS IN BED OF COMPOUND, JOINT FILLERS OR GASKETS TO PROVIDE WEATHERTIGHT CONSTRUCTION. 5. GLASS INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH GANA GLAZING MANUAL AND GLAZING MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. DO NOT ALLOW GLASS TO TOUCH METAL SURFACES. C. D. E. F. G. H. J. K. L. SECTION 085200 - WOOD WINDOWS A. SUMMARY: PRIMED WOOD FRAMING WINDOW COMPONENTS AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. GLAZING TO BE INSTALLED AT SITE. B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. ENGINEERING DESIGN OF WOOD WINDOWS BY LSD$C VENDOR. 2. WIND SPEED LOADS: PER STORE LOCATION AND LOCAL CODES. C. QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. QUALITY STANDARD: EAAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS] D. WARRANTY 1. WINDOWS: ONE YEAR 2. GLAZING: SEE SECTION 088100 E. WINDOWS 1. TYPE: WOOD FIXED a. PERFORMANCE GRADE: PREMIUM 2. GLAZING: SITE GLAZED: SEE SECTION 088100 3. WOOD FINISHES: FINISH TO BE WHITE LATEX PRIMER (FIELD PAINTING 8Y G.G.) SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE J. GENERAL: DOOR HARDWARE FOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FOR WOOD DOORS, AND CYLINDERS FOR DOORS PROVIDED WITH HARDWARE, WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE OPERATIONAL DOOR INSTALLATIONS. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE FOR DIRECTION TO PROVIDE AND INSTALL OR JUST INSTALL VENDOR SUPPLIED HARDWARE AND/OR ACCESSORIES. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (131 -IMA) ANSI/BHMA 156 SERIES STANDARDS. CODES AND REGULATIONS: 1. COMPLY WITH STATE AND FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ENSURING ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES. 2. FIRE RATED DOORS: COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF NFPA 80 AND APPLICABLE CODES FOR FIRE RATED DOOR HARDWARE; PROVIDE HARDWARE BEARING UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL) LABELS. SUBMITTALS: 1. FURNISH SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA INCLUDING KEYING SCHEDULE, AND SAMPLES OF EACH REQUIRED STYLE AND FINISH. 2. SUPPLY TEMPLATES TO DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS FOR PROPER AND ACCURATE SIZING AND LOCATIONS OF CUT-OUTS FOR HARDWARE. GENERAL MATERIALS: COMPLETE HARDWARE WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR DOORS AND APPLICATIONS INDICATED AND NOT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS. HINGES: AS INDICATED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE OR IF NOT SPECIFIED: HAGER (1.800.392.5209), LAWRENCE (1.800.435.9568), MCKINNEY (1.800.346.7707), STANLEY (1.800.337.4393) OR BALDWIN (1.800.566.1986); FULL MORTISED BUTT HINGES; SIZE AND NUMBER AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER; NON -REMOVABLE PINS AT EXTERIOR OUT SWINGING DOORS, BALL-BEARING HINGES AT FIRE RATED DOORS AND DOORS WITH CLOSERS. LOCKSETS/LATCHSETS: AS SPECIFIED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE (SHEET A00.02), AND AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. KEYING AS DIRECTED BY LSD$C. PROVIDE U -CHANGE CYLINDERS FOR DOORS FURNISHED WITH LOCKS. U -CHANGE CUSTOMER SERVICE: SECURITY SOLUTIONS 1-800-253-5625. ACCESSORIES: PROVIDE DOOR STOPS, THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING, TRIM, COORDINATORS, AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE OPERATIONAL DOOR INSTALLATION. 1. THRESHOLDS, STOPS, TRIM, AND MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE: PROVIDE AS INDICATED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE, AND AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 2. WEATHERSTRIPPING: PROVIDE CONTINUOUS WEATHERSTRIPPING AT TOP AND SIDES OF EXTERIOR DOORS. 3. FIRE RATED GASKETS: PROVIDE CONTINUOUS FIRE RATED GASKETS AT TOP AND SIDES OF FIRE RATED DOORS 4. THROUGH BOLTS: THROUGH BOLTS AND GROMMET NUTS SHALL BE AVOIDED ON DOOR FACES IN HIGHLY VISIBLE AREAS, UNLESS NO ALTERNATIVE 15 POSSIBLE, AS DIRECTED AND APPROVED, AND SHALL NOT BE USED FOR SOLID WOOD CORE DOORS. 5. KICK PLATES: MINIMUM 0.050", MAXIMUM 0.0625" THICK, 10" TALL, WIDTH TO BE DETERMINED BY SUBTRACTING 1" FROM DOOR LEAF WIDTH. FINISH: 81-4MA 626 (US26D), SATIN FINISHED CHROMIUM PLATED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS, BHMA, AND APPLICABLE FOR ACCESS AND FOR FIRE RATINGS. 1. FIT HARDWARE PRIOR TO PAINTING, THEN REMOVE FOR PAINTING OF DOORS AND FRAMES BEFORE FINAL INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE. 2. HEIGHTS TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND 81 -IMA RECOMMENDATIONS. 3. HARDWARE GROUPS: REFER TO DRAWINGS A00.02. SECTION 088100 - GLASS GLAZING A. GENERAL: INSTALL GLASS AND FILM ON GLASS; PROVIDE GLAZING ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION, UNLESS NOTED BY OTHERS IN DRAWINGS. 5. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA) "GLAZING MANUAL". C. SAFETY GLAZING SHALL COMPLY WITH CONSUMER PRODUCT STANDARD 16 CFR 1201, AND SHALL HAVE PASSED ANSI Z97.1. D. SUBMITTALS: FURNISH PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES OF EXPOSED GLAZING MATERIALS. E. MANUFACTURERS: PILKINGTON (1.419.247.4506), GUARDIAN (1.248.340.1800), OR PPG (1.888.774.4332) OR APPROVED EQUAL. F. GLAZING: ASTM C1048, FULLY TEMPERED, SELECT GLAZING QUALITY, CLEAR FLOAT GLASS, SAFETY GLASS, UNLESS OTI-IERWISE INDICATED. 1. INTERIOR: 1/2" OR 5/8" OR 3/4" THICK TEMPERED GLAZING, AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2. EXTERIOR: 1" TEMPERED INSULATED WITH DUAL SEAL (MAKEUP: 1/4" CLEAR TEMPERED, 1/2" SPACER, 1/4" CLEAR TEMPERED) 3. EXPOSED AND BUTT EDGES: EASED POLISHED EDGE 4. CORNER EDGES: LAP -JOINT CORNERS WITH EXPOSED EDGES POLISHED G. GLAZING ACCESSORIES: OF TYPE RECOMMENDED SY MANUFACTURER TO SUIT SECURITY LOCATIONS AND APPLICATIONS FOR DRY GLAZING INSTALLATION. 1. MINI MALL CLAMP: 1-1/2" WIDE ALUMINUM CLAMP INSTALLED IN 1/4" GLAZING JOINTS WITH EXTENDED THREADED STUD FOR A 1" THICK GLAZING APPLICATION. H. GLAZING FILM: PROVIDE TRANSLUCENT AND/OR OPAQUE GLAZING FILMS BY 3M IF INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 1. 3M ULTRA PRESTIGE 570 (SOLAR * SECURITY) AT GLASS STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS, SIDELIGHTS, AND AT DISPLAY WINDOWS WITHOUT DIRECT ACCESS TO STORE. (i.e. FRONT ACCESS WINDOWS). I. GLAZING SEALANT: ONE COMPONENT SILICONE GLAZING SEALANT 5Y DOW, GE, OR TREMCO. J. SETTING BLOCKS AND SPACERS: NEOPRENE OR EPDM, SILICONE COMPATIBLE WHERE IN CONTACT WITH SILICONE SEALANT. K. PREPARATION: CLEAN GLAZING CHANNELS AND FRAMING MEMBERS TO RECEIVE GLASS IMMEDIATELY BEFORE GLAZING; REMOVE COATINGS NOT FIRMLY BONDED TO SUBSTRATE. L. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH GANA GLAZING MANUAL AND SEALANT MANUAL AND GLAZING MANUFACTURER INSTRUCTIONS. 1. DO NOT ALLOW GLASS TO TOUCH METAL SURFACES. 2. COMPLY WITH NFPA 80 FOR GLASS IN FIRE RATED OPENINGS. 3. PLACE SETTING BLOCKS AT QUARTER POINTS IN THIN COURSE OF SEALANT. 4. INSTALL REMOVABLE STOPS WITH GLASS CENTERED IN SPACE WITH SPACER SHIMS AT 2'-0" INTERVALS ON BOTH SIDES OF GLASS, 1/4" BELOW SIGHTLINE. 5. SEALANT GLAZING: FILL GAP BETWEEN GLASS AND STOPS WITH SEALANT TO DEPTH EQUAL TO BITE OF FRAME ON GLASS BUT NOT MORE THAN . 3/8" BELOW SIGHTLINE. SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY G. THIS SECTION INCLUDES NEW WALL MOUNTED GLASS MIRRORS. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: AN EXPERIENCED INSTALLER WHO HAS COMPLETED MIRROR GLAZING SIMILAR IN MATERIAL DESIGN AND EXTENT TO THAT INDICATED; WHOSE WORK 1 -IAS RESULTED IN MIRROR INSTALLATIONS WITH A RECORD OF NOT LESS THAN 5 YEARS OF SUCCESSFUL IN-SERVICE PERFORMANCE. SOURCE LIMITATIONS FOR MIRRORS: OBTAIN MIRRORS FROM ONE SUPPLIER/MANUFACTURER FOR EACH TYPE OF MIRROR INDICATED. 5. SOURCE LIMITATIONS FOR GLAZING ACCESSORIES: OBTAIN GLAZING ACCESSORIES FROM ONE SOURCE FOR EACH TYPE OF ACCESSORY INDICATED. C. GLAZING PUBLICATIONS: COMPLY WITH THE APPLICABLE RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE FOLLOWING. WHERE RECOMMENDATIONS CONFLICT THE MORE STRINGENT SHALL APPLY: 1. GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA): "GLAZING MANUAL" AND THE MIRROR DIVISION'S "MIRRORS, HANDLE WITH EXTREME CARE: TIPS FOR THE PROFESSIONAL ON THE CARE AND HANDLING OF MIRRORS." 2. NATIONAL GLASS ASSOCIATION (NGA): "CUSTOM MIRRORS, FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION." 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. PROTECT MIRRORS ACCORDING TO MIRROR MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND AS NEEDED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO MIRRORS FROM CONDENSATION, TEMPERATURE CHANGES, DIRECT EXPOSURE TO SUN, OR OTHER CAUSES. 5. COMPLY WITH MIRROR MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR SHIPPING, STORING, AND HANDLING MIRRORS AS NEEDED TO PREVENT DETERIORATION OF SILVERING, DAMAGE TO EDGES, AND ABRASION OF GLASS SURFACES AND APPLIED COATINGS. STORE INDOORS, PROTECTED FROM MOISTURE INCLUDING CONDENSATION. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS: DO NOT INSTALL MIRRORED GLASS UNTIL AMBIENT TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY CONDITIONS ARE MAINTAINED AT LEVELS INDICATED POR FINAL OCCUPANCY. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS A. CLEAR GLASS MIRRORS: 6.0 MM THICK AND COMPLYING WITH ASTM C 1503, MIRROR SELECT QUALITY FOR USE IN VISUALLY DEMANDING APPLICATIONS REQUIRING MINIMAL DISTORTIONS AND BLEMISHES. REFLECTIVITY IS SIMILAR IN APPEARANCE TO THE MAJOR SURFACE OF THE GLASS. 2.02 FABRICATION A. CUTOUTS: FABRICATE CUTOUTS FOR NOTCHES AND HOLES IN MIRRORS WITHOUT MARRING VISIBLE SURFACES. LOCATE AND SIZE CUTOUTS SO THEY FIT CLOSELY AROUND PENETRATIONS IN MIRRORS. 8. MIRROR EDGE TREATMENT: 1. CUTTING AND POLISHING: a. TYPICAL MIRRORS: FLAT EDGES WHERE THE CLEAN CUT "SQUARE" EDGE OF THE GLASS 15 FLAT AND SURFACE EDGES ARE SLIGHTLY ARRISSED. AFTER GRINDING THE ARRISSES, EDGES SHALL BE POLISHED TO A HIGH GLOSS SURFACE WHERE THE SURFACE REFLECTIVITY IS SIMILAR IN APPEARANCE TO THE MAJOR SURFACE OF THE GLASS. b. BEVELED EDGED MIRRORS: PROVIDE BEVELED EDGED MIRRORS WHERE THE SURFACE EDGE OF THE GLASS IS BEVELED TO WIDTH INDICATED ON THE OWNER FURNISHED DRAWINGS. THE ANGLE FORMED BY THE INTERSECTION OF THE PLANE OF THE BEVEL WITH THE MAJOR SURFACE FACE OF THE GLASS SHALL BE BETWEEN 3 TO 10 DEGREES THE BEVELED SURFACE AND THE NOSE OF THE BEVEL SHALL BE POLISHED TO A NIGH GLOSS SURFACE WHERE THE SURFACE REFLECTIVITY IS SIMILAR IN APPEARANCE TO THE MAJOR SURFACE OF THE GLASS. 2. EDGE SEALING: IMMEDIATELY AFTER CUTTING TO FINAL SIZES, AND APPLYING EDGE TREATMENT, FACTORY SEAL EDGES OF MIRRORS WITH EDGE SEALER TO PREVENT CHEMICAL OR ATMOSPHERIC PENETRATION OF GLASS COATING. • 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. MIRROR SAFETY BACKING: CRL 24" CATEGORY II SHATTERPROOF SAFETY TAPE #2MT24. C.R. LAURENCE CO., INC., 2503 E. VERNON AVE., LOS ANGELES, CA 90058, (800-421-6144). SAFETY SACKING IS REQUIRED FOR ALL MIRROR TYPES IN THIS SPECIFICATION. B. SETTING BLOCKS: NON -RUBBER OR NON -NEOPRENE BASED ELASTOMER IC MATERIAL MANUFACTURED FOR SETTING SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS, COMPATIBLE WITH ADHESIVE USED FOR PLACEMENT, WITH A TYPE A SHORE DUROMETER HARDNESS OF 85, PLUS OR MINUS 5. 1/8" WIDE X 1/4" HIGH X 4" LONG. C. EDGE SEALER: COATING COMPATIBLE WITH GLASS COATING AND APPROVED BY MIRROR MANUFACTURER FOR USE IN PROTECTING AGAINST SILVER DETERIORATION AT MIRROR EDGES. D. MIRROR MASTIC: PALMER "MI RRO- MAST IC'; PALMER PRODUCTS CORP. (502) 893-3668, (800)431-6151 / FAX (502) 895-9253. E. DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD PRIMER: KI LZ ORIGINAL (OIL BASED PRIMER); MASTERCHEM INDUSTRIES, INC. (866)977.3711 OR APPROVED EQUAL. F. TOP AND BOTTOM ALUMINUM J CHANNELS: ALUMINUM EXTRUSIONS WITH A RETURN DEEP ENOUGH TO PRODUCE A GLAZING CHANNEL TO ACCOMMODATE 6 MM THICK MIRRORS AND HEAVY BODIED MIRROR MASTIC SPECIFIED AND IN LENGTHS REQUIRED TO COVER BOTTOM AND TOP EDGES OF EACH MIRROR IN A SINGLE PIECE. THE ENDS OF THE BACK LIPS OF ALL CHANNELS SHALL BE FACTORY SNIPPED AND FILED SO THAT THEY WILL NOT BE SEEN AFTER INSTALLATION. 1. BOTTOM TRIM: J -CHANNELS FORMED WITH FRONT LEG AND BACK LEG NOT LESS THAN 3/8" AND 7/8" IN HEIGHT, RESPECTIVELY. CRL POLISHED FINISH 1/4" STANDARD "J" CHANNEL (PART NUMBER D636P); C. R. LAURENCE CO., INC. (800) 421-6144/ FAX (800) 262-3299. 2. TOP TRIM: J -CHANNELS FORMED WITH FRONT LEG AND BACK LEG NOT LESS THAN 5/8"AND 1-3/16" IN HEIGHT, RESPECTIVELY. CRL POLISHED FINISH 1/4" DEEP NOSE "J" CHANNEL (PART NUMBER D645P); C. R. LAURENCE CO., INC. (800) 421-6144/ FAX (800) 262-3299. G. STUD FASTENERS: PROVIDE #6 GAGE DIAMETER, 1-5/8" LONG, PHILLIPS BUGLE HEAD, SELF -DRILLING TYPE, FINE THREADED STEEL SCREW FASTENERS IN QUANTITY AS REQUIRED FOR SUPPORT AND FASTENING OF WOOD TRIMS AND MIRROR CHANNELS TO DRYWALL STUD FRAMING AND SHEET METAL BACKER PLATES. HILTI 1041K- PRO SELF -DRILL DRYWALL SCREWS, MODEL NUMBER 6X 1-5/8 PBH SD; HILTI, CORPORATION (800) 879-8000 VOICE. H. PLASTIC WOOD FILLER: COMMERCIAL QUALITY WOOD FILLER SPECIFICALLY MANUFACTURED TO ADVANCE THE FINAL BUILD AND SMOOTHNESS OF THE INSTALLED WOOD TRIM SURFACE BY FILLING DENTS, SCRATCHES, MITER JOINTS, AND VOIDS ABOVE COUNTERSUNK FASTENER THE SELECTED FILLER SHALL BE EITHER NEUTRAL OR TINTED TO MATCH THE COLOR OF THE WOOD TRIM. I. PLYWOOD FASTENERS: PROVIDE MINIMUM #6 GAGE DIAMETER, PHILLIPS FLAT HEAD, SHARP POINTED, COARSE THREADED, STEEL WOOD SCREW FASTENERS IN QUANTITY AS REQUIRED. FURNISH PLYWOOD FASTENERS IN LENGTH AS REQUIRED TO SPAN THRO AND MIRROR CHANNELS, PLUS 3/4". J. WOOD MIRROR TRIM (AS DETAILED) • •. r - REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 02 2017 City of Tukwila LDING DIVISION SHREMSHOCK Shremshock Architects, Inc. 7400 W. Campus Rd. Suite 150 New Albany, OH 43054 t: 614 545 4550 1 f: 614 5 4555 1 shremshock.com Gerald S. S emshock, Architect mothy J.:hremshock, Architect U 0 0 Z co z cc • coaecr co 00 Lu 0 N CL z 0 U z 0 U oS z ,9 ( ) w 0 w 0 ■ 0 0 F- C.) W 0 CC CL N N Z (-1-,41'm m n - y O 2,11,:q 3 ~ 3 c s�= J F p < ZW = W Z N W 3 C a.FI-.O1. U = Z 4 W E: < O J m 0 O 3 a (40 o ,=...,.. W V O = N ' W < 0 a - G =N(3 < a = ONy�j< :g.. HOi=in Wc»Z`3U'60, Q :06 O m m (00 � - CD = F O < � WO Z O V- W O O cc m C NW r a t w � < z < N O TION, BUILDING SEIZI cn co 1=12 co � � 00 W '- Z� W v < 0OH3 1 Wyg al CDv>'coi- 0 H N w H O w W CL. 0 V cn z W W 0 O) O co O ifft c.) W 0 CZ CL J REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 2 2017 PERMIT CENTER DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 AM HMG SKM ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. EXAMINE SUBSTRATES, OVER WHICH MIRRORS ARE TO BE MOUNTED, WITH INSTALLER PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH INSTALLATION TOLERANCES, SUBSTRATE PREPARATION, AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE. 1. VERIFY COMPATIBILITY WITH AND SUITABILITY OF SUBSTRATES, INCLUDING COMPATIBILITY OF MIRROR MASTIC WITH EXISTING FINISHES OR PRIMERS. PROCEED WITH MIRRORED GLASS INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED AND SURFACES ARE DRY. 3.02 PREPARATION A. COMPLY WITH MASTIC MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES. 1. MIRROR, DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD SUBSTRATES SHALL BE FREE OF DUST, BE CLEAN, AND DRY PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF MIRROR MASTIC AND DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD PAINT. 2. IF PLYWOOD OR DRYWALL SURFACES HAVE BEEN PAINTED PRIOR TO APPLICATION OF THE SPECIFIED DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD PAINT THE EXISTING PAINT SHALL BE SANDED THROUGH TO THE ORIGINAL SURFACE AND THE SUBSTRATE CLEANED PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD PAINT. 3.03 GLAZING A. GENERAL: INSTALL MIRRORS WITH MIRROR GLAZING CHANNELS TO COMPLY WITH WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS OF MIRROR AND MIRROR GLAZING CHANNEL MANUFACTURERS, WITH REFERENCED GANA AND NGA PUBLICATIONS, OWNER FURNISHED DRAWINGS, AND AS SPECIFIED. MOUNT MIRRORS PLUMB, IN LINE AND IN A MANNER THAT AVOIDS DISTORTING REFLECTED IMAGES. B. COMPLY WITH MASTIC MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED DIRECTIONS FOR PREPARATION AND SEALING OF MOUNTING SURFACES BY SEALING DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD, SUBSTRATES WITH DRYWALL AND PLYWOOD PAINT. ALLOW PAINT TO DRY BEFORE APPLYING MIRROR MASTIC. C. MIRROR SAFETY BACKING INSTALLATION: 1. SAFETY TAPE APPLICATION: TAPE SHOULD BE APPLIED WITH A PRESSURE ROLLER. SURFACE SHOULD BE CLEAN AND FREE OF OIL AND MOISTURE. APPLY AT TEMPERATURES BETWEEN 60°F AND 100'F (WC AND 38°C). 2. MASTIC APPLICATION: PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, USE ONLY REGULAR PALMER MIRRO-MASTIC. (PALMER "QWIKSET MIRRO-MASTIC" NOT TO BE USED WITH PLASTIC SAFETY FILM.) SAFETY TAPE MUST BE WASHED (TWO -CLOTH METHOD) WITH A 70% ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL (IPA) SOLUTION PRIOR TO MASTIC APPLICATION. D. MIRROR CHANNEL INSTALLATION: 1. TO PLYWOOD: DRILL, DO NOT DIMPLE, BACK LIP OF CHANNEL TO RECEIVE FASTENERS WITH HOLES PROPERLY SIZED AND SPACED TO RECEIVE FASTENERS. ATTACH MIRROR CHANNELS BY SCREW ATTACHING MIRROR CHANNEL THROUGH THE BACK LIP OF THE CHANNEL TO PLYWOOD SUBSTRATE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FASTENER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. INSTALL THE WEB OF THE TOP CHANNEL 1/4" HIGHER THAN THE HEIGHT OF THE MIRROR TO ALLOW THE RAISING OF THE MIRROR INTO THE TOP CHANNEL AND ITS SUBSEQUENT LOWERING ONTO THE BOTTOM CHANNEL. AFTER INSTALLING FASTENERS PLACE MASKING TAPE OVER THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE BACK LIP OF THE CHANNEL COMPLETELY COVERING THE FASTENER HEADS TO PROTECT THE MIRROR FROM BEING CHIPPED IN SETTING. ADHERE SETTING BLOCKS AT QUARTER POINTS FOR BOTTOM MIRROR CHANNELS USING ONLY 2 SETTING BLOCKS PER MIRROR PANEL. 2. TO DRYWALL: MARK THE LOCATIONS FOR THE STUD FASTENERS ON THE BACK LIP OF EACH MIRROR CHANNEL AT EQUAL INTERVALS NOT OVER 8" ON CENTER, AND NOT MORE THAN 3" FROM ENDS PRIOR TO DRILLING THE CHANNEL. DRILL AND COUNTERSINK, DO NOT DIMPLE, BACK LIP OF CHANNELS TO RECEIVE STUD FASTENERS AT MARKED LOCATIONS WITH HOLES PROPERLY SIZED TO RECEIVE STUD FASTENERS. ATTACH MIRROR CHANNELS BY SCREW ATTACHING MIRROR CHANNEL THROUGH THE BACK LIP OF THE CHANNEL THROUGH DRYWALL, STUD FRAMING, AND SHEET METAL BACKER PLATE SUBSTRATES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FASTENER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. a. INSTALL THE WEB OF THE TOP CHANNEL 1/4" HIGHER THAN THE HEIGHT OF TI -IE MIRROR TO ALLOW THE RAISING OF THE MIRROR INTO THE TOP CHANNEL AND ITS SUBSEQUENT LOWERING ONTO THE WEB OF THE BOTTOM CHANNEL. AFTER INSTALLING FASTENERS PLACE MASKING TAPE OVER THE ENTIRE LENGTH OF THE BACK LIP OF THE CHANNEL COMPLETELY COVERING THE FASTENER HEADS TO PROTECT THE MIRROR FROM BEING CHIPPED IN SETTING. ADHERE SETTING BLOCKS TO THE WEB OF THE BOTTOM MIRROR CHANNELS, LOCATED AT QUARTER POINTS, USING 2 SETTING BLOCKS PER MIRROR PANEL. E. WOOD TRIM INSTALLATION: 1. BEFORE INSTALLING MIRROR WOOD TRIM, EXAMINE SHOP -FABRICATED WORK FOR COMPLETION AND COMPLETE WORK AS REQUIRED. PRIME ALL EXPOSED SURFACES OF THE MIRROR WOOD TRIM WHICH WILL BE IN CONTACT WITH THE MIRROR BACKING TO ELIMINATE INTERACTIONS BETWEEN THE RESINS IN THE WOOD AND THE MIRROR BACKING. 2 INSTALL MIRROR WOOD TRIM PLUMB, LEVEL, TRUE, AND STRAIGHT WITH NO DISTORTIONS. SCRIBE AND CUT MIRROR WOOD TRIM TO FIT ADJOINING WORK, AND REFINISH CUT SURFACES AND REPAIR DAMAGED FINISH AT CUTS. INSTALL WITH MINIMUM NUMBER OF JOINTS POSSIBLE, USING FULL-LENGTH PIECES (FROM MAXIMUM LENGTH OF WOOD TRIM AVAILABLE) TO GREATEST EXTENT POSSIBLE. DO NOT USE PIECES LESS THAN 96" LONG, EXCEPT WHERE SHORTER SINGLE -LENGTH PIECES ARE NECESSARY. SCARF RUNNING JOINTS. MITERS OVER 4" LONG SHALL BE SPLINED AND GLUED. 3. FASTEN MIRROR WOOD TRIM THROUGH FIELD DRILLED AND COUNTER SUNKEN HOLES TO PLYWOOD, STUD FRAMING, AND SHEET METAL BACKER PLATES PREVIOUSLY BUILT INTO PARTITION SUBSTRATES. SECURE WITH COUNTER SUNK CONCEALED STUD FASTENERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FASTENER MANUFACTURERS WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. USING PLASTIC WOOD FILLER FILL VOID ABOVE HEADS OF COUNTER SUNK FASTENERS FULL AND STRIKE FLUSH WITH FACE OF THE WOOD TRIM, SAND SMOOTH WITH 220 GRIT OR FINER SANDPAPER. FILL GAPS, IF ANY, AT MITERS WITH PLASTIC WOOD FILLER, SAND SMOOTH. 4. ADHERE SETTING BLOCKS TO MIRROR GLASS BEARING SURFACE OF THE MIRROR WOOD TRIM GLAZING CHANNEL (DADO), LOCATED AT QUARTER POINTS, USING 2 SETTING BLOCKS PER MIRROR PANEL. F. MIRROR INSTALLATION: APPLY MASTIC IN PING FONG BALL SIZED SPOTS TO THE WALL, NOT TO THE MIRROR BACK TO AVOID POTENTIAL DAMAGE CAUSED BY MASTIC APPLICATOR TOOLS IN COMPLIANCE WITH MASTIC MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS FOR COVERAGE OF NOT LESS THAN ONE SPOT FOR EVERY SQUARE FOOT OF MIRROR AND TO ALLOW AIR CIRCULATION BETWEEN BACK OF MIRRORS AND FACE OF MOUNTING SURFACE. DO NOT APPLY MASTIC WITHIN 6" OF THE MIRROR EDGES TO PREVENT SQUEEZE OUT. PLACE SPOTS 50 SPACE WILL BE LEFT BETWEEN THEM WHEN THE MIRROR IS INSTALLED. AFTER MASTIC IS APPLIED, ALIGN MIRRORS AND PRESS INTO PLACE WHILE MAINTAINING A MINIMUM AIR SPACE OF 1/8" BETWEEN BACK OF MIRRORED GLASS AND MOUNTING SURFACE. MASTIC SHALL SPREAD TO A PAT APPROXIMATELY 4-1/2" IN DIAMETER AFTER PRESSING MIRROR INTO PLACE. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. PROTECT MIRRORS FROM BREAKAGE AND CONTAMINATING SUBSTANCES RESULTING FROM CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. USING CLEAN WARM WATER, CLEAN MIRRORS BY METHODS RECOMMENDED IN REFERENCED GLAZING STANDARDS. DIVISION Oq - FINIS( -IES SECTION Og290O - GYPSUM BOARD A. GENERAL: PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS INCLUDING METAL FRAMING ACCESSORIES, GYPSUM BOARD, JOINT TREATMENT, ACOUSTICAL INSULATION, ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. B. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH ASTM C754 (NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING), ASTM C1007 (STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING) AND ASTM 0840, AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE RATINGS. 1. DEFLECTIONS: MAXIMUM L/240 TYPICAL, L/360 AT LOCATIONS INDICATED TO RECEIVE TILE. C. FIRE -RATED ASSEMBLIES: LISTED BY UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY (UL), GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA) FILE NO'S IN GA -600 FIRE RESISTANCE DESIGN MANUAL, OR OTHER LISTING APPROVED BY APPLICABLE AUTHORITIES AND APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS. D. SYSTEMS RESPONSIBILITY: PROVIDE PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED BY OR RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER OF GYPSUM BOARD TO MAINTAIN SINGLE -SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY FOR SYSTEM. E. SUBMITTALS: SEE SECTION 013000 F. MANUFACTURERS: U% (1.800.950.3839), GEORGIA PACIFIC (1.800.225.6119), NATIONAL GYPSUM (1.704.365.7300), OR APPROVED EQUAL. G. METAL FRAMING: CONFORM TO IDENTIFIED STANDARDS FOR STRUCTURAL AND NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING, AS INDICATED IN DRAWINGS AND STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATIONS, AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS; PROVIDE ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 1. MANUFACTURED SUSPENSION SYSTEM SUCH AS CHICAGO METALLIC/DRYWALL SYSTEM IS ACCEPTABLE. SEE SECTION 095323 H. GYPSUM BOARD: CONFORM TO C840; UL LISTED FIRE RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD THROUGHOUT. 1. STANDARD: ASTM C1396, 5/8" THICK. 2. CORE BOARD: ASTM C1396, 1" THICK. I. FIRE RATED CONSTRUCTION: COMPLY WITH UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES CERTIFIED FIRE TESTS AND APPLICABLE CODE REQUIREMENTS. 1. PROVIDE PROTECTIVE COATED STEEL CORNER BEADS AND EDGE TRIM; TYPE DESIGNED TO BE CONCEALED IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION BY TAPE AND JOINT COMPOUND. 2. CORNER BEADS: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD METAL BEADS. 3. REINFORCING TAPE, JOINT COMPOUND, ADHESIVE, WATER, FASTENERS: TYPES RECOMMENDED BY SYSTEM MANUFACTURER AND CONFORMING TO ASTM C.475. J. SHAFT WALL SYSTEM: PROVIDE AT SHAFTS AND WHERE INDICATED. K. ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES: SEE SECTION 098100 L. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS, REFERENCED STANDARDS, AND APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE RATINGS AND ACOUSTICAL RATINGS. 1. SPECIAL METAL STUD AND GYPSUM DOOR: PROVIDE SPECIAL CONFIGURATION AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS M. METAL FRAMING ERECTION: ERECT METAL FRAMING IN ACCORDANCE WITH REFERENCED STANDARDS AND MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 1. INSTALL MEMBERS TRUE TO LINES AND LEVELS TO PROVIDE SURFACE FLATNESS WITH MAXIMUM VARIATION OF 1/8" IN 10'-0" IN ANY DIRECTION. 2. DOOR OPENING FRAMING: INSTALL DOUBLE STUDS AT DOOR FRAME JAMBS; INSTALL RUNNERS ON EACH SIDE OF OPENING AT FRAME HEAD HEIGHT BETWEEN JAMS STUDS AND ADJACENT STUDS. 3. INSTALL METAL FRAMING BACKING WHERE REQUIRED FOR SUPPORT OF FIXTURES, CABINETS, ACCESSORIES AND HARDWARE. 4. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF BUCKS, ANCHORS, BLOCKING, ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORK WHICH 15 TO BE PLACED IN OR BEHIND PARTITION FRAMING; ALLOW ITEMS TO BE INSTALLED AFTER FRAMING 15 COMPLETE. N. CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION: SEE SECTION 0g2g50. REINFORCE OPENINGS IN CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM. 1. LATERALLY BRACE ENTIRE SUSPENSION SYSTEM. 0. GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION: INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM 0840 AND MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. USE SCREWS WHEN FASTENING GYPSUM BOARD TO FURRING AND TO FRAMING. 1. STEEL DRILL SCREWS: ASTM C 1002, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. a. USE SCREWS COMPLYING WITH ASTM C 954 FOR FASTENING PANELS TO STEEL MEMBERS FROM 0.033 TO 0.112 INCH THICK. b. FOR FASTENING CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS, USE SCREWS OF TYPE AND SIZE RECOMMENDED BY PANEL MANUFACTURER. 2. FOR FIRE RATED SYSTEMS COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE RATINGS. 3. PLACE CORNER BEADS AT EXTERNAL CORNERS, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE; USE LONGEST PRACTICAL LENGTHS. 4. PLACE EDGE TRIM WHERE GYPSUM BOARD ABUTS DISSIMILAR MATERIALS. 5. TAPE, FILL, AND SAND EXPOSED JOINTS, EDGES, CORNERS AND OPENINGS TO PRODUCE SURFACE READY TO RECEIVE FINISHES; FEATHER COATS ONTO ADJOINING SURFACES. 6. FINISHING: COMPLY WITH GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA) "LEVELS OF GYPSUM BOARD FINISH". GA LEVEL 4, THREE COAT FINISHING AND SANDING IS REQUIRED FOR SURFACES INDICATED TO BE PAINTED; PROVIDE FLUSH, SMOOTH JOINTS AND SURFACES READY FOR APPLIED PAINT FINISHES. 7. REMOVE AND REPLACE DEFECTIVE WORK. SECTION 050 - GYPSUM BOARD METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES: 1. SUSPENSION SYSTEM FRAMING AND FURRING ASSEMBLIES 2. WIRE HANGERS, FASTENERS, MAIN RUNNERS, 5. RELATED SECTIONS: 1. SECTION 0G1200 - GYPSUM BOARD FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD CROSS TEES, AND WALL ANGLE MOLDINGS. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 635 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY -IN PANEL CEILINGS. 2. ASTM C 636 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR INSTALLATION OF METAL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY -IN PANELS. 3. ASTM C 754 OR C1007, AS APPROPRIATE: INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING MEMBERS TO RECEIVE SCREW -ATTACHED GYPSUM BOARD 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. SEE SECTION 013000 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SINGLE -SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY: TO ENSURE PROPER INTERFACE, ALL DRYWALL FURRING COMPONENTS SHALL BE PRODUCED OR SUPPLIED BY A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. 5. ALL ACCESSORY COMPONENTS FROM OTHER MANUFACTURERS SHALL CONFORM TO ASTM STANDARDS. C. FIRE RESISTANCE RATINGS: AS INDICATED BY REFERENCE TO DESIGN DESIGNATIONS IN UL FIRE RESISTANCE DIRECTORY, FOR TYPES OF ASSEMBLIES IN WHICH DRYWALL CEILINGS FUNCTION AS A FIRE PROTECTIVE MEMBRANE AND TESTED PER ASTM E llq. INSTALLATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE UL DESIGN BEING REFERENCED. D. COORDINATION OF WORK: 1. COORDINATE DRYWALL FURRING WORK WITH INSTALLERS OF RELATED WORK INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS, BUILDING INSULATION, GYPSUM BOARD, LIGHT FIXTURES, MECHANICAL SYSTEMS, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, AND SPRINKLERS. 2. ALL WORK ABOVE THE CEILING LINE SHOULD BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO INSTALLING THE DRYWALL SHEET GOODS. THERE SHOULD BE NO MATERIALS RESTING AGAINST OR WRAPPED AROUND THE SUSPENSION SYSTEM, HANGER WIRES OR TIES. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. SEE SECTION 016000 1.06 WARRANTY A. SUSPENSIONS SYSTEM: SUBMIT A WRITTEN LIMITED WARRANTY EXECUTED BY THE MANUFACTURER, AGREEING TO REPAIR OR REPLACE GRID COMPONENTS THAT ARE SUPPLIED WITH A HOT -DIPPED GALVANIZED COATING OR ALUMINUM BASE MATERIAL. FAILURES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED T0: THE OCCURRENCE OF 50% RED RUST AS DEFINED BY ASTM D 610 TEST PROCEDURES AS A RESULT OF DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR FACTORY WORKMANSHIP. 5. WARRANTY PERIOD: GRID: TEN YEARS FROM DATE OF INSTALLATION. C. THE WARRANTY SHALL NOT DEPRIVE THE OWNER OF OTHER RIGHTS THE OWNER MAY HAVE UNDER OTHER PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND WILL BE IN ADDITION TO AND RUN CONCURRENT WITH OTHER WARRANTIES MADE BY THE CONTRACTOR UNDER THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: 1. ARMSTRONG WORLD INDUSTRIES, INC. 2. CHICAGO METALIC 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. COMPONENTS: 1. MAIN BEAM: SHALL BE DOUBLE -WEB CONSTRUCTION (MINIMUM 0.0178 INCH PRIOR TO PROTECTIVE COATING), HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED (PER ASTM A653). a. HD8g01: 1-1/2 INCH WEB HEIGHT, PREFINISHED 15/16 INCH FLANGE WITH MINIMUM G40 HOT DIPPED GALVANIZATION. 2. PRIMARY CROSS TEES: SHALL BE DOUBLE -WEB STEEL CONSTRUCTION (MINIMUM 0.0178 INCH PRIOR TO PROTECTIVE COATING), HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED (MINIMUM G40 OR Gq0 PER ASTM A653), WEB HEIGHT 1-1/2 INCH WITH RECTANGULAR BULB AND PRE -FINISHED 1-1/2 INCH KNURLED FLANGE (XL8c145P,XL8965, XL8g47P). 3. SECONDARY FRAMING CROSS TEES: SHALL BE DOUBLE WEB STEEL CONSTRUCTION (MINIMUM 0.017q INCH PRIOR TO PROTECTIVE COATING), HOT DIPPED GALVANIZED (MINIMUM G40, WEB HEIGHT 1-1/2 INCH RECTANGULAR BULB AND 15/16 INCH FLANGE (XL8341). 4. WALL MOLDING: a. LAM -12, 12 FOOT LOCKING ANGLE MOLDING, 1-1/4 INCH X 1-1/4 INCH WITH PRE-ENGINEERED LOCKING TABS PUNCHED 8 INCHES ON CENTER, KNURLED SURFACE, SCREW STOP HEM, PRE -PUNCHED HOLES IN TOP FLANGE. 5. CLIPS: a. MAC - MAIN BEAM ADAPTER CLIP b. XTAC - CROSS TEE ADAPTER CLIP 6. SCREWS FOR WALLBOARD APPLICATION SHALL BE BUGLE HEAD SCREWS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THICKNESS OF MATERIAL USED. 5. STRUCTURAL CLASSIFICATION: 1. MAIN BEAM SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY PER ASTM C 635. 2. CLASSIFICATION CAN REQUIRE WIRES TO BE CLOSER TOGETHER FOR ADDITIONAL LOADING WHEN USED TO SUPPORT DOUBLE LAYER GYPSUM, VERTICALS, SLOPES, DOMES, HALF BARRELS, CIRCLES, SOFFITS, CANOPIES, AND STEP CONDITIONS WHICH CALL FOR LOADING OR UNUSUAL DESIGNS AND SHAPES IN DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION. USING CROSS TEES IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF CIRCLES, BARRELS, ETC. 15 COMMON IN ORDER TO HOLD THE RADIUS. 3. DEFLECTION OF FASTENING SUSPENSION SYSTEM SUPPORTING LIGHT FIXTURES, CEILING GRILLES, ACCESS DOORS, VERTICALS AND HORIZONTAL LOADS SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM DEFLECTION OF 1/360 OF THE SPAN. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. INSTALL SUSPENSION SYSTEM AND PANELS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, IN COMPLIANCE WITH ASTM INSTALLATION STANDARD, AND WITH APPLICABLE CODES AS REQUIRED BY THE AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. 5. THE ARMSTRONG DRYWALL GRID SYSTEM CAN BE INSTALLED IN INTERIOR OR EXTERIOR APPLICATIONS. C. TO SECURE TO METAL CLIPS, CONCRETE INSERTS, STEEL BAR JOIST OR STEEL DECK, USE POWER ACTUATED FASTENER, OR INSERT. COORDINATE PLACEMENT FOR HANGER WIRE SPACED AS REQUIRED FOR EXPECTED CEILING LOADS AND LAYOUT. D. INSTALL HANGER WIRE AS REQUIRED WITH NECESSARY ON CENTER SPACING TO SUPPORT EXPECTED CEILING LOAD REQUIREMENTS, FOLLOWING LOCAL PRACTICES, CODES AND REGULATIONS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL WIRES AT LIGHT FIXTURES, GRILLES, AND ACCESS DOORS WHERE NECESSARY. A PIGTAIL KNOT SHALL BE USED WITH THREE TIGHT WRAPS AT TOP AND BOTTOM FASTENING LOCATIONS. E. ADD ADDITIONAL WIRE AS NEEDED WHEN USING COMPATIBLE CLIPS AND ACCESSORIES. F. CONTROL JOINTS: ROLL FORMED ZINC ALLOY, ALUMINUM, OR PLASTIC AS _REQUIRED FOR EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. G. EXPANSION JOINTS: ROLL FORMED ZINC ALLOY, ALUMINUM, OR PLASTIC AS REQUIRED FOR EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. H. MAIN BEAMS SI -TALL BE SUSPENDED FROM THE OVERHEAD CONSTRUCTION WITH HANGER WIRE, SPACED AS REQUIRED FOR EXPECTED CEILING LOADS, ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE MAIN BEAMS. I. INSTALL CROSS TEES AT ON CENTER SPACING AS SPECIFIED BY THE DRYWALL MANUFACTURER. TYPICAL DRYWALL CROSS TEE SPACING: 1. 24 INCHES ON CENTER WITH 5/8 INCH GYPSUM BOARD J. OTHER ITEMS SUCH AS WOOD, SHEET METAL, OR PLASTIC PANELS SHOULD BE SCREWED TO COMPLY WITH DEFLECTION LIMIT EQUIVALENT TO THAT OF THE CEILING INSTALLATION. K. FOR LIGHT FIXTURES (TYPE G, TYPE F) USE SECONDARY FRAMING CROSS TEES AS REQUIRED TO FRAME OPENING. 3.02 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR APPLICATIONS A. INSTALL MAIN BEAMS AND CROSS TEES AT THE ON CENTER SPACING REQUIRED FOR CEILING LOADING, AND LOCATION OF IN -CEILING SERVICES. B. ADDITIONAL BRACING AS REQUIRED BY CODE. SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO TI -115 SECTION. 1.02 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES APPLICATION OF AGGLOMERATE TILE, NATURAL STONE TILE, AND CERAMIC / PORCELAIN TILE IN INTERIOR CONDITIONS FOR WALLS AND FLOORS. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. NO SUBMITTALS SHALL BE REQUIRED. 5. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ALL INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION MATERIALS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO; SETTING BED/ADHESIVE, MOISTURE MITIGATION, CRACK REPAIR, FILLING, AND LEVELING, SHALL BE PROVIDED FROM A SINGLE MANUFACTURER. TO DETERMINE WHICH MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCTS TO USE BEGIN WITH SECTION 2.04 OF THIS SPECIFICATION. B. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: TILE FABRICATOR, SPECIALIZING IN INSTALLATION OF TILE, MOSAICS, PAVERS, TRIM UNITS AND THRESHOLDS WITH FIVE (5) YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE WITH INSTALLATIONS OF SIMILAR SCOPE, MATERIALS AND DESIGN. 1. INSTALLER TO HAVE COMPLETED A CERTIFIED TILE INSTALLATION PROGRAM SIMILAR TO TCAA "TROWEL OF EXCELLENCE", TCNA "FIVE STAR" OR OTHER EQUIVALENT RECOGNIZED INSTALLATION PROGRAM. C. INSTALLATION SYSTEM MANUFACTURER: COMPANY SPECIALIZING IN ADHESIVES, MORTARS, GROUTS AND/OR OTHER INSTALLATION MATERIALS WITH TEN (10) YEARS MINIMUM EXPERIENCE AND 150 9001 CERTIFICATION. 1. ALL SETTING MATERIALS SHALL BE FROM A SINGLE SOURCE AND COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS. 2. MANUFACTURER OF SETTING MATERIALS SHALL PROVIDE A 25 -YEAR SYSTEMS (LABOR MATERIALS) WARRANTY. SEE SPECIFIC WARRANTY INFORMATION AS PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. REFER TO SECTION 016000 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF TILE WORK WITH RELATED WORK. 5. PROCEED WITH TILE WORK ONLY AFTER CURBS, VENTS, DRAINS, PIPING, AND OTHER PROJECTIONS THROUGH SUBSTRATE HAVE BEEN INSTALLED AND WHEN SUBSTRATE CONSTRUCTION AND FRAMING OF OPENINGS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED. 1.07 A. PROJECT CONDITIONS TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERIOR TILE: 1. DO NOT SET WHEN AIR, AMBIENT, MATERIAL, AND/OR SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 45'F OR ABOVE q0'F (4'C - 35'C) 2. MAINTAIN TEMPERATURE AT 50°F OR ABOVE BUT LESS THAN 10'F (4°C - 35"C) IN INSTALLATION AREAS DURING INSTALLATION AND FOR 7 DAYS AFTER COMPLETION UNLESS HIGHER TEMPERATURES ARE REQUIRED BY FABRICATOR'S OR SUPPLIER'S INSTRUCTIONS. a. PROTECT PORTLAND CEMENT BASED MORTARS AND GROUTS FROM DIRECT SUNLIGHT, RADIANT HEAT, FORCED VENTILATION (HEAT * COLD) AND DRAFTS UNTIL CURED TO PREVENT PREMATURE EVAPORATION OF MOISTURE. b. EPDXY MORTARS AND GROUTS REQUIRE SURFACE TEMPERATURES BETWEEN 60°F AND 90"F (16'C AND 37C) AT TIME OF INSTALLATION. 3. PREVENT CARBON DIOXIDE DAMAGE TO TILE, MOSAICS, PAVERS, TRIM, AND THRESHOLDS, AS WELL AS ADHESIVES, MORTARS, GROUTS AND OTHER INSTALLATION MATERIALS, BY VENTING TEMPORARY HEATERS TO THE EXTERIOR. 4. PROVIDE VENTILATION AND PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT AS RECOMMENDED BY MFG. MOISTURE REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERIOR TILE: 1. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TEST TO DETERMINE MOISTURE LEVEL OF SUBSTRATE. THE TEST RESULTS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE LSD*C PM PRIOR TO SUB FLOOR PREPARATION. a. TEST SLAB FOR RELATIVE HUMIDITY WITH A PROBE TEST COMPLYING WITH ASTM F-2170. IF THE VALUE IS ABOVE 75% THEN MOISTURE MITIGATION 15 REQUIRED. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NATIONAL ACCOUNTS A. THE MAPEI OR LATICRETE PRODUCTS LISTED THROUGHOUT THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL BE PURCHASED BY THE GC THROUGH THE FOLLOWING NATIONAL ACCOUNT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 1. MAPEI: PRO -TILE, 914.665.0654 PLACE ORDER AS A VICTORIA'S SECRET OR PINK STORE. MATERIAL WILL BE PROVIDED FROM THE NEAREST MAPEI DISTRIBUTION CENTER. 2. LATICRETE: CONTACT TONJA DICENZO, LATICRETE NATIONAL ACCOUNT REPRESENTATIVE 203.707.9320. PLACE ORDER AS A VICTORIA'S SECRET OR PINK STORE. MATERIAL WILL BE PROVIDED FROM THE NEAREST LATICRETE DISTRIBUTION CENTER. 5. ALL OTHER PRODUCTS LISTED WHICH ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC SHALL BE PURCHASED THROUGH LOCAL RESOURCES. 2.02 TILE A. TILE SUPPLIED BY LSD*C VENDOR AS SPECIFIED IN THE FINISH SCHEDULE AND PLANS. 2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. MOISTURE MITIGATION 1. A MOISTURE MITIGATION BARRIER SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN THE SUBSTRATE RELATIVE HUMIDITY EXCEEDS THE ALLOWABLE LIMITS PER SECTION 1.7.5 OF TI -IIS SPECIFICATION. 2. IF MOISTURE MITIGATION IS REQUIRED, THE CONCRETE SUBSTRATE MUST BE PREPARED BY SHOT-BLASTING TO ACHIEVE A SURFACE PROFILE BETWEEN CSP -3 AND CSP -6 AS PER ICRI STANDARDS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE MITIGATION. 3. MANUFACTURER: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT: a. MAPEI CORP: PLAN SEAL VS FAST b. LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL: LATICRETE NXT VAPOR REDUCTION COATING. B. BONDING AGENT 1. A BONDING AGENT SHALL BE PROVIDED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ANY SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT ONLY WHEN A MOISTURE MITIGATION BARRIER 15 REQUIRED. 2. MANUFACTURER: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT: a. MAPEI CORP: ECO PRIM GRIP (APPLIED OVER PLAN SEAL VS FAST) b. LATICRETE INTERNATIONAL: LATICRETE NXT PRIMER (APPLIED OVER NXT VAPOR REDUCTION COATING - REFER TO LATICRETE ISSUED WARRANTY) C. LARGE FILL AREAS AND LEVELING 1. REFER TO SECTION 038250. D. PATCHING, RAMPING, AND SMALL FILL AREAS 2. REFER TO SECTION 039250. 2.04 THIN -SET MORTAR MATERIALS A. AGGLOMERATE RESIN TILE: SUPPLIER TO SUPPLY DATA TO THE OWNER ON THE MOISTURE SENSITIVITY OF TI -IE TILE. THE APPROPRIATE CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE DETERMINED AND LABELED WITHIN THE FINISH SCHEDULE. THIS CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE USED TO DETERMINE THE PROPER SETTING MATERIALS. 1. MANUFACTURER: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT a. FOR CLASS "A", "5", OR "C" MATERIAL: TWO-PART POLYMER MODIFIED RAPID -SETTING FLEXIBLE TILE MORTAR COMPLYING WITH ANSI A118.4 AND ISO 13007 C2F52P2: • MAPEI GRANT RAPID SYSTEM. • LATICRETE LATAPDXY 300 B. NATURAL STONE TILE: SUPPLIER SHALL PROVIDE DATA TO THE OWNER ON THEWATER SENSITIVITY OF THE STONE. THE APPROPRIATE CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE DETERMINED AND LABELED WITHIN THE FINISH SCHEDULE. T1-115 CLASSIFICATION SHALL BE USED TO DETERMINE THE PROPER SETTING MATERIALS. 1. FOR CLASS "A" STONE: PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS REQUIREMENTS OF ANSI A118.4 AND 150 13007 C2TES1P1 a. PREMIUM POLYMER MODIFIED THIN SET MORTAR FOR INSTALLATION OF LARGE FORMAT TILE: • MAPEI CORP, ULTRA FLEX LFT • LATICRETE 254 RAPID C. 2. FOR CLASS "B" AND CLASS "C" STONE: PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT THAT MEETS OR EXCEEDS REQUIREMENTS OF ANSI A118.4 AND 150 13007 C2F52P2 a. TWO-PART POLYMER MODIFIED RAPID -SETTING FLEXIBLE TILE MORTAR: - MAPEI CORP: GRANI RAPID SYSTEM CERAMIC / PORCELAIN TILE: 1. TILE UP TO 15" X 15" USE PROFESSIONAL GRADE POLYMER MODIFIED RAPID SETTING THIN SET MORTAR COMPLYING WITH ANSI A118.4 AND ISO 13007 C2EP1: MAPEI CORP. ULTRAFLEX 2 RS OR LATICRETE 4-XLT RAPID 2. TILE LARGER THAN 15" X 15" USE PREMIUM POLYMER MODIFIED RAPID SETTING THIN SET MORTAR FOR INSTALLATION OF LARGE FORMAT TILE COMPLYING WITH ANSI A118.4 AND ISO 13007 C2TESJP1: MAPEI CORP. ULTRAFLEX LFT R5 OR LATICRETE 4-XLT RAPID 2.05 GROUT A. 141G -1 -HYDRATED CEMENT GROUT THAT 15 FAST SETTING, COLOR CONSISTENT, NON -SHRINKING, AND EFFLORESCENCE FREE CONFORMING TO ANSI A118.7 AND ISO 13007 CG21A1A, FOR JOINTS OF 1/16"-1" WIDE. 1. INTERIOR HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL LOCATIONS: CONFORM TO ANSI A116.6 AND 150 13007 CG21,4A. REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE FOR ACTUAL MANUFACTURER AND COLOR REQUIRED FOR EACH TILE TYPE. a. MAPEI CORP; ULTRA COLOR PLUS, SANDED. - CUSTOM GROUT COLORS WILL BE SUPPLIED BY OWNER. b. CUSTOM BUILDING PRODUCTS; PRISM, SANDED. c. LATICRETE; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR SELECT. d. BOSTIK 2. INSTALL ALL GROUT IN COMPLIANCE WITH ANSI A108.6.. 3. ALL GROUT TO BE UN -SANDED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 4. ALL GROUT JOINTS TO BE 1/16" UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES: REFER TO SECTION 078513 B. TRANSITION STRIPS: ALUMINUM OR ZINC STRIPS AS SPECIFIED IN DRAWINGS AND DETAILS. C. CLEANER: TILE CLEANER SPECIFICALLY FORMULATED FOR SPECIFIED TILE AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT USE ANY CLEANING COMPOUNDS THAT ARE NOT RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. 2.07 FLOOR SEALER A. PROVIDE FLOOR TILE AND GROUT SEALER AS FOLLOWS: 1. FLOOR SEALER IS REQUIRED FOR ALL NATURAL STONE. 2. GROUT SEALER: COLORLESS, SLIP AND STAIN RESISTANT SEALER THAT DOES NOT AFFECT COLOR OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF TILE SURFACES, AS RECOMMENDED BY GROUT MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATION INDICATED. USE A WATER-BASED SEALER, NO SOLVENTS. 3. AGGLOMERATE TILE: TILE FLOOR SEALER IS ONLY REQUIRED WHEN SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED WITHIN THE SUPPLIER'S DOCUMENTATION. 4. CERAMIC AND PORCELAIN TILE SHALL NOT REQUIRE A SEALER. 5. COLORLESS, SLIP AND STAIN RESISTANT SEALER THAT DOES NOT ALTER COLOR OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF STONE SURFACES, AS RECOMMENDED BY STONE PRODUCER FOR APPLICATION INDICATED. C. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: MIRACLE SEALANTS 511 H2O PLUS WATER BASE PENETRATING SEALER OR EQUAL. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. EXAMINE SURFACES INDICATED TO RECEIVE TILE, WITH INSTALLER PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE. VERIFY THAT SURFACES TO BE COVERED ARE: 1. SOUND, RIGID AND CONFORM TO GOOD DESIGN/ENGINEERING PRACTICES. 2. WITH MAXIMUM DEFLECTION UNDER ALL LIVE, DEAD AND IMPACT LOADS, INCLUDING CONCENTRATED LOADS, OF L/720. 3. CLEAN AND FREE OF DUST, DIRT, OIL, GREASE, SEALERS, CURING COMPOUNDS, LAITANCE, EFFLORESCENCE, FORM OIL OR LOOSE PLASTER, PAINT AND SCALE. 4. LEVEL AND TRUE TO WITHIN 1/8" IN 10' (6MM IN 3M), AND NO MORE THAN 1/16" IN 1' (1.5MM IN 0.3M) VARIATION FROM SUBSTRATE HIGH POINTS. 5. NOT LEVELED WITH GYPSUM OR ASPHALT BASED COMPOUNDS. 6. DRY AS PER ASTM D4263. 7. TEST SLAB FOR MOISTURE LIMITATIONS AS PER SECTION 1.07.5. OF THIS SPECIFICATION. 5. CONCRETE SURFACES SHALL BE: 1. CURED MIN. OF 28 DAYS AT 70'F (21"C). 2. WOOD FLOAT FINISHED, OR BETTER CONFORMING TO CSP -3 AS PER ICRI STANDARDS. 3. ADVISE LSD#C PROJECT MANAGER OF ANY SURFACE OR SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS REQUIRING CORRECTION BEFORE TILE WORK COMMENCES. BEGINNING OF WORK CONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE OR SURFACE CONDITIONS. C. PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED. 3.02 PREPARATION A. VACUUM CLEAN OR SWEEP SUBSTRATES TO REMOVE DIRT, DUST, DEBRIS, AND LOOSE PARTICLES. B. REMOVE SUBSTANCES FROM CONCRETE SUBSTRATES THAT COULD IMPAIR SETTING BOND, INCLUDING CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS, FORM OIL, AND LAITANCE. C. 51-1OT-BLAST SUBSTRATE WHEN REQUIRED PER SECTION 2.03 OF TI -115 SPECIFICATION; COORDINATE SHOT BLAST REQUIREMENTS WITH SECTION 038250 CONCRETE RESURFACING WHEN REQUIRED AS PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENTS. D. PROFILE SUBSTRATE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION AS NOTATED IN APPLICABLE DATASHEETS AND WARRANTIES. E. CLEAN ANY DIRTY OR STAINED SURFACES ON THE TILE SCHEDULED TO BE INSTALLED BY REMOVING SOIL, STAINS, AND FOREIGN MATERIALS BEFORE SETTING. 1. CLEAN BY THOROUGHLY SCRUBBING W/ FIBER BRUSHES AND DRENCHING WITH CLEAR WATER. USE ONLY MILD CLEANING COMPOUNDS CONTAINING NO CAUSTIC OR HARSH MATERIALS OR ABRASIVES. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA (TCNA) HANDBOOK, ANSI A108 TILE INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS, AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. SUBSTRATE REQUIREMENTS: 1. FLOOR SURFACES: CONCRETE 2. PLATFORM SURFACES: CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD 3. WALL SURFACES: CEMENT BACKER BOARD 4. CEILINGS AND SOFFITS: GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS C. PLACE TILE IN ACCORDANCE WITH PATTERNS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS; CAREFULLY PLAN LAYOUTS, ENSURE PATTERN IS UNINTERRUPTED FROM ONE SURFACE TO THE NEXT AND THROUGH DOORWAYS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. D. ALL TILE >15" DIMENSION MUST BE BACK BUTTERED PRIOR TO SETTING TILE IN TROWELED MORTAR RIBS. NOTE THAT NATURAL STONE THICKNESS TOLERANCE IS 6/64" (2MM), AND MAY REQUIRE ADDITIONAL BACK BUTTERING. BACK BUTTERING MUST BE A CONSISTENT THICKNESS LAYER BETWEEN 1/16-1/8"; NO DABS OR SPOTS OF MORTAR ALLOWED. 3.04 MOVEMENT JOINTS A. MINIMUM 1/4" GAPS SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT ALL PERIMETER WALLS AND AT ALL COLUMN ENCLOSURES. THIS GAP MUST BE OBSCURED COMPLETELY BY THE WALL BASE MATERIAL. 3.05 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE: A. REFER TO SECTION 071416 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. TILE TO BE REPLACED 1F INSTALLED IMPROPERLY AND NOT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE SPECIFICATIONS AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. 5. IN -PROGRESS CLEANING: CLEAN TILE AS WORK PROGRESSES. REMOVE MORTAR FINS AND SMEARS PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. C. CLEAN TILE AFTER SETTING AND GROUTING ARE COMPLETE PER MANUFACTURER' RECOMMENDATIONS. 3.07 PROTECTION A. PROHIBIT TRAFFIC FROM INSTALLED TILE PER THE MFGS INSTRUCTIONS FOR SETTING ADHESIVE. SECTION 05123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. THIS SECTION INCLUDES ACOUSTICAL TILES AND EXPOSED SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR CEILINGS. 1.02 SUBMITTALS: A. SEE SECTION 013000 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ACOUSTICAL TESTING AGENCY QUALIFICATIONS: AN INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY, OR AN NVLAP-ACCREDITED LABORATORY. 5. FIRE -TEST -RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS: 1. FIRE -RESISTANCE CHARACTERISTICS: WHERE INDICATED, PROVIDE ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS IDENTICAL TO THOSE OF ASSEMBLIES TESTED FOR FIRE RESISTANCE PER ASTM E lIq BY UL OR ANOTHER TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY ACCEPTABLE TO AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION. a. IDENTIFY MATERIALS WITH APPROPRIATE MARKINGS OF APPLICABLE TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY. 2. SURFACE -BURNING CHARACTERISTICS: ACOUSTICAL TILES COMPLYING WITH ASTM E 1264 FOR CLASS EA] MATERIALS, WHEN TESTED PER ASTM E 84. a. SMOKE -DEVELOPED INDEX: 450 OR LESS. C. SEISMIC STANDARD: COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING: 1. STANDARD FOR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS REQUIRING SEISMIC RESTRAINT: COMPLY WITH ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS: COMPLY WITH CISCA'S "RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DIRECT -HUNG ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY -IN PANEL CEILINGS --SEISMIC ZONESA-5." 3. CISCA'S GUIDELINES FOR SYSTEMS REQUIRING SEISMIC RESTRAINT: COMPLY WITH CISCA'S "GUIDELINES FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT OF DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENDED CEILING ASSEMBLIES --SEISMIC ZONES C, D, E, F." 4. UBC STANDARD 25-2, "METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND FOR LAY -IN PANEL CEILINGS." 5. ASCE7, "MINIMUM DESIGN LOADS FOR BUILDINGS AND OTHER STRUCTURES": SECTION9, "EARTHQUAKE LOADS." D. MOCKUPS: SEE SECTION 014000. 1. APPROVED MOCKUPS MAY BECOME PART OF THE COMPLETED WORK IF UNDISTURBED AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. E. PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE: CONDUCT CONFERENCE AT PROJECT SITE. 1.04 EXTRA MATERIALS A. FURNISH EXTRA MATERIALS DESCRIBED BELOW THAT MATCH PRODUCTS INSTALLED AND THAT ARE PACKAGED WITH PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR STORAGE AND IDENTIFIED WITH LABELS DESCRIBING CONTENTS. 1. ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS: QUANTITY OF 10 FULL-SIZE TILES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL A. ACOUSTICAL TILE STANDARD: COMPLY WITH ASTM E 1264. B. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM STANDARD: COMPLY WITH ASTM C 635. C. ATTACHMENT DEVICES: SIZE FOR FIVE TIMES THE DESIGN LOAD INDICATED IN ASTM C 635, TABLE 1, "DIRECT HUNG," UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. COMPLY WITH SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. I. ANCHORS IN CONCRETE: EXPANSION ANCHORS FABRICATED FROM CORROSION -RESISTANT MATERIALS, WITH HOLES OR LOOPS FOR ATTACHING HANGERS OF TYPE INDICATED AND WITH CAPABILITY TO SUSTAIN, WITHOUT FAILURE, A LOAD EQUAL TO FIVE TIMES THAT IMPOSED BY CEILING CONSTRUCTION, AS DETERMINED BY TESTING PER ASTM E488 OR ASTM E 1512 AS APPLICABLE, CONDUCTED BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY. 2. POWER -ACTUATED FASTENERS IN CONCRETE: FASTENER SYSTEM OF TYPE SUITABLE FOR APPLICATION INDICATED, FABRICATED FROM CORROSION -RESISTANT MATERIALS, WITH CLIPS OR OTHER ACCESSORY DEVICES FOR ATTACHING HANGERS OF TYPE INDICATED, AND WITH CAPABILITY TO SUSTAIN, WITHOUT FAILURE, A LOAD EQUAL TO 10 TIMES THAT IMPOSED BY CEILING CONSTRUCTION, AS DETERMINED BY TESTING PER ASTM E 1190, CONDUCTED BY A QUALIFIED TESTING AND INSPECTING AGENCY. WIRE HANGERS, BRACES, AND TIES: ZINC -COATED CARBON -STEEL WIRE; ASTM A 641/A 641M, CLASS 1 ZINC COATING, SOFT TEMPER. 1. SIZE: SELECT WIRE DIAMETER SO ITS STRESS AT 3 TIMES HANGER DESIGN LOAD (ASTM C 635, TABLE 1, "DIRECT HUNG") WILL BE LESS THAN YIELD STRESS OF WIRE, BUT PROVIDE NOT LESS THAN 0.106 -INCH- (2.69 -MM-) DIAMETER WIRE. SEISMIC STRUTS AND SEISMIC CLIPS. METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM: TYPE AND PROFILE INDICATED OR, IF NOT INDICATED, MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD MOLDINGS FOR EDGES AND PENETRATIONS THAT COMPLY WITH SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS; FORMED FROM SHEET METAL OF SAME MATERIAL, FINISH, AND COLOR AS THAT USED FOR EXPOSED FLANGES OF SUSPENSION SYSTEM RUNNERS. D. E. F. 2.02 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. AVAILABLE PRODUCTS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PRODUCTS THAT MAY BE INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED T0, THE FOLLOWING: 5. PROVIDE THE PRODUCT INDICATED WITHIN THE FINISH SCHEDULE OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. C. CLASSIFICATION: PROVIDE TILES (OR FIRE -RESISTANCE RATED TILES AS REQUIRED) COMPLYING WITH ASTM E 1264 FOR TYPE AND FORM AS INDICATED: D. COLOR: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. E. LIGHT REFLECTANCE: ASTM E 1477; WHITE PANEL: LIGHT REFLECTANCE:0.83 F. NOISE REDUCTION COEFFICIENT: ASTM C 423; CLASSIFIED W/ UL LABEL ON PRODUCT CARTON, 0.50 G. CEILING ATTENUATION CLASS: ASTM C 1414; CLASSIFIED WITH UL LABEL ON PRODUCT CARTON, 30 H. 1. J. ARTICULATION CLASS: ASTM E 1111; CLASSIFIED WITH UL LABEL ON PRODUCT CARTON N/A EDGE/JOINT DETAIL: BEVELED TEGULAR (ONLY FOR SALES AREA). THICKNESS: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. K. MODULAR SIZE: AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. 2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING A. AVAILABLE PRODUCTS: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PRODUCTS THAT MAY BE INCORPORATED INTO THE WORK INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED T0, THE FOLLOWING: B. PROVIDE THE PRODUCT INDICATED WITHIN THE FINISH SCHEDULE OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. C. DIRECT -HUNG (OR FIRE -RATED AS REQUIRED) SUSPENSION SYSTEM: INTERMEDIATE OR HEAVY-DUTY STRUCTURAL CLASSIFICATION AS REQUIRED. D. ACCESS: DOWNWARD, WITH EACH ACCESS UNIT IDENTIFIED BY MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD UNOBTRUSIVE MARKERS. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH ASTM C 636, UBC STANDARD 25-2 AND 51=I5MIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS INDICATED, PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS AND CISCA'S "CEILING SYSTEMS HANDBOOK." B. MEASURE EACH CEILING AREA AND ESTABLISH LAYOUT OF ACOUSTICAL TILES TO BALANCE BORDER WIDTHS AT OPPOSITE EDGES OF EACH CEILING. AVOID USING LESS -THAN -HALF -WIDTH TILES AT BORDERS. C. SUSPEND CEILING HANGERS FROM BUILDING'S STRUCTURAL MEMBERS, PLUMB AND FREE FROM CONTACT VIITI-I INSULATION OR OTHER OBJECTS WITHIN CEILING PLENUM. SPLAY HANGERS ONLY WHERE REQUIRED AND, IF PERMITTED WITH FIRE -RESISTANCE -RATED CEILINGS, TO MISS OBSTRUCTIONS; OFFSET RESULTING HORIZONTAL FORCES BY BRACING, COUNTERSPLAYING, OR OTHER EQUALLY EFFECTIVE MEANS. WHERE WIDTH OF DUCTS AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WITHIN CEILING PLENUM PRODUCES HANGER SPACINGS THAT INTERFERE WITH LOCATION OF HANGERS, USE TRAPEZES OR EQUIVALENT DEVICES. WHEN STEEL FRAMING DOES NOT PERMIT INSTALLATION OF HANGER WIRES AT SPACING REQUIRED, INSTALL CARRYING CHANNELS OR OTHER SUPPLEMENTAL SUPPORT FOR ATTACHMENT OF HANGER WIRES. 1. DO NOT SUPPORT CEILINGS DIRECTLY FROM PERMANENT METAL FORMS OR FLOOR DECK; ANCHOR INTO CONCRETE SLABS. 2. DO NOT ATTACH HANGERS TO STEEL DECK TABS OR TO STEEL ROOF DECK. D. INSTALL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM OF TYPE INDICATED AT PERIMETER OF ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING AREA AND WHERE NECESSARY TO CONCEAL EDGES OF ACOUSTICAL TILES. SCREW ATTACH MOLDINGS TO SUBSTRATE AT INTERVALS NOT MORE THAN 16 INCHES (400 MM) O.C. AND NOT MORE THAN 3 INCHES (75 MM) FROM ENDS, LEVELING WITH CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM TO A TOLERANCE OF 1/8 INCH IN 12 FEET (3.2 MM IN 3.6 M). MITER CORNERS ACCURATELY AND CONNECT SECURELY. E. INSTALL SUSPENSION SYSTEM RUNNERS SO THEY ARE SQUARE AND SECURELY INTERLOCKED WITH ONE ANOTHER. REMOVE AND REPLACE DENTED, BENT, OR KINKED MEMBERS. F. INSTALL ACOUSTICAL TILES IN COORDINATION WITH SUSPENSION SYSTEM AND EXPOSED MOLDINGS AND TRIM. PLACE SPLINES OR SUSPENSION SYSTEM FLANGES INTO KERFED EDGES SO TILE -TO -TILE JOINTS ARE CLOSED BY DOUBLE LAP OF MATERIAL 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. REPLACE DAMAGED AND BROKEN PANELS. 5. CLEAN EXPOSED SURFACES OF ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS, INCLUDING TRIM, EDGE MOLDINGS, AND SUSPENSION MEMBERS. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP OF MINOR FINISH DAMAGE. REMOVE AND REPLACE MARK THAT CANNOT BE SUCCESSFULLY CLEANED AND REPAIRED TO PERMANENTLY ELIMINATE EVIDENCE OF DAMAGE. SECTION 05323 - STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. COMPLY WITH ASTM C 754 FOR CONDITIONS INDICATED. B. TIE WIRE: ASTM A 641/A 641M, CLASS 1 ZINC COATING, SOFT TEMPER, 0.0625 INCH DIAMETER WIRE, OR DOUBLE STRAND OF 0.0475 INCH DIAMETER WIRE. C. HANGER ATTACHMENTS TO CONCRETE: AS FOLLOWS: 1. ANCHORS: FABRICATED FROM CORROSION -RESISTANT MATERIALS WITH HOLES OR LOOPS FOR ATTACHING HANGER WIRES AND CAPABLE OF SUSTAINING, WITHOUT FAILURE, A LOAD EQUAL TO 5 TIMES THAT IMPOSED BY CONSTRUCTION AS DETERMINED BY TESTING ACCORDING TO ASTM E 488 BY A QUALIFIED TESTING INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCY. D. HANGERS: AS FOLLOWS: I. WIRE HANGERS: ASTM A 641/A 641M, CLASS 1 ZINC COATING, SOFT TEMPER, AND 0.162 INCH DIAMETER. 2. ROD HANGERS: ASTM A 510, MILD CARBON STEEL. a. DIAMETER: 1/4 INCH. b. PROTECTIVE COATING: ASTM A 153/A 153M, HOT -DIP GALVANIZED. 3. FLAT HANGERS: COMMERCIAL -STEEL SHEET, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, HOT -DIP GALVANIZED. a. SIZE: 1 BY 3/16 INCH BY LENGTH INDICATED. 4. ANGLE HANGERS: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, HOT -DIP GALVANIZED COMMERCIAL -STEEL SHEET. E. CARRYING CHANNELS: COLD -ROLLED, COMMERCIAL -STEEL 514EET WITI-1_A BASE METAL THICKNESS OF 0.0538 INCH, A MINIMUM 1/2 INCH WIDE FLANGE, WITH ASTM A653/A 653M, G40, HOT -DIP GALVANIZED ZINC COATING. F. FURRING CHANNELS (FURRING MEMBERS): COMMERCIAL -STEEL SHEET WITH ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, HOT -DIP GALVANIZED ZINC COATING. 1. HAT -SHAPED, RIGID FURRING CHANNELS: ASTM A 645, 7/8 I F�LE'iWEe IF UM BASE METAL THICKNESS OF 0.0179 INCH. ' CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 022017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SHREMSHOCK Shremshock Architects, Inc. 7400 W. Campus Rd. Suite 150 New Albany, OH 43054 t: 614 545 4550 1 f 614 545 4555 1 shremshock.com Gerald Shremshock, Architect Timo y J. Shremshock, Architect N 0) G0 M O cel dam' 0 o Det O F -a t .0 ..0 Z E O m 0 0 Z 3 Y ala W "0 D .a) LLIE Et J O cuCD I_ 1 I- O 0 Lt) O 0 iv w H J CCz C C � {.4- 6 W acs 0 60ze- z1.3 14 W O W OW_ W d C Z NON <000.* z W 6 V 0 O Z N Z j W - 0 6 Q W Z O W O m 8 0 < W O Lig W N W nl O ~ 0 W ~ W W C yj0j� to W a Z N W 0 0 - W = Z < K r Z U 17 Wwo 6 J LL w 6 o z W 6 y en 0 Q E 0 tri▪ goZ3otn.a o N . W fn 1y 8 It z O 0 O d 1r 2 O C W arcDaz 6a 105.01.1449.02 PROJECT INFORMATION: a 11.1 Uzi CD 0 Fin er Mco V.1 ix co 5 6- -4. la NMt w 1- 0 w O) O co lO O r LLI 10. L.:.iS2 C.> cctj O�wci V')OJ REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE RECEIVED CITY OF 1 UKWILA SEP 2.2 2017 PERMIT CENTFR DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 AM HMG SKM ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. SUSPEND CEILING HANGERS FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE AS FOLLOWS: 1. INSTALL HANGERS PLUMB AND FREE FROM CONTACT WITH INSULATION OR OTHER OBJECTS WITHIN THE CEILING PLENUM THAT ARE NOT PART OF SUPPORTING STRUCTURAL OR CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM. SPLAY HANGERS ONLY WHERE REQUIRED TO MISS OBSTRUCTIONS AND OFFSET RESULTING HORIZONTAL FORCES BY BRACING, COUNTERSPLAY I NG, OR OTHER EQUALLY EFFECTIVE METHODS. 2. WHERE WIDTH OF DUCTS AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WITHIN CEILING PLENUM PRODUCES HANGER SPACINGS THAT INTERFERE WITH THE LOCATION OF HANGERS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT STANDARD SUSPENSION SYSTEM MEMBERS, INSTALL SUPPLEMENTAL SUSPENSION MEMBERS AND HANGERS IN FORM OF TRAPEZES OR EQUIVALENT DEVICES. SIZE SUPPLEMENTAL SUSPENSION MEMBERS AND HANGERS TO SUPPORT CEILING LOADS WITHIN PERFORMANCE LIMITS ESTABLISHED BY REFERENCED STANDARDS 3. SECURE WIRE HANGERS BY LOOPING AND WIRE -TYING, EITHER DIRECTLY TO STRUCTURES OR TO INSERTS, EYESCREWS, OR OTHER DEVICES AND FASTENERS THAT ARE SECURE AND APPROPRIATE FOR SUBSTRATE, AND IN A MANNER THAT WILL NOT CAUSE THEM TO DETERIORATE OR OTHERWISE FAIL. 4. SECURE ROD OR FLAT HANGERS TO STRUCTURE, INCLUDING INTERMEDIATE FRAMING MEMBERS, BY ATTACHING TO INSERTS, EYESCRENS, OR OTHER DEVICES AND FASTENERS THAT ARE SECURE AND APPROPRIATE FOR STRUCTURE AND HANGER, AND IN A MANNER THAT WILL NOT CAUSE HANGERS TO DETERIORATE OR OTHERWISE FAIL. 5. DO NOT SUPPORT CEILINGS DIRECTLY FROM PERMANENT METAL FORMS. FURNISH CAST -IN-PLACE HANGER INSERTS THAT EXTEND THROUGH FORMS. 6. DO NOT ATTACH HANGERS TO STEEL DECK TABS. 7. DO NOT ATTACH HANGERS TO STEEL ROOF DECK. ATTACH HANGERS TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. 8. DO NOT CONNECT OR SUSPEND STEEL FRAMING FROM DUCTS, PIPES OR CONDUIT. B. INSTALLATION TOLERANCES: 1. INSTALL STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED CEILINGS SO MEMBERS FOR PANEL ATTACHMENT ARE LEVEL TO WITH 1/8" IN 12 FEET MEASURED LENGTHWISE ON EACH MEMBER AND TRANSVERSELY BETWEEN PARALLEL MEMBERS. C. SWAY -BRACE SUSPENDED STEEL FRAMING WITH HANGERS USED FOR SUPPORT. D. WIRE -TIE FURRING CHANNELS TO SUPPORTS. E. INSTALL SUSPENDED STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS IN SIZES AND SPACES INDICATED, BUT NOT LESS THAN THAT REQUIRED BY THE REFERENCED STEEL FRAMING AND INSTALLATION STANDARDS. 1. WIRE HANGERS: 48 INCHES 0.C. 2. CARRYING CHANNELS (MAIN RUNNERS): 48 INCHES 0.C. 3. FURRING CHANNELS (FURRING MEMBERS): 16 INCHES 0.C. SECTION 096429 - WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND DIVISION 01 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS SECTION. 1.02 SUMMARY A. SECTION INCLUDES INSTALLATION OF SHOP FINISHED PRE-ENGINEERED WOOD STRIP FLOORING SYSTEM WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. ENGINEERED WOOD PLANK FLOORING IS OWNER FURNISHED, UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. SLAB MOISTURE TEST RESULTS, NO OTHER SUBMITTALS SHALL BE REQUIRED. B. NO SUBSTITUTIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSTALLATION METHOD 1. FOR MAPEI ADHESIVE INSTALLATION METHOD: ALL INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION MATERIALS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED T0; ADHESIVES, MOISTURE MITIGATION, CRACK REPAIR, FILLING, AND LEVELING, SHALL BE PROVIDED FROM A SINGLE MANUFACTURER: MAPEI AMERICAS U.S.A.1144 E. NEWPORT CENTER ROAD, DEERFIELD BEACH, FL 33442. CONTACT: MIKE GRANATOWSKI (949) 212-2363, MGRANATOWSKI@MAPEI.COM. CONTACT MAPEI REPRESENTATIVE TO COMPLY WITH NATIONAL ACCOUNT WARRANTY PROGRAM. MAPEI WILL COORDINATE WHEN THEIR REPRESENTATIVE WILL VISIT THE SITE TO CONFIRM CONDITIONS AND PREPARATIONS MEET CONDITIONS OF THEIR WARRANTY. 2. FOR BOSTIK ADHESIVE INSTALLATION METHOD: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR APPLICATION AND SURFACE PREP, USING MAPEI OR LATICRETE PRODUCTS AS SPECIFIED IN SECTIONS 3. FOR PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR INSTALLATION METHOD: ALL INSTALLATION AND PREPARATION MATERIALS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED T0; PLYWOOD, FASTENERS, MOISTURE MITIGATION, SHALL COMPLY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF PLANK MANUFACTURER AND NWFA RECOMMENDATIONS. B. WHICH INSTALLATION METHOD IS USED IS PRIMARILY DETERMINED BY PROJECT SLAB CONDITIONS AS DETERMINED IN PARAGRAPHS: 1.07 AND 3.01, OF THIS SECTION AND APPROVED BY LSD*C PM. C. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: WOOD PLANK FLOORING INSTALLER, SPECIALIZING IN INSTALLATION OF PRE-ENGINEERED PLANK FLOORING SYSTEMS WITH MINIMUM FIVE (5) YEARS DOCUMENTED EXPERIENCE WITH INSTALLATIONS OF SIMILAR SCOPE, MATERIALS AND DESIGN. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. SEE SECTION 016000_SECT ION_016000_- 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. COORDINATE INSTALLATION OF WOOD PLANK WORK WITH RELATED WORK. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. TEMPERATURE REQUIREMENTS FOR WOOD PLANK FLOORING: 1. ROOM TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY OF INSTALLATION AREA SHOULD BE CONSISTENT WITH NORMAL, YEAR ROUND CONDITIONS FOR AT LEAST A WEEK BEFORE INSTALLATION. ROOM TEMPERATURE OF 60 TO 70 DEGREES F AND HUMIDITY RANGE OF 40% TO 60%. 2. PROVIDE VENTILATION AND PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT AS RECOMMENDED BY MFG. I5. MOISTURE REQUIREMENTS FOR WOOD PLANK FLOORING: 1. PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TEST TO DETERMINE MOISTURE LEVEL OF SUBSTRATE. THE TEST RESULTS SHALL BE PROVIDED TO THE LSD*C PM IMMEDIATELY AFTER DEMOLITION, PRIOR TO SUB FLOOR PREPARATION AND AT LEAST 1 WEEK PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. a. G.G. TO PERFORM MOISTURE TEST ON ALL FLOORS AS DIRECTED BY NWFA. MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD SUB -FLOOR MUST NOT EXCEED 12% AND CONCRETE MOISTURE CONTENT MUST NOT EXCEED 15 LBS. OF MVER PER 1000 SF PER 24 HOURS (ASTM 1869) b. IF MOISTURE CONTENT EXCEEDS LIMITS OF 1.A ABOVE, MOISTURE MITIGATION IS REQUIRED. SEE APPROPRIATE PARAGRAPHS FOR MITIGATION METHODS FOR GLUE DOWN OR PLYWOOD SUB -FLOOR INSTALLATION METHOD. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NATIONAL ACCOUNTS A. THE MAPEI PRODUCTS LISTED THROUGHOUT THIS SPECIFICATION SHALL BE PURCHASED BY THE GC THROUGH THE FOLLOWING NATIONAL ACCOUNT, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED: 1. MAPEI: 914.665.0654 PLACE ORDER AS A VICTORIA'S SECRET OR PINK STORE. MATERIAL WILL BE PROVIDED FROM THE NEAREST MAPEI DISTRIBUTION CENTER. B. ALL OTHER PRODUCTS LISTED WHICH ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GC SHALL BE PURCHASED THROUGH LOCAL RESOURCES. 2.02 WOOD STRIP AND PLANK FLOORING: A. PRE -FINISHED, ENGINEERED WOOD PLANK FLOORING SUPPLIED BY LSD4C VENDOR AS SPECIFIED IN THE FINISH SCHEDULE AND PLANS. 2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION - GLUE DOWN METHODS: A. MOISTURE MITIGATION - MAPEI: 1. A MOISTURE MITIGATION BARRIER SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN THE SUBSTRATE MOISTURE CONTENT EXCEEDS THE ALLOWABLE LIMITS PER SECTION 1.07.5 OF 11H15 SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE GLUE DOWN METHOD WILL BE USED. 2. IF MOISTURE MITIGATION IS REQUIRED, THE CONCRETE SUBSTRATE MUST BE PREPARED BY SHOT-BLASTING TO ACHIEVE A SURFACE PROFILE BETWEEN CSP -3 AND CSP -6 AS PER ICRI STANDARDS PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MOISTURE MITIGATION. 3. MANUFACTURER: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT: a. MAPEI CORP: PLANISEAL VS FAST 4. A BONDING AGENT SHALL BE PROVIDED PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ANY SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENT ONLY WHEN A MOISTURE MITIGATION BARRIER IS REQUIRED. 5. MANUFACTURER: SUBJECT TO COMPLIANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS, PROVIDE FOLLOWING PRODUCT: a: MAPEI CORP: ECO PRIM GRIP (APPLIED OVER PLANISEAL VS FAST) B. MOISTURE MITIGATION - BOSTIK: 1. A MOISTURE MITIGATION BARRIER SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN THE SUBSTRATE MOISTURE CONTENT EXCEEDS THE ALLOWABLE LIMITS PER SECTION 1.07.3 OF THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION 2. REFER TO SECTION 071416- LATICRETE PRODUCTS. C. LARGE FILL AREAS AND LEVELING 1. REFER TO SECTION 039250. D. PATCHING, RAMPING, AND SMALL FILL AREAS: 1. REFER TO SECTION 039250. 2.04 SURFACE PREPARATION - PLYWOOD SUB -FLOOR METHOD. A. COMPLY WITH WOOD STRIP FLOORING MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS FOR APPLYING THEIR PRODUCT OVER PLYWOOD SUB -FLOORS. B. MOISTURE MITIGATION 1. A MOISTURE MITIGATION BARRIER SHALL BE PROVIDED WHEN THE SUBSTRATE MOISTURE CONTENT EXCEEDS THE ALLOWABLE LIMITS PER SECTION 1.07.5 OF THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION AND THE PLYWOOD SUB -FLOOR METHOD WILL BE USED. 2. IF MOISTURE MITIGATION IS REQUIRED, CLASS I, II, OR III MOISTURE BARRIERS SHALL BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED, AS INDICATED BY MOISTURE TEST RESULTS AND NWFA RECOMMENDATIONS. IN MOST CASES, SEAM -TAPED 6 MIL ©VISQUEEN" IS SUFFICIENT. C. LARGE FILL AREAS AND LEVELING 1. REFER TO SECTION 039250 AND CONFIRM EXTENT WITH LSD*C PM. D. PATCHING, RAMPING, AND SMALL FILL AREAS 1. USUALLY NOT REQUIRED WITH PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR. E. PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR: 5/8" CDX PLYWOOD INSTALLED PER NWFA RECOMMENDATIONS (PREFERRED CASE-HARDENED PIN NAILS AT RECOMMENDED SPACING AND SLAB PENETRATION) 2.05 ADHESIVE: A. MAPEI ULTRABOND ECO 995 OR BOSTIK ULTRA -SET SINGLESTEP. INSTRUCTIONS; APPLY TO WALLS, COLUMNS, PILASTERS, CASEWORK, AND OTI-IER PERMANENT FIXTURES IN ROOMS AND AREAS WHERE BASE 15 REQUIRED. 1. MITER INTERNAL CORNERS; USE PREMOLDED SECTIONS FOR EXTERNAL CORNERS AND EXPOSED ENDS; SCRIBE AND FIT TO DOOR FRAMES AND OTHER OBSTRUCTIONS. N. CLEANING: CLEAN, SEAL AND WAX FLOOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. SEE SECTION 013000 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. SEE SECTION 016000 2.06 DIVIDER STRIPS: A. PROVIDE WHERE FLOORING TERMINATES WITH TILE OR OTHER FLOOR FINISHES. 1. DIVIDER STRIPS MANUFACTURER: MANHATTAN AMERICAN TERRAllO STRIP COMPANY, PO BOX 72433 OLD 421 ROAD, STALEY, NORTH CAROLINA, 27355: (336) 622-4247. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. EXAMINE SURFACES INDICATED TO RECEIVE WOOD PLANK FLOORING, WITH INSTALLER PRESENT, FOR COMPLIANCE WITH. REQUIREMENTS AND OTHER CONDITIONS AFFECTING PERFORMANCE. VERIFY THAT SURFACES TO BE COVERED ARE: 1. SOUND, RIGID AND CONFORM TO GOOD DESIGN/ENGINEERING PRACTICES. 2. WITH MAXIMUM DEFLECTION UNDER ALL LIVE, DEAD AND IMPACT LOADS, INCLUDING CONCENTRATED LOADS, OF L/360. 3. CLEAN AND FREE OF DUST, DIRT, OIL, GREASE, SEALERS, CURING COMPOUNDS, LAITANCE, EFFLORESCENCE, FORM OIL OR LOOSE PLASTER, PAINT AND SCALE. 4. LEVEL AND TRUE. 5. NOT LEVELED WITH GYPSUM OR ASPHALT BASED COMPOUNDS. 6. TEST SLAB FOR MOISTURE LIMITATIONS AS PER SECTION 1.07.5. OF THIS SPECIFICATION SECTION. 5. CONCRETE SURFACES SHALL BE: 1. CURED MIN. OF 28 DAYS AT 70"F (21*C). 2. WOOD FLOAT FINISHED, OR BETTER CONFORMING TO CSP -3 AS PER ICRI STANDARDS. 3. ADVISE LSD$C PROJECT MANAGER OF ANY SURFACE OR SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS REQUIRING CORRECTION BEFORE WORK COMMENCES. BEGINNING OF WORK CONSTITUTES ACCEPTANCE OF SUBSTRATE OR SURFACE CONDITIONS. C. PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION ONLY AFTER UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED. 3.02 PREPARATION A. VACUUM CLEAN OR SWEEP SUBSTRATES TO REMOVE DIRT, DUST, DEBRIS, AND LOOSE PARTICLES. B. REMOVE SUBSTANCES FROM CONCRETE SUBSTRATES THAT COULD IMPAIR SETTING BOND, INCLUDING CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS, FORM OIL, AND LAITANCE. C. SHOT -BLAST SUBSTRATE WHEN REQUIRED PER SECTION 2.03 OF THIS SPECIFICATION; COORDINATE SHOT BLAST REQUIREMENTS WITH SECTION 039250 CONCRETE RESURFACING WHEN REQUIRED AS PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION OF SELF -LEVELING UNDERLAYMENTS. D. PROFILE SUBSTRATE PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATION AS NOTATED IN APPLICABLE DATASHEETS AND WARRANTIES. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH NWFA RECOMMENDATIONS, AND WOOD PLANK FLOORING MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. B. SUBSTRATE REQUIREMENTS: 1. FLOOR SURFACES: CONCRETE OR PLYWOOD SUB -FLOOR AS INDICATED BY CHOSEN METHOD. 2. PLATFORM SURFACES: CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD C. G. C. TO STORE FLOORING AT INSTALLATION SITE FOR A MINIMUM OF 72 HOURS BEFORE INSTALLATION TO ALLOW FLOORING TO ADJUST TO ROOM TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY. DO STORE DIRECTLY ON CONCRETE OR NEAR OUTSIDE WALLS. GC TO PERFORM MOISTURE TEST TO ENSURE WOOD IS ACCLIMATED. D. INSTALL WOOD PLANK FLOORING IN ACCORDANCE WITH PATTERNS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS; CAREFULLY PLAN LAYOUTS, ENSURE PATTERN IS UNINTERRUPTED FROM ONE SURFACE TO THE NEXT AND THROUGH DOORWAYS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. E. PROVIDE MIN W EXPANSION SPACE BETWEEN FLOORING AND ALL WALLS AND VERTICAL OBJECTS. 114I5 GAP IS TO BE COMPLETELY OBSCURED BY TRIM OR BASE. F. ENSURE JOINTS OF WOOD FLOORING ARE IN LINE - ENSURE FULL CONTACT TO ADHESIVE OR PLYWOOD, AS APPROPRIATE. G. STAGGER RANDOM LENGTHS OF FLANK 50 THAT BOARD ENDS ARE A MINIMUM OF 8f1 FROM ENDS OF ADJACENT PLANKS. MAXIMIZE USE OF LONG PLANKS IN CENTER OF SALES AREA. USE 514ORTER BOARDS UNDER CASHWRAP LOCATION AND OTHER SMALLER AREAS. AVOID REPEATED STAGGERING PATTERNS. H. ALL BOARDS THAT ARE CUT TO HAND BEVELED OR "DRAGGED" AND COLORED TO MATCH ADJACENT BOARDS USING BLEED KIT SUPPLIED WITH THE FLOORING. 1. BOARDS THAT MEET PERPENDICULAR OR AT ANY OTHER ANGLE ARE TO BE TONGUE AND GROOVED TOGETHER TO PREVENT JOINT SEPARATION. J. PROVIDE MAXIMUM 1:12 SLOPE WHERE FINISHED FLOOR SURFACE CHANGES LEVEL BETWEEN WOOD FLOORING AND ADJACENT FLOORING. K. ADHESIVE METHOD ONLY: 1. AFTER APPLICABLE MOISTURE MITIGATION AND ADDITIONAL FLOOR PREP, IF REQUIRED, APPLY MAPEI ULTRABOND ECO 995 ADHESIVE WITH CLIP -ON TROWEL ATTACHMENT PROVIDED WITH ADHESIVE (USE A FRESH ATTACHMENT WITH EACH BUCKET- DO NOT REUSE) OR BOSTIK ULTRA -SET SINGLESTEP PER MFR'S RECOMMENDATIONS. KEY ADHESIVE TO FLOOR SURFACE AND STRIKE TROWEL RIDGES PERPENDICULAR TO PLANK DIRECTION, MAINTAINING TROWEL AT 60 - 90 DEGREES TO FLOOR. 2. UTILIZE ADHESIVE MFR'S PROVIDED OPEN TACK TIME CHARTS. 3. ROLL AND WEIGHT FLOORING INSTALLATION PER MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS, TO ENSURE FULL CONTACT WITH SUBSTRATE. AVOID FOOT TRAFFIC AFTER INSTALLATION FOR AT LEAST 24 HOURS. L. PLYWOOD SUBFLOOR METHOD ONLY: 1. PROVIDE 15# FELT PAPER PER MFR'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 2. TOE -NAIL PLANK FLOORING INTO PLYWOOD WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED FASTENERS AT RECOMMENDED SPACING. 3.04 PROTECTION A. COVER INSTALLED WOOD PLANK FLOORING AFTER INSTALLATION WITH ROSIN PAPER OR OTHER APPROVED METHOD TO PROTECT FINISHED SURFACE DURING BALANCE OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT. SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SECTION 0%800 - CARPETING A. GENERAL: INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED CARPET; PROVIDE CARPET ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. B. STANDARDS: COMPLY WITH CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI) STANDARDS. 1. FLAMMABILITY: 0.45 WATTS/SQ.CM. OR HIGHER, ASTM E648. C. SUBMITTALS: SEE SECTION 013000 D. INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS: APPROVED BY CARPET MANUFACTURER; UPON REQUEST, SUBMIT LETTER FROM CARPET MANUFACTURER STATING INSTALLER IS ACCEPTABLE. E. OWNER FURNISHED UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. F. ADHESIVE: NONTOXIC TYPE RECOMMENDED BY CARPET AND UNDERLAY MANUFACTURERS TO SUIT APPLICATION AND EXPECTED SERVICE. G. CONCRETE PREPARATION: REFER TO SECTION 039250 H. EDGE STRIPS: VINYL OR RUBBER; MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD COLORS AS SELECTED. INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS I. PREPARATION: CLEAN FLOORS OF DUST, DIRT, SOLVENTS, OIL, GREASE, PAINT, PLASTER AND OTHER SUBSTANCES DETRIMENTAL TO PROPER PERFORMANCE OF ADHESIVE AND CARPET; ALLOW FLOORS TO THOROUGHLY DRY. 1. USE LEVELING AND RAMPING MATERIAL TO PATCH CRACKS, SMALL HOLES, LEVELING AND FOR RAMPING TO PROVIDE FINISHED CARPET WITHIN 1/2" OF ADJACENT FLOORING MATERIALS. J. CARPET INSTALLATION: INSTALL CARPET IN ACCORDANCE WITH CARPET MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 1. PRIME SUBSTRATE IF REQUIRED AND AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER; SPREAD ADHESIVE IN QUANTITY RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER TO ENSURE PROPER ADHESION OVER FULL AREA OF INSTALLATION. 2. APPLY ONLY ENOUGH ADHESIVE FOR PROPER ADHESION OF CARPET BEFORE INITIAL SET. K. CARPET SI -MELDS: G.C. TO PROVIDE CARPET SHIELD TO PROTECT CARPET IMMEDIATELY AFTER CARPET INSTALLATION: SURFACE SHIELD INC., (800) 754-9685 SECTION 097216 - VINYL -COATED FABRIC WALL COVERINGS A. GENERAL: VINYL COATED FABRIC WALLCOVER I NGS ARE PROVIDED TO SITE BY OWNER. PROVIDE ADHESIVES AND ACCESSORIES FOR A COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. B. SUBMITTALS: SEE SECTION 013000. C. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: SEE SECTION 017000. D. MANUFACTURERS: AS INDICATED ON FINISH SCHEDULE. E. TYPES: AS INDICATED ON FINISH SCHEDULE. F. ADHESIVE FOR APPLICATION OVER GLOSSY SURFACES: VINYL OVER VINYL (VOV) 1. MANUFACTURERS: ROMAN DECORATING PRODUCTS, PRO -555 ADHESIVE (WWW .ROMANDECORAT I NGPRODUCTS.COM, TEL: 708-891-0770) OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2. ADHESIVE SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: a. ADHESIVE TYPE: MODIFIED STARCH AND SYNTHETIC BASED POLYMER b. PERCENT SOLIDS: APPROXIMATELY 59 PERCENT c. VISCOSITY: APPROXIMATELY 17,000CPS. d. VOC: LESS THAN 15 G/L (GRAMS PER LITER); LOW VOC, LEED, CHPS COMPLIANT. e. COVERAGE: 160 SQUARE FEET PER GALLON. F. COVERING COMPATIBILITY: SUITABLE FOR COVERING BY NON -PERMEABLE WALL COVERINGS G ADHESIVE FOR REGULAR APPLICATION: 1. MANUFACTURERS: ROMAN DECORATING PRODUCTS, HEAVY DUTY CLEAR PRO -838 ADHESIVE (WWW.ROMANDECORATINGPRODUCTS.COM, TEL: 708-891-0770), OR ZINSSER, SURE GRIP -122 HEAVY DUTY CLEAR ADHESIVE. 2. ADHESIVE SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA: a. ADHESIVE TYPE: MODIFIED STARCH b. PERCENT SOLIDS: APPROXIMATELY 21 PERCENT c. VISCOSITY: APPROXIMATELY 29, 000CPS. d. VOC: LESS THAN 25 G/L (GRAMS PER LITER) e. COVERAGE: 280 SQUARE FEET PER GALLON. f. SUBSTRATE COMPATIBILITY: SUITABLE FOR INSTALLATION OVER ROMAN PRO -935 PRIMER COVERING COMPATIBILITY: SUITABLE FOR COVERING BY NON -PERMEABLE WALL COVERINGS H. PROVIDE PRIMER WHICH ALLOWS REMOVAL OF WALL COVERING FROM GYPSUM BOARD WITHOUT DAMAGING PAPER FACING OF BOARD, AND WITHOUT PREMATURE SEPARATION OF WALL COVERING FROM WALL. PRIMER TO BE NON -STAINING AND NON-TOXIC, AS RECOMMENDED BY WALL COVERING MANUFACTURER. NO PRIMER NEEDED WHEN INSTALLING VINYL OVER VINYL (VOV). I. EXAMINATION: ENSURE SURFACES TO RECEIVE WALL COVERING ARE CLEAN, TRUE AND FREE OF IRREGULARITIES, DO NOT COMMENCE WITH WORK UNTIL SURFACES ARE SATISFACTORY. ENSURE WALL SURFACE FLATNESS TOLERANCE DOES NOT VARY MORE THAN 1/8" IN 10'- 0 , NOR VARY AT A RATE GREATER THAN 1/16" PER RUNNING FOOT. J. PREPARATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS; FILL NICKS, GOUGES AND OTHER MINOR IMPERFECTIONS OF SUBSTRATES WITH LATEX FILLER; SAND SMOOTH, FLUSH WITH SURFACE; APPLY PRIME COAT IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. K. ADHESIVE APPLICATION: STRICTLY COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION RECOMMENDATIONS INCLUDING THE FOLLOWING: 1. APPLY WHEN ROOM TEMPERATURE IS ABOVE 50 DEGREES F. 2. DILUTION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 3. APPLY ONE EVEN, THIN COAT OF ADHESIVE WITH A BRUSH OR ROLLER, FREE FROM RIDGES. 4. REMOVE EXCESS ADHESIVE WITH CLEAN WATER BEFORE ADHESIVE IS DRY. 5. IF EXCESS ADHESIVE HAS BEEN ALLOWED TO DRY: USE ROMANS PIRANHA CONCENTRATE REMOVAL LIQUID, APPLIED PER MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS. L. WALLCOVERING APPLICATION: HANDLE AND APPLY WALL COVERING IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS; MIX AND APPLY ADHESIVE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ADHESIVE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. 1. USE PANELS IN EXACT ORDER AS CUT FROM ROLLS; USE ROLLS IN CONSECUTIVE ORDER AS NUMBERED BY MANUFACTURER. 2. HORIZONTAL SEAMS AND CUTTING AT CORNERS ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE; CUT NO CLOSER THAN 2" OF AN INSIDE CORNER, AND NOT CLOSER THAN 6" OF AN OUTSIDE CORNER. 3. FILL SPACES ABOVE * BELOW WINDOWS, DOORS, AND SIM. AREAS IN SEQUENCE FROM ROLL. 4. INSTALL IN PATTERN AS PROVIDED BY MANUFACTURER OR AS INDICATED IN DRAWINGS. A. GENERAL: PROVIDE RESILIENT TILE FLOORING SYSTEM AND RESILIENT BASE, WITH ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. B. SUBMITTALS: SEE SECTION 013000 C. PROJECT CONDITIONS: ENSURE FLOOR SURFACES ARE SMOOTH AND FLAT WITH MAXIMUM VARIATION OF 1/8" IN 10'-0"; ENSURE CONCRETE FLOORS ARE DRY AND EXHIBIT NEGATIVE ALKALINITY, CARBONIZING AND DUSTING. D. RESILIENT TILE: 12" BY 12" BY 1/8" THICK; VINYL COMPOSITION TILE CONFORMING TO ASTM F1066, COMPOSITION 1; COLOR AND PATTERN AS INDICATED, AS SELECTED BY ARCHITECT FROM MANUFACTURER'S FULL RANGE OF COLORS AND PATTERNS WHERE NOT OTHERWISE INDICATED. 1. MANUFACTURERS: ARMSTRONG WORLD INDUSTRIES (1.800.442.4212), INC.; AZROCK INDUSTRIES, INC.; TARKETT INC. (1.800.877.8453), OR APPROVED EQUAL. 2. FLAMMABILITY: PROVIDE MATERIALS TESTED UNDER ASTM E648, FLOORING RADIANT PANEL TEST, WITH RESULTS OF 0.45 WATTS/CM2 OR HIGHER 3. SLIP RESISTANCE: PROVIDE MATERIALS TESTED UNDER ASTM D2047, JAMES SLIP TEST WITH MINIMUM 0.6 RATING FOR FLOORS. E. RESILIENT BASE: FS SS -W-40, 1/8" GAGE COVED BASE AT HARD FLOOR SURFACES, STRAIGHT (TOP SET) BASE AT CARPET; PROVIDE MOLDED END STOPS AND EXTERNAL CORNERS. 1. MANUFACTURERS: ARMSTRONG (1.800.442.4212), AZROCK, OR TARKETT, VINYL BASE. (1.800.877.8453) 2. HEIGHT: 4" UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED. 3. COLOR: AS INDICATED ON FINISH SCHEDULE. F. EDGE STRIPS AND ACCESSORIES: RUBBER OR VINYL EDGE STRIPS MATCHING RESILIENT FLOORING; LATEX -MODIFIED PORTLAND CEMENT BASED UNDERLAYMENT AND PATCHING COMPOUND; NONTOXIC WATER RESISTANT TYPE ADHESIVES. INSTALL WHERE EDGE OF TILE WOULD OTHERWISE BE EXPOSED; BUTT TO FLOORING WITHOUT GAPS; SET IN ADHESIVE G. CONCRETE PREPARATION: REFER TO SECTION 039250 H. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE: REFER TO SECTION 071416 I. PRIMERS AND ADHESIVES: WATERPROOF NONTOXIC TYPES AS RECOMMENDED BY FLOOR IN INSTALL MINIMUM 1/2 TILE AT ROOM AND AREA PERIMETER; TERMINATE RESILIENT FLOORING AT CENTERLINE OF DOOR OPENINGS WHERE ADJACENT FLOOR FINISH 15 DISSIMILAR; INSTALL EDGE STRIPS AT UNPROTECTED AND EXPOSED EDGES WHERE FLOORING TERMINATES. J. SEALER AND WAX: TYPE RECOMMENDED BY FLOORING MANUFACTURER FOR MATERIAL TYPE AND LOCATION. K. PREPARATION: CONFORM TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PREPARATION AND WITH ASTM F7I0; REMOVE SUBFLOOR RIDGES AND BUMPS; FILL LOW SPOTS, CRACKS, JOINTS, HOLES AND DEFECTS WITH SUBFLOOR FILLER. L. FLOORING INSTALLATION: CONFORM TO MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS; SET FLOORING IN PLACE, PRESS WITH HEAVY ROLLER TO ENSURE FULL ADHESION; SCRIBE FLOORING TO WALLS, COLUMNS, AND OTHER APPURTENANCES, TO PRODUCE TIGHT JOINTS. 1. INSTALL MINIMUM 1/2 TILE AT ROOM AND AREA PERIMETER; TERMINATE RESILIENT FLOORING AT CENTERLINE OF DOOR OPENINGS WHERE ADJACENT FLOOR FINISH IS DISSIMILAR; INSTALL EDGE STRIPS AT UNPROTECTED AND EXPOSED EDGES WHERE FLOORING TERMINATES. M. BASE INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION 9• SECTION 097216.16 - RIGID -SHEET VINYL WALL COVERINGS (F.R.P. PANELS) 1.05 LIMITATIONS A. DO NOT USE UNFACED INSULATION IN EXPOSED APPLICATIONS WHERE THERE 15 POTENTIAL FOR SKIN CONTACT AND IRRITATION. B. KRAFT FACINGS WILL BURN AND MUST NOT BE LEFT EXPOSED. THE FACING MUST BE IN SUBSTANTIAL CONTACT WITH THE UNEXPOSED SURFACE OF THE CEILING, WALL OR FLOOR FINISH. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. OWENS CORNING 2.02 QUIETZONE ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION A. TYPE I: UNFACED GLASS FIBER INSULATION COMPLYING WITH ASTM C 665 AND ASTM E 136. B. TYPE II: KRAFT FACED GLASS FIBER INSULATION COMPLYING WITH ASTM C 665. C. SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS 1. UNFACED INSULATION a. MAXIMUM FLAME SPREAD: 10 b. MAXIMUM SMOKE DEVELOPED:10 2. KRAFT FACED INSULATION a. MAXIMUM FLAME SPREAD: NOT RATED b. MAXIMUM SMOKE DEVELOPED: NOT RATED D. COMBUSTION CHARACTERISTICS: UNFACED INSULATION PASSES ASTM E 136 TEST. E. DIMENSIONAL STABILITY: LINEAR STABILITY LESS THAN 0.1%. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. EXAMINE THE AREAS AND CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH WORK OF THIS SECTION WILL BE INSTALLED. VERIFY THAT ADJACENT MATERIALS ARE DRY AND READY. VERIFY THAT ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SERVICES WITHIN WALLS HAVE BEEN INSPECTED AND TESTED. VERIFY THAT PROJECT DRAWINGS COMPLY W 111 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. B. PROVIDE WRITTEN REPORT LISTING CONDITIONS DETRIMENTAL TO THE PERFORMANCE OF WORK IN 11415 SECTION. DO NOT PROCEED WITH INSTALLATION UNTIL UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN RESOLVED. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICULAR CONDITIONS OF INSTALLATION IN EACH CASE. B. BETWEEN METAL STUDS: FRICTION -FIT UNFACED INSULATION BETWEEN STUDS AFTER COVER MATERIAL HAS BEEN INSTALLED ON ONE SIDE OF THE CAVITY. WHEN FACED INSULATION IS USED, ATTACH FLANGES TO FACE OR SIDE (PREFERRED) OF STUD EVERY 8 TO 12 INCHES TO HOLD IN PLACE. C. 1. PLACE ACOUSTICAL INSULATION TIGHT WITHIN SPACES, AROUND CUT OPENINGS, BEHIND AND AROUND ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ITEMS WITHIN PARTITIONS, AND TIGHT TO ITEMS PASSING THROUGH PARTITIONS. ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES: PLACE ACOUSTICAL SEALANT WITHIN PARTITIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS; INSTALL ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT GYPSUM BOARD PERIMETER, AT BASE LAYER AND FACE LAYER OF GYPSUM BOARD, AND PENETRATIONS OF PARTITIONS. 2. TOLERANCE: MAXIMUM 1/4" SPACE BETWEEN GYPSUM BOARD AT FLOOR, CEILING AND PENETRATIONS. 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BOX PADS WITH PADS MOLDED AND PRESSED ON BACK SIDE OF BOX, CLOSING OPENINGS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, FOR COMPLETE ACOUSTICAL BARRIER. 3.03 INSTALLATION- VAPOR RETARDER A. THIS INSULATION IS FOR INTERIOR WALL USE ONLY. B. THE KRAFT PAPER FOR THIS PRODUCT IS NOT A VAPOR RETARDER. C. NOT RECOMMENDED FOR EXTERIOR WALLS. WASHING AND SCRAPING, USING CARE NOT TO SCRATCH OR DAMAGE FINISHED SURFACES. S. AT COMPLETION OF WORK OF OTHER TRADES, TOUCH-UP AND RESTORE DAMAGED SURFACES OR DEFACED PAINTED SURFACES DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 102613 - CORNER GUARDS A. GENERAL: INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL * CLEAR CORNER GUARDS WITH ATTACHMENT DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. 5. MANUFACTURERS: 1. STAINLESS STEEL GUARD: SEE SHEET A13.1. 2. CLEAR CORNER GUARD: OUTWATER PLASTIC INDUSTRIES INC. #CG -17-8 (1.800.631.8375) C. STAINLESS STEEL UNITS WITH SATIN FINISH, 1-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 48" HIGH CORNER GUARDS; MINIMUM 18 GAGE. PAINT GRIP FINISH AT SALES FLOOR. D. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS. SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES A. GENERAL: PROVIDE TOILET ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. 5. CODES AND REGULATIONS: COMPLY WITH STATE AND FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ENSURING ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES. C. MANUFACTURERS: AS INDICATED ON DRAWING A13.X D. ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED ON DRAWING A13.X; PROVIDE GRAB BARS WITH CONCEALED MOUNTING, SIZES AND SHAPES AS INDICATED AND AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS. E. MATERIALS: STAINLESS STEEL, ASTM A666, COMMERCIAL GRADE, TYPE 302/304, NUMBER 4 SATIN FINISH, SATIN CHROME ACCEPTABLE WHERE STAINLESS STEEL IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR ACCESSORY ITEM SCHEDULED; GAGES AS STANDARD WITH MANUFACTURER OF SPECIFIED ITEMS 1. FASTENERS, SCREWS, AND BOLTS: HOT DIP GALVANIZED; AS RECOMMENDED BY ACCESSORY MANUFACTURER FOR COMPONENT AND SUBSTRATE. 3.04 MATERIAL STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. PROTECT INSULATION FROM DAMAGE AND GETTING WET BEFORE, DURING AND AFTER INSTALLATION 2. CONCEALED SURFACES: PRETREAT AND CLEAN, SPRAY APPLY ONE COAT PRIMER AND BAKED ENAMEL FINISH. F. EQUIPMENT: AS INDICATED ON DRAWING A13.X 1. GRAB BARS: STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 304 TO MEET REQUIREMENTS OF ASTM #F446-85. G. FABRICATION: WELD AND GRIND SMOOTH JOINTS OF FABRICATED COMPONENTS; FORM EXPOSED SURFACES FROM ONE 51-IEET OF STOCK, FREE OF JOINTS. 1. FABRICATE UNITS WITH TIGHT SEAMS AND JOINTS, EXPOSED EDGES ROLLED; HANG DOORS AND ACCESS PANELS WITH CONTINUOUS PIANO HINGES; PROVIDE CONCEALED ANCHORAGE WHERE POSSIBLE. 2. PROVIDE STEEL ANCHOR PLATES AND ANCHOR COMPONENTS FOR INSTALLATION. 3. FORM SURFACES FLAT WITHOUT DISTORTION; MAINTAIN FLAT SURFACES WITHOUT SCRATCHES AND WITHOUT DENTS; FINISH EXPOSED EDGES EASED, FREE OF SHARP EDGES WHERE POTENTIAL EXISTS FOR PHYSICAL CONTACT. 4. HOT DIP GALVANIZE FERROUS METAL ANC140R5 AND FASTENING DEVICES. 5. SHOP ASSEMBLE COMPONENTS; PACKAGE COMPLETE WITH ANCHORS AND FITTINGS. H. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS. SECTION 099000 - PAINTING AND COATING A. GENERAL: PROVIDE PAINTING OF EXPOSED ITEMS AND SURFAC1=s NOT PREFINISHED, AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. B. SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED: PREFINISHED ITEMS; CONCEALED AND INACCESSIBLE AREAS, CODE -REQUIRED LABELS. C. STANDARDS: PROVIDE MATERIALS APPROVED FOR USE BY APPLICABLE AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT FOR LIMITATIONS OF VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS FOR ARCHITECTURAL D. SUBMITTALS: SEE SECTION 013000. (NONE REQUIRED WITH CUSTOMER CARE). E. DELIVERY: SEE SECTION 016000. PLEASE CONTACT BENJAMIN MOORE CUSTOMER CARE BEFORE THE PROJECT BEGINS TO ENSURE ADEQUATE TIME FOR ACCOUNT SET UP AND ORDER FULFILLMENT. F. THIS IS A 'CLOSED' BENJAMIN MOORE PAINT ONLY SPECIFICATION. NO SUBSTITUTES ARE ALLOWED. FOR BID PRICING AND TO ORDER PLEASE CONTACT: (ORDERS WILL BE FULFILLED BY A LOCAL BENJAMIN MOORE RETAILER). A. GENERAL: PROVIDE PREF INISHED GLASS FIBER REINFORCED POLYESTER RESIN FABRICATED WALL PANELS, WITH TRIM PIECES AND ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. B. PANELS: FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANEL SYSTEM; NOMINAL 0.090" THICKNESS; WHITE; EMBOSSED FINISH. 1. FIRE -RATING: CLASS I (UL CLASS A), MAXIMUM 25 FLAME SPREAD, 450 SMOKE DENSITY BASED ON ASTM E84 INSTALLATION. C. TRIM PIECES: MANUFACTURER'S STANDARD MATCHING MOLDINGS AND TRIM PIECES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE, FINISHED INSTALLATION, AND AS REQUIRED FOR JOINTS, CORNERS AND PANEL EDGES. D. ADHESIVE: MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED NONTOXIC, WATERPROOF ADHESIVE SUITABLE FOR SUBSTRATES INDICATED. E. PRIMER; PROVIDE NON -STAINING RELEASE COAT PRIMER AS RECOMMENDED BY WALL PANEL MANUFACTURER WHERE PANELS ARE APPLIED TO GYPSUM BOARD. F. MECHANICAL FASTENERS: CONCEALED TYPE ONLY; TYPES AS RECOMMENDED BY SYSTEM MANUFACTURER. G. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE RATINGS. COPE AND MITER TRIM PIECES. INSTALL PANELS IN MAXIMUM SIZE INCREMENTS AVAI LABLE. 1. INSTALL WALL PANELING BEFORE INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING, BASES, HARDWARE, AND SIMILAR ACCESSORIES. 2. SECURELY ADHERE PANELS TO WALL SURFACES; USE BLIND NAILING METHODS AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT PANELS UNTIL ADHESIVE DRIES; EXPOSED MECHANICAL FASTENERS SHALL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE. -- H. CLEANING: REMOVE EXCESS ADHESIVE FROM EDGES; WIPE SEAM CLEAN WITH DRY CLOTH TOWEL. SECTION 098100 - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. GLASS FIBER ACOUSTICAL INSULATION FOR INTERIOR WALLS, FLOORS AND CEILINGS. 1.02 REFERENCES A. AMERICAN _SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIAL (ASTM) 1. E84 TEST METHOD FOR SURFACE BURNING CHARACTERISTICS 2. E90 LABORATORY MEASUREMENT OF AIRBORNE SOUND TRANSMISSION LOSS OF BUILDING PARTITIONS AND ELEMENTS 3. E96 TEST METHOD FOR WATER VAPOR TRANSMISSION OF MATERIALS 4. E136 TEST METHOD FOR BEHAVIOR OF MATERIALS IN A VERTICAL TUBE FURNACE AT 750 DEGREES F. (UNFACED) 5. C423 TEST METHOD FOR SOUND ABSORPTION AND THE SOUND ABSORPTION COEFFICIENT BY THE REVERBERATION ROOM METHOD 6. 0665 STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL FIBER BLANKET INSULATION FOR LIGHT FRAME CONSTRUCTION AND MANUFACTURED HOUSING BENJAMIN MOORE'S CUSTOMER CARE DEPARTMENT: CALL: 877-623-8484 FAX: 862-432-4362 EMAIL: CGP@BENJAMINMOORE.COM OFFICE HOURS: 7:00 AM -- 7:OOPM ET MICHAEL ECKE 201-783-7658 MICHAEL.ECKE@BENJAMINMOORE.COM LIZA MELAMED 201-949-6450 L IZA .M ELAMED@BENJAM I NMOORE.COM BETHANY WEINOW ITZ 973-252-2544 BETHANY MEI NOW ITZ@BENJAMINMOORE.COM SECTION 105100 - LOCKERS A. GENERAL: INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED METAL LOCKERS; PROVIDE ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION 5. INSTALLATION: INSTALL LOCKERS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS, SECURE, PLUMB, LEVEL, SQUARE, AND IN LINE. 1. BOLT ADJOINING LOCKER UNITS TOGETHER AND ATTACH TO THE WALL W/ 1/4" X 1" TEK SCREWS (TOP AND BOTTOM.) AT 24" 0.C. TO PROVIDE RIGID INSTALLATION. 2. INSTALL METAL BASES, END PANELS, AND FILLER PANELS TO CLOSE OFF OPENINGS AND AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. SECTION 105626 - MOBILE / FIXED STORAGE SHELVING A. GENERAL: INSTALL OWNER FURNISHED MOVABLE AND FIXED COMPACT STORAGE SYSTEM; PROVIDE ACCESSORIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. B. EXAMINATION: EXAMINE SUBSTRATES AND CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH COMPACTED STORAGE SYSTEM IS TO BE INSTALLED. DO NOT PROCEED WITH WORK UNTIL UNSATISFACTORY CONDITIONS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED. C. MANUFACTURER: PIPP MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEMS, INC. 2966 WILSON DRIVE NW, WALKER, MI (I .800 .234.P I PP) D. INSTALL UNITS AND ACCESSORIES AT LOCATIONS SHOWN IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS, LEVEL, PLUMB, SECURE AND AT PROPER HEIGHT. E. CLEANING: CLEAN UNITS AND REPAIR OR REPLACE DAMAGED UNITS AS DIRECTED BY LSD*C PROJECT MANAGER. TOUCH-UP MARRED FINISHES OR REPLACE COMPONENT PARTS AS NECESSARY TO ELIMINATE EVIDENCE OF DAMAGE OR DETERIORATION. F. PROTECTION: PROVIDE PROTECTION FOR INSTALLED SYSTEM TO ENSURE PERFECT OPERATING CONDITION WITHOUT DAMAGE AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. SHREMSHOCK Shremshock Architects, Inc. 7400 W. Campus Rd. Suite 150 New Albany, OH 43054 t: 614 545 4550 I f: 614 545 4555 I shremshock.com Gerald :. Shremshock, Architect Timot J. Shremshock, Architect z 0 U 1- z 0 U (9 cS z w C) w 0 M �t cal 2' Or - O r� E LL O V cv co a _N J a) 1E 0 F- F- O O N. O c a) J 07a CL W c3 0 a - W W CCa�00 - iWca. V1 G. MATERIALS QUALITY: PROVIDE ONLY THOSE PRODUCTS THAT ARE SPECIFIED. MANUFACTURER SUBSTITUTIONS OF ANY PAINT FINISH WILL NOT BE PERMITTED. H. COLORS AND FINISHES: FOLLOW SPECIFICATION AND FINISH SCHEDULE. COLORS ARE PROPRIETARY VICTORIA'S SECRET CUSTOM COLORS AND GLAZES. I. SCHEDULING PAINTING: APPLY FIRST COAT TO SURFACES THAT HAVE BEEN CLEANED, PRETREATED OR PREPARED FOR PAINTING AS SOON AS PRACTICABLE AFTER PREPARATION. J. PREPARATION: PERFORM PREPARATION ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURER'S TECHNICAL DATA SHEET AND CAN LABEL. 1. EXAMINE AREAS AND CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH PAINTING WORK IS TO BE APPLIED. START OF PAINTING WORK INDICATES ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACE CONDITIONS WITHIN ANY PARTICULAR AREA. 2. REMOVE HARDWARE, ACCESSORIES AND ITEMS IN PLACE AND NOT TO BE PAINTED, OR PROVIDE PROTECTION PRIOR TO SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING, AFTER PAINTING REINSTALL REMOVED ITEMS. K. PRIME COATS: FOR UNFINISHED, UNSEALED, POROUS SURFACES, HARD TO COAT SUBSTRATES, SURFACES THAT DISPLAY SIGNS OF 'FLASHING' AND UN -EVEN SHEEN PRIME WITH BENJAMIN MOORE'S 046 FRESH START HIGH HIDING ALL PURPOSE PRIMER. BARE DRYWALL OR AREAS WHERE PATCHING HAS OCCURRED SHOULD BE DUSTED LIBERALLY TO REMOVE DRYWALL DUST AND CONTAMINANTS BEFORE PAINTING AS IT MAY INTERFERE WITH STENCIL APPLICATION. AURA AND REGAL INTERIOR PAINTS DO NOT REQUIRE A PRIMER OVER MOST INTERIOR SURFACES. L. APPLICATION: APPLY PAINT ACCORDING TO THE PRODUCT TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS. USE APPLICATORS AND TECHNIQUES BEST SUITED FOR SUBSTRATE AND TYPE OF MATERIAL BEING APPLIED. 1. APPLY ADDITIONAL COATS WHEN STAINS OR BLEMISHES SHOW THROUGH FINAL COATS, UNTIL PAINT 15 A UNIFORM FINISH, COLOR AND APPEARANCE. 2. FINISH DOORS ON TOPS, BOTTOMS AND SIDE EDGES SAME AS FACES. 3. PROVIDE EXTRA ATTENTION TO ASSURE DRY FILM THICKNESS AT CORNERS AND CREVICES 15 EQUIVALENT TO THAT OF FLAT SURFACES. 4. PAINT SURFACES BEHIND MOVABLE EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE SAME AS SIMILAR EXPOSED SURFACES; PAINT SURFACES BEHIND PERMANENTLY -FIXED EQUIPMENT AND FURNITURE WITH PRIME COAT ONLY. M. MINIMUM COATING THICKNESS: APPLY MATERIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE PRODUCT TECHNICAL DATA SHEET PAYING SPECIAL ATTENTION TO DRY FILM THICKNESS (DFT). N. FINISH COATS: PROVIDE EVEN TEXTURE; LEAVE NO LAPS, IRREGULARITY IN TEXTURE, SKID MARKS, OR OTHER SURFACE IMPERFECTIONS. 0. PAINT SYSTEMS: PROVIDE MINIMUM OF TWO COATS. AURA AND REGAL INTERIOR PAINT LINES REQUIRE NO ADDITIONAL PRIMER AS THE PRIMER IS INCLUDED IN THE PAINT (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED). 1. MATERIAL AND SHEEN AS INDICATED IN FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. GC TO APPLY SPECIAL PRIMER TO ANY GYPSUM BOARD OR WOOD TRIM SURFACE THAT IS GOING TO RECEIVE A PAINTED GRAPHIC. STENCIL: BENJAMIN MOORE'S 046 FRESH START HIGH HIDING ALL PURPOSE PRIMER APPLY BEFORE FINAL PAINT FINISH. ALWAYS DUST DRYWALL BEFORE APPLYING THE PRIMER. P. NOT USED Q. PROTECTION: PROTECT WORK OF OTHER TRADES WHETHER TO BE PAINTED OR NOT; CORRECT DAMAGE BY CLEANING, REPAIRING OR REPLACING, AND REPAINTING AS ACCEPTABLE TO LSD*C PROJECT MANAGER. 1. PROVIDE ©WET PAINT" SIGNS TO PROTECT NEWLY PAINTED FINISHES. 2. REMOVE TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE WRAPPINGS PROVIDED BY OTHERS FOR PROTECTION OF THEIR WORK AFTER COMPLETION OF PAINTING OPERATIONS. R. CLEAN-UP: DURING PROGRESS OF WORK, REMOVE DISCARDED PAINT MATERIALS, RUBBISH, CANS AND RAGS FROM SITE AT END OF EACH WORK DAY. 1. CLEAN GLASS AND PAINT -SPATTERED SURFACES IMMEDIATELY BY PROPER METHODS OF DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENTNOT USED) ) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS SECTION 124813 - WALK OFF MATS AND FRAMES A. GENERAL: PROVIDE ENTRY CARPET TYPE FLOOR WALK OFF MATS WITH ACCESSORIES AND SUBASSEMBLIES AS REQUIRED FOR COMPLETE FINISHED INSTALLATION. G.C. TO PROVIDE TRANSITION STRIPS FOR FLUSH MOUNTING OF MAT WITH ADJACENT FLOOR FINISH. 5. CODES AND REGULATIONS: COMPLY WITH STATE AND FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ENSURING ACCESS FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES. C. MANUFACTURERS: THE MATWORKS COMPANY LLC, 11900 OLD BALTIMORE PIKE, BELTSVILLE, MD 20705, (301-637-1272); OR GRAND ENTRANCE (886-424-6287). 1. VS ENTRY: MATWORKS - REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE. 2. PINK ENTRY: GRAND ENTRANCE - REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE. 3. EXTERIOR ACCESSIBLE SERVICE DOORS: MATWORKS - REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE D. INSTALLATION: COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS. GC. TO INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS, INCLUDING INSTALLATION OF ALL SLAB ANCHORS. FAILURE TO FOLLOW MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS WILL RESULT IN RE -INSTALLATION AT GC EXPENSE FOR PARTS AND LABOR. 1. FOR MATWORKS MATS, SUBSTRATE TO BE PAINTED; ONCE DRY, CLEAN SURFACE PRIOR TO INSTALLING GRID. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED OCT 0 2 2017 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION ■ PROJECT INFORMATION: a :2;.! z2 >. aQ H: U0 0. a_ Z 0,Q a: 4c O-00WCLI E~2a.0NZ- c.0, N0== a N W O m Z 2 cc 0 4C O = 0 n O c.' W a_ C U O T= O O W U 8 0 11 E o N J O N'' Sy en Q N H p U N- W N = O s 1no atad- 2 iO W i Lli� W � W a'0 06 x 34 0=3 = iR E i o>- c=i LI J La 3 : Z W h O N. • N M 000 CL e- N Y Y 0 O Z 0 O 00 Lo V) 0 w H 0 w a 0 c) cc-) 0 0 o os a Z V c� W J REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 2 2017 PE DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 AM HMG SKM ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: 1 Panel Wiring Schedule (3 -Phase) Panelboard Panel Type NEMA Type 'A' NQ 1 Voltage 208Y/120 OCPD 100A M.C.B. Mounting SURFACE Phase 3 Wire 4 Buss 125A Options/Notes AIC Rating 10,000 Ckt. No. Zone Load Description Brkr. Size * Brkr. Opts. N.E.C. kVA .* Phase N.E.C. kVA ,* Brkr. Opts. Brkr. Size Load Description Zone Ckt. No. 1 - VAV-1 40/3 HACR 3.333 A 0.330 Lo 0.000 LIGHTING 1.00 2 3 3.334 B 0.180 0.360 MOTORS RECEIVING DESK REC [6] 4 5 3.333 C 0.360 - 0.000 HAND STEAMER 0.000 6 7 0.000 SPARE 0.000 - 0.000 A 0.180 12.120 - RECEPTACLE 12.120 8 9 FEEDER AMPERAGE AMPS SPARE = MINIMUM = 35.8 0.000 B 0.900 Lo SECURITY/BURGLAR 10 11 SPARE 0.000 C 0.500 Lo FACP 12 13 SPARE 0.000 A 0.360 Lo TELEPHONE BD 14 15 SPARE 0.000 B 0.000 SPARE 16 17 SPARE 0.000 C 0.000 SPARE 18 19 SPARE 0.000 A 0.000 SPARE 20 21 SPARE 0.000 B 0.000 SPARE 22 23 SPARE 0.000 C 0.000 SPARE 24 Notes All circuit breakers to be 20 -Amp, 1 -Pole unless otherwise noted. All Phases to be balanced to within 10% using Actual Load Totals. N.E.C. Connected Totals: Ph.A N.E.C. Connected Totals: Ph.B N.E.C. Connected Totals: Ph.0 Total E Existing Circuit to remain IG Isolated Ground Circuit Connected Load: NEC Demand Feeder Load: 4.203 4.414 4.193 12.810 35.6 35.8 kVA kVA kVA kVA amps amps Breaker Options: AS Powedink AS Breaker LO Handle lock -on device ST Shunt Trip Type AUX Auxiliary Contacts PA Handle Padlock Attachment GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter HACR Heating, NC & Refrigeration SF Subfeed AFC! Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter ELECTRIC LOAD SUMMARY 208Y/120V SERVICE DESCRIPTION N.E.C. CONNECTED kVA NEC DEMAND NOTES N.E.C. DEMAND FACTOR N.E.C. DEMAND kVA LIGHTING (CONTINUOUS) 0.330 [1] 1.25 0.413 TRACK LIGHT DEMAND ALLOWANCE - [2] - 0.000 SHOW WINDOW DEMAND ALLOWANCE - [31 - 0.000 KIT APPLIANCE 0.000 [4} 1.00 0.000 RECEPTACLES 0.360 [5] - 0.360 MOTORS 0.000 [6] - 0.000 FIXED ELECTRIC SPACE HEATING 0.000 [1] - 0.000 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 0.000 [6],[7] - 0.000 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER 0.000 - 1.0 0.000 MISCELLANEOUS 12.120 - 1.0 12.120 N.E.C. DEM. KVAX 1000 12.810 FEEDER AMPERAGE AMPS 12.893 = MINIMUM = 35.8 SYS. VOLTAGE X 1.732 12.893 X 1000 208 X 1.732 LOAD SUMMARY NOTES: [1] POWER FACTOR IS ALREADY INCLUDED IN LIGHTING LOAD. [2] 150VAI2FT OF LINE VOLTAGE TRACK + SUM LOW VOLTAGE XFRMS - CONNECTED LOAD [3] 200VAILF - ACTUAL CONNECTED LOAD [4] KIT APPLIANCE DEMAND FACTOR PER NEC 220-56 [5] 0.0 < 10KW = 100%, REMAINING - 50% [6] 125% OF THE LARGEST MOTOR OR COMPRESSOR IN SYSTEM APPLIED ON ONE UNIT. [7] USE GREATER VALUE OF THESE TWO CATEGORIES EXISTING CONDUIT STUBBED INTO SPACE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS. TENANT'S E.C. SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW (4) #3 THWN AND (1) #8 GRD IN NEW 1 1/4" CONDUIT. VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS AND ROUTING WITH LANDLORD IN FIELD PRIOR TO BID. APPROX. 100'-0" (FIELD VERIFY EXACT DISTANCE) y- LEASE LINE LANDLORD ELEC ROOM LANDLORD'S EQUIPMENT FAULT CURRENT RATING IS 42,000 SYM AMPS AT LL PANEL. TENANT'S E.C. SHALL COORDINATE METERING REQUIREMENTS WITH UTILITY COMPANY AND LANDLORD PRIOR TO ROUGH -IN AND ORDERING. TENANT'S E.C. SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW 100 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER IN LANDLORD'S EXISTING SWITCHGEAR. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS WITH LANDLORD PRIOR TO BIDS AND INCLUDE ALL COSTS IN BID. EXISTING 120/208V, 30, 4W, LANDLORD SWITCHBOARD. FIELD VERIFY EXACT REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO BIDS. POWER RISER DIAGRAM GENERAL NOTES HVAC CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE "HACR" TYPE WHERE REQUIRED BY EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE PER N.E.C. 100A 2. TENANT'S ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXACT A.I.C. RATING OF LANDLORD'S DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT, FURNISH AND INSTALL TENANTS SYSTEM TO MATCH. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BALANCE ALL PANELS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO ±10% BETWEEN PHASES: A/B B/C, A/C REGARDLESS OF CIRCUITING INDICATED. 4. PROPER CLEARANCE MUST BE MAINTAINED ABOUT ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER N.E.C. FIELD VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING SPACE AVAILABLE IN ELECTRICAL ROOM/AREA PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 6. TENANT'S NAME AND SPACE NUMBER SHALL BE APPLIED TO DISCONNECT SWITCH AT SWITCHGEAR WITH BLACK PLASTIC LAMENT WITH WHITE LETTERS. J TENANT SPACE NEW PANEL "A„ 120/208V. 30, 4W, 100A M.C.B. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DATA ITEM VOLTAGE FEEDERS BRANCH BREAKER DISC. SW. BUS FUSES NOTE WIRE CONDUIT VAV-1 120/208V, 30 (3)#8 & (1)#10G 3/4" 40A -3P - - 2 NOTE: TOGGLE SWITCH TO BE FURNISHED BY LSD&C AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. SWITCH TO BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY MECHANICAL SUPPLIER. 1. 'AC' 2. DISCONNECT FAULT CURRENT IS 5,072 SYM AMPS. EXISTING LIGHTING AND EXIT SIGNS TO REMAIN AND BE REUSED. REWIRE AS SHOWN AND LEAVE IN GOOD WORKING CONDITION. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. REFER TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT DATA ON THIS SHEET FOR CONDUIT AND WIRE SIZE. 4"X4" JUNCTION BOX MOUNTED AT 60" AFF WITH 1-1/4" CONDUIT (WITH BUSHING) TO CEILING FOR BURGLAR ALARM. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION WITH LSD&C PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. INSTALL WALL MOUNTED MOTION DETECTOR AT REAR EXIT AND NEXT TO BURGLAR ALARM AT 7' AFF. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS WITH LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. KEYPAD FOR BURGLAR SYSTEM, MOUNTED AT 48" AFF, ON WALL, ON HANDLE -SIDE OF NON -SALES DOOR. DOOR CONTACT FOR BURGLAR SYSTEM. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL JUNCTION BOX AND 3/4" CONDUIT FROM ABOVE CEILING TO 6" FROM DOOR, ALIGNED WITH TOP OF DOOR FOR SWING DOORS. M -Engineering 750 Brooksedge Blvd. Westerville, Ohio 43081 phone: 614.839.4639 fax: 614.839.2222 www.mengineering.us.com FIRE ALARM DEVICE. A FIRE ALARM SYSTEM IS REQUIRED FOR THE SPACE COMPLETE WITH A FIRE ALARM PANEL (FACP). E.C. SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE, PERMITTED, AND FULLY TESTED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM FOR THE SPACE IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES AND LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS. THE SPACE FACP SHALL COMMUNICATE WITH THE LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. THE LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS TO THE LANDLORD'S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM AT TENANT'S EXPENSE. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE PRIOR TO BID AND WORK COMMENCEMENT. ELECTRICAL SERVICE EQUIPMENT. SEE POWER RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULE ON THIS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Ch 4-of VIAS t;;;\ KEYPAD FOR LVAN SYSTEM, MOUNTED AT 48" AFF, ON WALL, ON HANDLE -SIDE OF DOOR LEADING TO REAR EXIT, AND 3/4" CONDUIT FROM JUNCTION BOX TO ABOVE CEILING, THROUGH 8X8 JBOX ON WALL THEN DOWN TO LVAN SYSTEM. DOOR CONTACT FOR LVAN SYSTEM. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL JUNCTION BOX AND 3/4" CONDUIT FROM ABOVE CEILING TO 6" FROM DOOR, ALIGNED WITH TOP OF DOOR FOR SWING DOORS. PROVIDE 4'X8'X3/4" FIRE RETARDANT PLYWOOD BACKBOARD FOR NEW TELEPHONE PANEL AND DATA. PROVIDE TELEPHONE WIRING TO ALL OUTLETS AND FOR TELEPHONE SERVICE. EXTEND TELEPHONE/DATA SERVICE CONDUIT TO THIS LOCATION. COORDINATE WITH LANDLORD AND WITH LSD&C PRIOR TO WORK COMMENCEMENT. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION. 8X8 JUNCTION BOX ABOVE CEILING. RUN 2-1/2" CONDUIT ALONG WALL TO LVAN SYSTEM. IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE, FURNISH AND INSTALL 4X4 JUNCTION BOX AT EACH CAMERA DEVICE WITH 1/2" CONDUIT BACK TO 8x8 J -BOX. IF EXISTING EMERGENCY LIGHTING WITHIN SPACE IS NOT ADEQUATE, FURNISH AND INSTALL EMERGENCY BALLAST AT DESIGNATED FIXTURE AND CONNECT TO LOCAL LIGHTING CIRCUIT AHEAD OF ALL SWITCHING. PROVIDE AND INSTALL A SCREW TYPE LOCK -ON DEVICE AT THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. PROVIDE OCCUPANCY/VACANCY SENSOR TO AUTOMATICALLY TURN OFF LIGHTING WITHIN 20 MINUTES OF ALL OCCUPANTS LEAVING THE SPACE. REMOTE STORAGE ELECTRICAL KEYNOTES 01/25/12 U- - 2 N W p Z V, U • O � o r W J • 3 N • N m W C'J = Z ��oo� a W = W Z a=ia W3=� O • W a a P- UZixo�zO 2 Op ...,omaW � UX OOay_1�% Z o a a 2 O O N W a J H a or z • . a el <aect-'a W Z C• �'• W• cr)La W mWZx ,.,, aaa~. ,~a.m., f/1 !=i= 2° Z O 2 Zp Z Q �2 oaaC�3 W 3 0 0 [ r C U W Y a>_ a W FLOOR _� REMOTE STOCK 900 SQ. FT. REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: FIELD VERIFY ALL CONDITIONS RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA DESIGN DRAWINGS ARE SCHEMATIC. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO BIDDING OR AWARD OF CONTRACT TO INSPECT EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. THIS CONTRACT SHALL INCLUDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS NECESSARY FOR FIELD MODIFICATIONS DUE TO EXISTING CONDITIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER PRIOR TO BIDDING FOR INTERPRETATIONS AND CLARIFICATIONS OF THE DESIGN AND INCLUDE IN HIS BID ALL COSTS TO MEET THE DESIGN INTENT. CLARIFICATIONS MADE BY THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER AFTER BIDDING WILL BE FINAL AND SHALL BE IMPLEMENTED AT CONTRACTORS COST. BIDDING CONTRACTORS SHALL HAVE A WORKING KNOWLEDGE OF LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AND SHALL INCLUDE IN THEIR BIDS THE COSTS FOR ALL WORK INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH GOVERNING CODES, THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS NOT WITHSTANDING. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ALERT ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR OWNER OF ANY APPARENT DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN GOVERNING CODES AND DESIGN INTENT. A-2 I(E) "VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BID" LOCATION OF BURGLAR & LVAN SYSTEMS. F pgaqxIP 17'Pit 411/0izzO SEP 222017 PtHHMI f CEN I tH DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 CDH CDH DFG ELECTRICAL REMOTE STORAGE PLANS DRAWING NUMBER: ►TORAGE RISER DIAGRAM AND PANEL SCHEDULES 1/4"_1'-0" REMOTE STORAGE LIGHTING PLAN 09/25/12 1/4"_1'-0" r 1/4".1'-0" REMOTE STORAGE POWER PLAN It - 09/25/12 09/25/12 SECTION 200000 - BASIC ELECTRICAL RE A. NOTE NTS 1. THE ABBREVIATION LSD&C WHEREVER IT APPEARS IN THESE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL REFER TO "LIMITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION". ANY REFERENCE TO TENANT'S PROJECT MANAGER OR FURNISHED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE REFERS TO LSD&C. 2. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND ALL OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTIONS, APPLY TO THIS AND THE OTHER SECTIONS OF DIVISION 26. 3. THE CONTRACTOR FOR THIS DIVISION OF WORK IS REQUIRED TO READ THE SPECIFICATIONS AND REVIEW DRAWINGS FOR ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THIS WORK AND THE WORK OF HIS OR HER SUBCONTRACTORS WITH ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK. IT IS THIS CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE HIS OR HER SUBCONTRACTORS WITH A COMPLETE SET OF BID DOCUMENTS. 4. THIS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING THE COMPLETION AND INSPECTION OF THIS WORK TO COMPLY WITH THE LSD&C SCHEDULE AND THE PROJECT COMPLETION DATE. 5. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID TO DETERMINE CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK. ANY ITEMS WHICH ARE NOT COVERED IN THE BID DOCUMENTS OR ANY PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE LISTED SEPARATELY AND QUALIFIED IN THE CONTRACTORS BID. SUBMITTAL OF BID SHALL SERVE AS EVIDENCE OF KNOWLEDGE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ANY MODIFICATIONS WHICH ARE REQUIRED TO MEET THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. FAILURE TO VISIT THE SITE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY IN PERFORMANCE OF HIS OR HER WORK. 6. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET E01.01 OF THIS SET FOR INFORMATION IN REGARD TO RESPONSIBILITY OF WORK OR ITEMS WHICH MAY AFFECT BID. B. GEPERAL REQUIRE NTS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION, INCIDENTALS AND DETAILS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS. ALL WORK NOT SPECIFICALLY NOTED AS BEING BY THE LANDLORD OR LSD&C SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. CLOSELY COORDINATE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION WITH THE LANDLORD AND THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER, AS REQUIRED. 2. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED TO SUPPLEMENT EACH OTHER AND ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR CALLED FOR IN ONE SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EVEN THOUGH NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED IN BOTH. ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR WHICH IS NEITHER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS NOR CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, BUT WHICH IS OBVIOUSLY NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK, AND WHICH IS USUALLY INCLUDED IN WORK OF SIMILAR CHARACTER, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS PART OF CONTRACT. 3. WHERE THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS CALL FOR ITEMS WHICH EXCEED CODES OR THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA, THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE SYSTEM WITH THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS AS DESIGNED AND DESCRIBED ON THESE DRAWINGS, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. ALL WORK IN THIS SECTION SHALL BE INSTALLED SO AS TO BE READILY ACCESSIBLE FOR OPERATING, SERVICING, MAINTAINING, AND REPAIRING. THIS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING SUFFICIENT SERVICE ACCESS TO ALL EQUIPMENT. 5. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A NEAT PROFESSIONAL MANNER USING GOOD CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES. 6. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE, MATERIALS, PRODUCTS, AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING ALL COMPONENTS THEREOF, SHALL BE NEW, UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES LISTED AND LABELED AND SIZED IN CONFORMITY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF STATE AND LOCAL CODES, WHICHEVER IS MORE STRINGENT. 7. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL CUTTING, CHASING AND CHANNELING REQUIRED FOR ANY WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION. CUTTING SHALL HAVE PRIOR APPROVAL BY LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER AND THE LANDLORD. ALL PATCHING SHALL BE BY G.C. AND SHALL MATCH THE SURROUNDING SURFACES. 8. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING SYSTEM. C. TE •RARY LIGHT AIM POWER 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL TEMPORARY WIRING AND RELATED GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTION PROTECTION FOR LIGHT AND POWER FOR ALL CONTRACTORS AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ITS REMOVAL 2. ALL TEMPORARY LIGHTING WILL CONFORM WITH OSHA STANDARDS. 3. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SETS UP ALL ELECTRICAL UTILITIES IN THE NAME OF LIMITED BRANDS. LIMITED BRANDS PAYS FOR ALL UTILITIES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION. D. CODES 1. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE LANDLORDS' CRITERIA, THE STATE'S, COUNTY'S, CITY'S, PROVINCE AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES, SAFETY AND HEALTH CODES, NFPA/NFPAC CODES, ENERGY CODES AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INQUIRE INTO AND COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ANY CHANGES REQUIRED BY CODES IN THE BID AND IF THESE CHANGES ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE BID, THEY SHALL BE QUALIFIED AS A SEPARATE LINE ITEM IN THE BID. AFTER CONTRACT IS AWARDED, CHANGE ORDERS FOR INCREASED COSTS DUE TO CODE ISSUES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED BY LSD&C, UNLESS ALLOWANCES HAVE PREVIOUSLY BEEN AGREED UPON. E. LICENSES, PEMTS, DISPECTIONS & FEES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL LICENSES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND FEES REQUIRED OR RELATED TO HIS OR HER WORK. 2. FURNISH TO THE LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER ALL CERTIFICATES OF INSPECTION AND FINAL INSPECTION APPROVAL AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. F. TRADE N 8, MANUFACTURERS AND SHOP DRA GS 1. WHERE TRADE NAMES AND MANUFACTURERS ARE USED ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, THE EXACT EQUIPMENT SHALL BE USED AS A MINIMUM FOR THE BASE BID. MANUFACTURERS CONSIDERED AS AN EQUAL OR BETTER IN ALL ASPECTS TO THAT SPECIFIED WILL BE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL IN WRITING BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER THROUGH SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCESS FOR ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO INSTALLATIONS. THE USE OF ANY UNAUTHORIZED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ONLY SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS TO LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR APPROVAL SUBMISSIONS SHALL BE MADE EARLY ENOUGH IN PROJECT TO ALLOW FOUR (4) WORKING DAYS FOR LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER'S REVIEW WITHOUT CAUSING DELAYS OR CONFLICTS TO THE JOB'S PROGRESS. SUBMITTALS SHALL BEAR THE STAMP OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE SUBCONTRACTOR SHOWING THAT HE HAS REVIEWED AND CONFIRMED THAT THE SUBMITTALS ARE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR INDICATE WHERE EXCEPTIONS HAVE BEEN TAKEN. G. GUARANTEE 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIALS AND WORK PROVIDED UNDER HIS OR HER CONTRACT AND SHALL MAKE GOOD, REPAIR OR REPLACE AT HIS OR HER OWN EXPENSE, ANY DEFECTIVE WORK, MATERIAL, OR EQUIPMENT WHICH MAY BE DISCOVERED WITHIN A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE OF THE INSTALLATION BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER (IN WRITING). EXTENDED WARRANTIES ARE AS SPECIFIED WITH INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT. 2. THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER SHALL GUARANTEE AND PROVIDE A 12 MONTH GUARANTEE TO LSD&C FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL WARRANT THE INSTALLATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT AND WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE AND/OR MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BEAR ADDITIONAL WARRANTIES BEYOND A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM. H. RECORD DRA GS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN ONE SET OF DRAWINGS ON THE JOB SITE UPDATED WEEKLY TO RECORD ALL DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS, SUCH AS: a. LOCATION OF CONCEALED PULLBOXES. b. REVISIONS, ADDENDUMS, AND CHANGE ORDERS. c. SIGNIFICANT DEVIATIONS MADE NECESSARY BY FIELD CONDITIONS, APPROVED EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS, AND CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION WITH. OTHER TRADES. 2. AT COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT AND BEFORE FINAL APPROVAL, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ANY FINAL CORRECTIONS TO DRAWINGS AND CERTIFY THE ACCURACY OF EACH PRINT BY SIGNATURE THEREON. FAILURE TO KEEP THESE RECORDS WILL ALLOW LSD&C TO DIRECT THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THESE RECORDS AT HIS OR HER EXPENSE PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT. DISCREPANCIES IN DOC NTS 1. DRAWINGS (PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND DETAILS) ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE THE GENERAL LOCATION AND INTENT OF THE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. WHERE DRAWINGS, EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS, SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER TRADES CONFLICT OR ARE UNCLEAR, ADVISES THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IN WRITING, PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO ADVISE LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER, IN WRITING, OF VARIATIONS TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BID. OTHERWISE, LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER'S INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR CONDITIONS SHALL BE FINAL WITH NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION PERMITTED. J. PHASING REQ NTS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR IS TO INCLUDE IN HIS OR HER BID ALL NECESSARY SERVICE REQUIRED TO KEEP THE OPERATING PHASE OF THE STORE'S HVAC, ELECTRICAL PLUMBING AND SPRINKLER SERVICE IN OPERATION. CONTRACTOR SHALL SCHEDULE IN WRITING WITH LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER AND THE LANDLORD ONE WEEK PRIOR TO ANY SHUT DOWN OF THE HVAC, PLUMBING OR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS. K. DEMOUTION 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING WORK AND THE DEMOLITION PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO BE LEFT INTACT. 2. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE, AND WILL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR, THE REMOVAL OF ALL EXISTING CONDUIT, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, SWITCH GEAR, PITCH POCKETS AND EQUIPMENT ETC.. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY WITH THE LANDLORD ALL PRESUMED ABANDONED EQUIPMENT, CONDUIT AND SWITCH GEAR PRIOR TO REMOVAL PITCH POCKETS SHALL BE REMOVED AND THE ROOF PATCHED, AS REQUIRED BY THE LANDLORD. ALL EXTRANEOUS ITEMS IN THE SPACE OR ON THE ROOF NOT APPLICABLE TO THE NEW WORK SHALL BE REMOVED AND ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PATCHED/REPAIRED TO LIKE NEW CONDITION. EXISTING ABANDONED CONDUIT OR EQUIPMENT IN THE FLOOR, EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE, OR OTHERWISE INACCESSIBLE, ARE TO BE CUT OFF AND SEALED BELOW OR WITHIN FLOOR OR WALL LEVEL WHEN THEY ARE NOT TO BE REUSED IN THIS PROJECT. IF REQUIRED BY LANDLORD OR CODES, ABANDONED CONDUIT SHALL BE REMOVED TO POINT OF ORIGINATION. CONFIRM EXTENT OF DEMOLITION PRIOR TO BID AND INCLUDE IN PROPOSAL 3. ALL UNUSED COMMUNICATION, DATA, AND LOW VOLTAGE CABLING IS TO BE REMOVED IN ACCORDANCE WITH N.E.C. 725.(3)B AND 760.3(A). L SLEEVES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SLEEVES TO PROTECT EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES IN THE INSTALLATION. EACH SLEEVE SHALL EXTEND THROUGH ITS RESPECTIVE FLOOR, WALL OR PARTITION AND SHALL BE CUT FLUSH WITH EACH SURFACE EXCEPT SLEEVES THAT PENETRATE THE FLOOR, WHICH SHALL EXTEND 2" ABOVE THE FLOOR. CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE THROUGH THE LANDLORD ANY CORE DRILLING OR CUTTING OF OPENINGS IN MASONRY FLOORS OR WALLS. 2. ALL SLEEVES AND OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS AND/OR FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE SEALED WITH CALCIUM SILICATE, SILICONE "RTV" FOAM, "3M" FIRE RATED SEALANTS OR EQUAL, SO AS TO RETAIN THEIR FIRE RATING. 3. SLEEVES IN BEARING AND MASONRY WALLS, FLOORS, AND PARTITIONS SHALL BE STANDARD WEIGHT STEEL PIPE FINISHED WITH SMOOTH EDGES. FOR OTHER THAN MASONRY PARTITIONS, THROUGH SUSPENDED CEILINGS, OR FOR CONCEALED VERTICAL PIPING, SLEEVES SHALL BE NO. 22 U.S.G. GALVANIZED STEEL MINIMUM. M. HANGERS 1. HANGERS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MISCELLANEOUS STEEL SUCH AS ANGLE IRON, BANDS, C -CLAMPS WITH RETAINING CLIPS, CHANNELS, HANGER RODS, ETC., NECESSARY FOR THE INSTALLATION OF WORK. 2. HANGERS SHALL BE FASTENED TO BUILDING STEEL, CONCRETE, OR MASONRY, BUT NOT TO PIPING. HANGING FROM METAL DECK IS NOT PERMITTED. HANGERS SHALL BE ATTACHED TO UPPER CHORD OF BAR JOIST. WHERE INTERFERENCES OCCUR, AND IN ORDER TO SUPPORT DUCTWORK OR PIPING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL TRAPEZE TYPE HANGERS OR SUPPORTS WHICH SHALL BE LOCATED WHERE THEY DO NOT INTERFERE WITH ACCESS TO FIRE DAMPERS, VALVES, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. HANGER TYPES AND INSTALLATION METHODS ARE ALSO SUBJECT TO LANDLORD CRITERIA. 3. HANGERS FOR ALL INSULATED PIPING SHALL BE SIZED AND INSTALLED FOR THE OUTER DIAMETER OF INSULATION. INSTALL 6" LONG SPLIT CIRCLE GALVANIZED SADDLE BETWEEN THE HANGER AND THE PIPE INSULATION. 4. HANGERS AND PIPING OF DISSIMILAR METALS SHALL BE DI -ELECTRICALLY SEPARATED. N. FINAL ELECTRICAL INSPECTION 1. ASIDE FROM NORMAL INTERIM INSPECTIONS OF WORK IN PLACE, LSD&C MAY HAVE AN INDEPENDENT ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INSPECT THE FINISHED ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION UPON COMPLETION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES. THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO BRING ALL ITEMS REPORTED BY THE INDEPENDENT ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UP TO PLANS AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. O. SCOP OF WORK 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION, AND FACILITIES NECESSARY FOR, REASONABLY IMPLIED AND INCIDENTAL TO, THE FURNISHING, INSTALLATION, COMPLETION AND TESTING OF ALL THE WORK FOR THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS, TO INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: a. A COMPLETE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM INCLUDING THE INSTALLATION OF LSD&C FURNISHED POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM UNIT, SAFETY SWITCHES, DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND MOTOR STARTERS (SOMETIMES FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR), AND LIGHTING. IT IS THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO INCLUDE IN HIS OR HER BID FOR PROVIDING SERVICE EQUIPMENT NECESSARY FOR TIE-IN TO LANDLORD'S DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT OR TO OBTAIN SERVICE FROM LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY. REFER TO ELECTRICAL RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE AND ELECTRICAL POWER RISER DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. b. CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE IN BID ALL NECESSARY MATERIALS REQUIRED TO COMPLETE THE SYSTEM INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, FEEDERS, BRANCH CIRCUITS, JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES, WIRING DEVICES, COVERPLATES, CONDUITS, MOTOR STARTERS, DISCONNECTS, ETC. c. METERING AND CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AS REQUIRED BY DRAWINGS, LSD&C, UTILITY COMPANY, AND/OR LANDLORD. d. THE WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AS OUTLINED ON THE BID SET DRAWINGS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. WORK SHALL INCLUDE WIRING OF ALL STARTERS, DISCONNECTS, AND POWER WIRING OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. ALL LOW VOLTAGE (24 VOLT) EMS TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED SPECIFICALLY ON DRAWING. e. INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES AND LAMPS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS INCLUDING ALL DEVICES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. REQUIRED FOR MOUNTING. f. A COMPLETE CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR TELEPHONE/DATA AND TRAFFIC COUNTER INCLUDING BRANCH CONDUITS, OUTLET BOXES, PULL WIRES, GROUND CONDUCTORS, COVER PLATES, ETC. OR AS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS. g. A COMPLETE EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS. h. TEMPORARY SERVICE AS INDICATED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, INCLUDING ITS REMOVAL. i. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO ALL SIGNS, CORNICE LIGHTING, CASE LIGHTING, ETC. AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. j. INSTALLATION AND WIRING OF SPEAKERS, AMPLIFIERS, CONDUIT AND FINAL CONNECTIONS FOR SOUND SYSTEM AS SHOWN. k. SMOKE/FIRE ALARM WIRING, DEVICES AND CONDUIT, AS SHOWN OR DESCRIBED ON DRAWINGS OR AS NECESSARY TO MEET LANDLORD, STATE, LOCAL, INSURANCE AND FIRE DEPARTMENT REQUIREMENTS. I. INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS STUBBED TO ABOVE CEILING FOR HVAC. ALSO, ANY ADDITIONAL CONDUIT FOR HVAC CONTROL EQUIPMENT WHERE PLENUM RATED CABLES ARE NOT PERMITTED. m.BALANCING LOADS. n. AS -BUILT, PANEL DESCRIPTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER SPECIFIC LABELING. 2. WORK NOT INCLUDED: THE FOLLOWING ITEMS OF ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS CONTRACT: a. TELEPHONE INSTRUMENTS AND WIRING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. b. DATA CABLE WIRING UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. BEFORE STARTING WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL EXAMINE THE ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, FIRE PROTECTION, MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PLANS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO SEQUENCE, COORDINATE, AND INTEGRATE THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS TO AVOID INTERFERENCES AND CONFRONTATIONS. P. CLEANING 1. AT THE END OF THE PROJECT, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL CLEAN ALL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING LIGHT FIXTURES, TO THE SATISFACTION OF LSD&C. ALL DUST, DIRT, DEBRIS, AND FOREIGN MATTER SHALL BE REMOVED FROM ALL EQUIPMENT. SECTION 260126 - MAINTENANCE TEST= OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. ALL CONNECTIONS AT PANELS, LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND SWITCHES ARE TO BE MADE, ALL SPLICES COMPLETE, ALL FUSES IN PLACE, AND ALL CIRCUITS CONTINUOUS FROM POINT OF SERVICE CONNECTION TO ITS FINAL DESTINATION, AND ALL COVERS AND PLATES INSTALLED PRIOR TO THE TIME OF FINAL INSPECTION BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER. B. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, ALL PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SHALL BE TESTED AND PROVED FREE OF UNWANTED GROUNDS AND OTHER DEFECTS. C. ALL OVERLOAD DEVICES, INCLUDING EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS, SHALL BE SET AND ADJUSTED TO SUIT THE LOAD CONDITIONS. D. TEST AND MAKE CORRECTIONS/ADJUSTMENTS FOR PHASE BALANCING. E. THIS CONTRACTOR IS TO BALANCE THE VOLTAGE LEAVING THE STEP-DOWN TRANSFORMER TO PROVIDE A SECONDARY VOLTAGE OF 120 MINIMUM TO 125 VOLTS MAXIMUM BY ADJUSTING THE TRANSFORMER TAPS ONCE ALL THE FINAL CONNECTIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE LOW VOLTAGE PANELBOARD. INCLUDE FINAL BALANCE REPORT WITH AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. SECTION 260510 - ELECTRICAL POWER COIMUCTORS NM CABLES A. CONDUCTORS FOR FEEDERS AND BRANCH CIRCUITS SHALL BE COPPER AND THE AWG SIZE AND TYPE AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. MINIMUM WIRE SIZE SHALL BE #12 AND THE CONDUCTORS SHALL BE 600 VOLT INSULATION TYPE THW, THWN, THHN, OR RW90(CANADA). B. MINIMUM WIRE SIZE - 20 AMP BRANCH CIRCUIT SHALL BE AWG LISTED. SIZE PER DISTANCE SHOWN BELOW. DISTANCE SHALL BE MEASURED FROM THE PANELBOARD CIRCUIT BREAKER TO THE FARTHEST OUTLET. 1.#12 LESS THAN 100 FEET 2. #10 BETWEEN 100 - 150 FEET 3. #8 BETWEEN 150 - 250 FEET 4. #6 OVER 250 FEET C. ON ALL 20 AMP BRANCH CIRCUITS, CONDUCTORS LARGER THAN #10 AWG SHALL BE REDUCED TO #10 AWG WITHIN 10 FEET OF PANELBOARD AND DEVICE IN JUNCTION BOXES ON RATED TERMINAL STRIPS. D. CONDUCTORS MAY BE STRANDED FOR SIZES #10 AWG AND LARGER. CONDUCTORS' SIZE #12 SHALL BE SOLID. E. ALUMINUM CONDUCTORS ARE NOT PERMITTED, EXCEPT AT SERVICE ENTRANCE, WHERE REQUIRED BY LANDLORD. CONDUCTOR CONNECTION SHALL BE PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER WHEN USED. F. ALL WIRING SHALL BE IN CONDUIT, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE (I.E. LOW VOLTAGE PLENUM RATED WIRE). G. THE USE OF ROMEX OR BX CABLE IS NOT PERMITTED. THE USE OF MC CABLE IS NOT PERMITTED IN CANADA. H. WIRE CONNECTORS SHALL BE EQUAL TO "SCOTCH LOCK" FOR #8 AWG WIRE AND SMALLER AND EQUAL TO T & B "LOCKTIGHT" FOR #6 AWG AND LARGER. SECTION 260523 - CONTROL VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES A. UNITED STATES 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A SYSTEM OF CONDUIT RACEWAYS, OUTLET BOXES AND PULL WIRES AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON PLANS. TELEPHONE SWITCHING APPARATUS, CONDUCTORS, INSTRUMENTS, MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND APPURTENANCES ARE NOT PART OF THIS CONTRACT AND WILL BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY LSD&C. 2. OUTLET BOXES TO BE 4" SQUARE MINIMUM WITH SINGLE DEVICE COVER AND TELEPHONE PLATE. 3. CONDUIT RUNS FROM IFS ENCLOSURE OR MANAGER'S OFFICE FOR TELEPHONE AND DATA LINES TO CASHWRAPS ARE TO BE CONTINUOUS WITH NO JUNCTION BOXES EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 4. ALL PULL WIRES ARE TO BE LABELED FOR PURPOSE DESIGNATED. 5. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL ELECTRICAL WORK TO BE INCLUDED IN HIS OR HER BID. 6. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL POWER WIRINGS, LINE VOLTAGE WIRINGS, AND LINE VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING INDICATED UNDER THE HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING, PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO DO ALL INTERCONNECTING LINE VOLTAGE WIRINGS BETWEEN RELAYS AND SWITCHES AS REQUIRED. 7. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING CONDUIT FOR HVAC CONTROL WIRING WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE OR SHOWN ON PRINTS TO BE IN CONDUIT. REFER TO PLANS FOR REQUIREMENTS AND SIZE. 8. FIRE AND/OR SMOKE DAMPERS SHALL BE WIRED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE WITH HVAC CONTRACTOR FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS. 9. REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR AVAILABLE SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS OF EQUIPMENT. B. CANADA 1. ALL CCTV CABLES TO BE CAT5E TYPE AND WHITE IN COLOR. 5'-0" LOOP OF CABLE TO BE LEFT AT DVR AND 10'-0" LOOP OF CABLE TO BE LEFT AT EQUIPMENT LOCATION END COILED UP IN CEILING. 2. ALL SECURITY/ADT CABLING TO BE 22/4 NON -SHIELDED FT6 TYPE. NO CONDUIT REQUIRED IF RUN WITHIN THE PLENUM. 5'-0" LOOP OF CABLE TO BE LEFT AT THE CONTROL PANEL END AND 5'-0" TO BE LEFT AT THE EQUIPMENT LOCATION COILED IN CEILING. SECTION 260520-GRO G A G FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. FURNISH AND INSTALL COMPLETE WIRED GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SYSTEM, #12 AWG MINIMUM, SIZED AND INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LATEST ADOPTED EDITION OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, STATE AND LOCAL CODES, THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA, AS NOTED IN THE. SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. B. ALL CONDUITS, INCLUDING FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, SHALL BE GROUNDED WITH A GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR. C. GROUNDING CONNECTIONS MADE TO THE WATER PIPING SYSTEM SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH THE PLUMBING CONTRACTOR AND A BONDING JUMPER INSTALLED AROUND WATER METER PER CODES AND AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. D. ALL DEVICES SHALL BE BONDED TO THE CONDUIT SYSTEM. USE A BONDING JUMPER BETWEEN THE OUTLET BOX AND THE DEVICE GROUNDING TERMINAL METAL -TO -METAL CONTACT BETWEEN THE DEVICE YOKE AND THE OUTLET BOX IS NOT ACCEPTABLE AS A BOND FOR EITHER SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES OR FLUSH TYPE BOXES. ALL JUNCTION BOXES, OUTLET BOXES, AND PULL BOXES SHALL BE BONDED TO THE CONDUIT SYSTEM. E. ALL ENCLOSURES AND NON-CURRENT CARRYING METAL PARTS ARE TO BE GROUNDED. CONDUIT SYSTEM IS TO BE ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS. ALL LOCKNUTS SHALL CUT THROUGH ENAMELED OR PAINTED SURFACES ON ENCLOSURES. WHERE ENCLOSURES AND NON-CURRENT CARRYING METAL PARTS ARE ISOLATED FROM THE CONDUIT SYSTEM, USE BONDING JUMPERS WITH APPROVED CLAMPS. ALL GROUND CLAMPS SHALL BE "PENN -UNION" OR EQUAL, SIMILAR TO "GPL" TYPE. SECTION 260533 -RACEWAY AIM BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL CONDUITS SERVING ALL EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LIGHTING, RECEPTACLES, HEATING, AIR CONDITIONING, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT, TELEPHONE, DATA, SPEAKERS, SECURITY, PAGER, TRAFFIC COUNTING SYSTEM AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. B. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE GALVANIZED IMC OR EMT UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN SPECIFICATIONS OR ON DRAWINGS. ALL CONDUIT IS TO BE UL/ULC LABELED. EMT CONNECTORS SHALL BE STEEL COMPRESSION OR SET SCREW TYPE. CONDUIT UNDER SLAB ON GRADE SHALL BE RIGID STEEL, OR SCHEDULE 40 PVC WITH RIGID STEEL ELLS WHERE PERMITTED BY LANDLORD OR CODE. C. MINIMUM SIZE OF CONDUIT SHALL BE: 1. MAIN FEEDER CONDUIT TO 2" OR LARGER FOR ALL APPLICATIONS. 2. 1/2" MINIMUM FOR ALL LOCATIONS (IF ACCEPTABLE BY THE LANDLORD AND LOCAL CODE OFFICIALS), UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, OR DRAWINGS. 3. IF HVAC CONTROL WIRING IS REQUIRED TO BE RUN IN CONDUIT, IT SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 3/4", UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. 4. ALL IN/UNDER FLOOR CONDUIT SHALL BE OF MINIMUM 3/4" SIZE. 5. ALL FIRE ALARM CONDUIT SHALL BE OF MINIMUM 3/4" SIZE. D. SUPPORT ALL CONDUIT, INCLUDING SEISMIC AND SWAY BRACING, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LOCALLY ADAPTED CODES. E. GENERALLY, ALL CONDUIT SHALL BE CONCEALED EXCEPT FOR UNFINISHED AREAS, SUCH AS EQUIPMENT ROOMS. EXPOSED CONDUIT SHALL BE ALLOWED ONLY AS NOTED ON PLAN AND AS APPROVED BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER. PAINTING OF CONDUITS, NOTED ON DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS WILL BE BY GENERAL CONTRACTOR. 6. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, MC TYPE CABLE OR AC90(CANADA). ADDITIONALLY, FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, MC TYPE CABLE OR AC90(CANADA) SHALL BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING APPLICATIONS: a. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO MOTORS. b. FINAL CONNECTIONS INTO AND OUT OF THE TRANSFORMER. c. FINAL CONNECTIONS TO VIBRATING EQUIPMENT. d. INTER -CONNECTIONS BETWEEN ALL RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES AND JUNCTION BOXES. e. FINAL CONNECTIONS WHERE RIGID CONDUIT IS NOT PRACTICAL f. IN WALLS (FOR LIGHT SWITCHES AND 120 VOLT POWER RECEPTACLES AND HVAC CONTROL EQUIPMENT). 2. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT OR AC90 (CANADA) SHALL BE THE SAME SIZE AS THE IMC OR EMT CONDUIT TO WHICH IT IS CONNECTED. BOTH THE FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, OR AC90 (CANADA) AND ITS FITTINGS ARE TO BE LISTED FOR GROUNDING. A GREEN GROUNDING CONDUCTOR SHALL BE INSTALLED. ALL CONNECTORS ARE TO BE OF A NEMA APPROVED TYPE. 3. LENGTH OF FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT, MC TYPE CABLE, OR AC90 (CANADA) IS NOT TO EXCEED 6'-0" EXCEPT WHERE ALLOWED PER F.1.F. OF THIS SECTION. 4. THE USE OF ROMEX OR BX CABLE IS NOT PERMITTED. G. CONNECTION TO ANY OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT SHALL BE MADE WITH LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT OR AC90 (CANADA). H. PROVIDE PULL -WIRE IN ALL EMPTY CONDUITS EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS. I. HOME RUNS AND MAIN CONDUIT RUNS ARE TO BE HELD TIGHT TO STRUCTURE ABOVE OR AS REQUIRED TO ALLOW PROPER SERVICE ACCESS AND OTHER TRADES WORK. CONDUIT SHALL BE TRAPEZED TO ALLOW 3 FEET MINIMUM CLEARANCE ABOVE CEILING. J. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE SIZED PER LOCALLY ADOPTED CODES. K. ALL SENSORMATIC WIRING SHALL BE PLACED IN EMT, IMC, OR RMC CONDUIT. PVC IS NOT ALLOWED. L. ALL OUTLET BOXES SHALL BE GALVANIZED PRESSED STEEL OF THE STANDARD KNOCKOUT TYPE. NO ROUND OUTLET BOXES SHALL BE PERMITTED UNLESS INDICATED AND FOR LIGHTING THAT REQUIRE SUCH CONFIGURATION. CONCEALED BOXES SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN SINGLE GANG AND 1-1/2" DEEP, WITH PLASTER RINGS. M. ALL KNOCKOUT BOXES, UPON WHICH LIGHTING FIXTURES ARE TO BE INSTALLED, SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH 3/8" FIXTURE STUDS. N. EXTERIOR BOXES SHALL BE CAST RUST -RESISTING METAL WITH GASKETED COVERS. 0. INSTALL BOXES RIGIDLY FROM BUILDING STRUCTURE AND SUPPORT INDEPENDENTLY OF THE CONDUIT SYSTEM. ALSO PROVIDE SUITABLE BOX EXTENSIONS TO EXTEND BOXES TO FINISHED FACES OF FLOORS, CEILINGS, WALLS ETC. ALL OUTLET BOXES TO BE PROVIDED WITH CADDY "QUICK -MOUNT BOX SUPPORT" TO MINIMIZE THE DEFLECTION THAT OCCURS WHEN PLUGGING/UNPLUGGING INTO THESE DEVICES. P. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON DRAWINGS OR OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ACCESSIBILITY CODES OR LOCAL CODES, OUTLET HEIGHTS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: 1. SWITCH HEIGHT 42" FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTERLINE OF OUTLET. 2. CONVENIENCE OUTLETS: a. SALES AREAS: MOUNTED ON THE WALL 15" AFF UNLESS INDICATED OR HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED IN BASEBOARD BENEATH CABINETS, AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS, OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. SEE DRAWINGS. b. NON -SALES AREA: 15" FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTERLINE OF OUTLET. 3. TELEPHONE OUTLETS SHALL BE LOCATED AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. . THE PLANS INDICATE ONLY SCHEMATIC ROUTINGS FOR CONDUIT RUNS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ADDITIONAL BOXES WHERE REQUIRED BY FIELD CONDITIONS OR BY CODE. . BOXES AND COVERS SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL OF CODE GAUGE SIZE ARRANGE CIRCUITS TO AVOID THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES IN INACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS. THE USE OF JUNCTION BOXES ABOVE DRYWALL CEILINGS SHOULD BE LIMITED TO LOCATIONS NEAR ACCESS FRAMES USED FOR DIFFUSERS AND RETURN AIR GRILLES OR ACCESS PANELS AS LOCATED ON PLANS. SECTION 200 NTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. FOR ALL U.S PROJECTS ALL WIRING SHALL BE COLOR -CODED AS FOLLOWS: 1. 120/208 VOLT SYSTEM a. NEUTRAL - WHITE b. PHASE A OR L1 - BLACK c. PHASE B OR L2 - RED d. PHASE C OR L3 - BLUE e. GROUND - GREEN 2.277/480 VOLT SYSTEM a. NEUTRAL - GRAY b. PHASE A OR L1 - BROWN c. PHASE B OR L2 - ORANGE d. PHASE C OR L3 - YELLOW e. GROUND - GREEN . FOR CANADIAN PROJECT ALL WIRING SHALL BE COLOR -CODED AS FOLLOWS: 1. 120/208 VOLT SYSTEM a. NEUTRAL - WHITE b. PHASE A OR L1 - RED c. PHASE B OR L2 - BLACK d. PHASE C OR L3 - BLUE e. GROUND - GREEN 2.347/600 VOLT SYSTEM a. NEUTRAL - GRAY b. PHASE A OR L1 - RED c. PHASE B OR 1.2 - BLACK d. PHASE C OR L3 - BLUE e. GROUND - GREEN C. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES SHALL BE LABELED WITH CIRCUIT NUMBER IDENTIFICATION AND SYSTEM TYPE ON COVER. SECTION 280023 -LIGHTING CONTROL EQ NT A. LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL WILL BE PROVIDED BY LSD&C THROUGH CONTROL MANUFACTURER, MOUNTED IN IFS PANEL WITH CONDUIT, INSTALLED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. THE CONTROL PANEL SHALL BE PROGRAMMED AND COMPLETE WHEN SHIPPED TO THE JOB SITE. THE ELECTRICAL. CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PULL ALL WIRES AS DETAILED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND CIRCUITED EXACTLY AS DIAGRAMMED ON THE ELECTRICAL PLAN DRAWINGS. NO VARIATIONS TO THE CIRCUITING ARE ALLOWED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER. B. DIMMING SYSTEM WILL BE PROVIDED BY LSD&C THROUGH LIGHTING SUPPLIER, INSTALLED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO PULL ALL WIRES AS DETAILED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND CIRCUIT EXACTLY AS DIAGRAMMED ON THE ELECTRICAL PLAN DRAWINGS. NO VARIATIONS TO THE CIRCUITING ARE ALLOWED WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER. SECTION 282213 -DRY TYPE TRANSFORMRS A. TRANSFORMERS ARE GENERALLY INCLUDED IN THE IFS SWITCHGEAR. IF NOT, TRANSFORMER SHALL BE PAD MOUNTED OR SHALL BE SECURELY MOUNTED FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE, REINFORCED WALLS OR AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. USE ADDITIONAL VIBRATION ISOLATORS AT POINTS OF MOUNTING TO CUT VIBRATION NOISES. USE FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT WITH GROUNDING BUSHING FOR PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CONNECTIONS TO TRANSFORMER. TRANSFORMERS SHALL BE LOCATED, SET, MOUNTED AND CONNECTED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO KEEP NOISE LEVELS WITHIN THE SURROUNDING AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS AND MAINTAIN ALL CODE REQUIRED CLEARANCES. B. TRANSFORMER SHALL BE QUIET TYPE CONSTRUCTION AND HAVE SIX (6) 2-1/2% TAPS, TWO (2) TAPS ABOVE AND FOUR (4) TAPS BELOW NORMAL PRIMARY RATING. C. ALL DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PROVIDED SHALL MEET THE DOE 2016 EFFICIENCY REQUIREMENT. SECTION 282416-PANELBOARDS A. ALL PANELBOARDS SHALL BE FACTORY ASSEMBLED OF THE BOLTED CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE WITH SOLID COPPER BUSSING, FULL SIZED COPPER NEUTRAL, 100% GROUND BUSHING, AND OVERALL HINGED/LOCKABLE DOOR. ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE OF THE QUICK -MAKE AND QUICK -BREAK DESIGN, THERMAL -MAGNETIC TYPE, TRIP FREE AND TRIP -INDICATING. ALL PANELS SHALL BE DEAD FRONT AND FLUSH OR SURFACE MOUNTED AS SHOWN. B. CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A TYPEWRITTEN DIRECTORY CARD OF THE CIRCUITS AND PLACE IN PANEL DOOR. THE DIRECTORY SHALL IDENTIFY THE SPECIFIC ROOM LOCATION FOR EACH CIRCUIT. C. ALL PANELBOARDS PHASE AMPERAGE SHALL BE BALANCED TO WITHIN 7 PERCENT MAX. TO MIN. REARRANGE NON -LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS AS REQUIRED AND NOTE CHANGES ON RECORD DRAWINGS. LIGHTING PANEL CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE INSTALLED AND WIRED EXACTLY AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. D. IF LOOSE PANELBOARDS ARE USED, PANELBOARDS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON MINIMUM 3/4" A/D PLYWOOD AND PAINTED IN A COLOR TO MATCH THE SURROUNDING WALLS OR A COLOR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE. PLYWOOD SHALL EXTEND 1 FOOT MINIMUM BEYOND EDGE OF EQUIPMENT. E. PANELBOARDS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT RATING AND LUG CONNECTIONS AS FOLLOWS: 1. 120/208 VOLT PANELBOARDS: 10,000 A.I.C. 2.277/480 VOLT PANELBOARDS: 14,000 A.I.C. 3.347/600 VOLT PANELBOARDS: 14,000 A.I.C. 4. VERIFY ACTUAL A.I.C. SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT REQUIREMENTS WITH THE LANDLORD OR UTILITY COMPANY AND VERIFY SWITCHGEAR COMPLIANCE PRIOR TO INSTALLING EQUIPMENT. ALL LUG CONNECTIONS TO BE 75'C RATED. F. IFS ENCLOSURE FURNISHED BY LSD&C AND INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS HEREIN DESCRIBED: 1. UNIT WILL BE SHIPPED TO THE PROJECT IN MULTIPLE SECTIONS AND THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR OFF-LOADING OF EQUIPMENT, INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT FOR DAMAGES, VERIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT RECEIVED, ENSURING THAT THE EQUIPMENT RECEIVED IS COMPLETE AND MEETS THE SCHEDULED PANELS FOR THE PROJECT, MOVING AND MOUNTING OF SECTIONS AS WELL AS REASSEMBLING OF SAME INTO ONE COMPLETE UNIT PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CONNECT ALL PROVIDED INTERCONNECTING CABLES BETWEEN SECTIONS AND TORQUE CONNECTIONS PER MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. CONTRACTOR IS TO ANCHOR PANEL SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL CODES IN SEISMIC ZONES. 3. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO CONNECT LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUITS TO APPROPRIATE LOAD TERMINALS OR PRC LIMITER PANEL PROVIDED WITHIN IFS ENCLOSURE PER LIGHTING ZONES INDICATED IN THE PANEL SCHEDULE (I.E.: ZONE A, B, C, OR D)AND CURRENT LIMITING BREAKER SCHEDULE. LINE SIDE WIRING AND LIGHTING CONTROL WIRING WILL BE PREWIRED BY MANUFACTURER AT FACTORY. COORDINATE EXACT TERMINAL NUMBER FOR EACH CIRCUIT CONNECTION WITH MANUFACTURER'S DRAWINGS. 4. ALL LIGHTING, RECEPTACLE AND MISCELLANEOUS BRANCH CIRCUITS NOT SPECIFIED AS BEING CONTROLLED, ARE TO BE WIRED DIRECTLY TO THE CORRESPONDING BRANCH BREAKER IN THE DESIGNATED PANEL. 5. ALL CONNECTIONS WITHIN THE TELEPHONE/DATA SECTION AND HVAC CONTROL SECTION OF THE IFS ENCLOSURE ARE TO BE PERFORMED BY OTHERS. 6. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR WILL ONLY BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF THE CONDUIT SYSTEM INTO THE LOW VOLTAGE SECTION OF THE IFS PANEL 7. PRC LIMITER PANEL IS COMPLIANT WITH CALIFORNIA TITLE 24, SECT. 130 C(3) AND ASHRAE. SECTION 282728- G DEVICES A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, AS NECESSARY FOR A COMPLETE INSTALLATION. COLOR OF DEVICES AND PLATES SHALL BE SELECTED BY LSD&C. THE DEVICES SHALL BE OF THE TYPES AND RATINGS LISTED, OR EQUALS BY ARROW -HART, HUBBELL OR PASS & SEYMOUR. WEATHERPROOF GFI RECEPTACLES SHALL BE INSTALLED WHERE SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 1. SINGLE POLE TOGGLE SWITCHES: 20 AMP,120-277V: PASS & SEYMOUR "PS2OAC1W" 2. THREE WAY SWITCHES: 20 AMP, 120-277V: PASS & SEYMOUR "PS2OAC3W" 3. DUPLEX RECEPTACLES: 20 AMP, 125V: PASS & SEYMOUR "CRB5362W" 4. GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTING RECEPTACLES: 20 AMP, 125V: PASS & SEYMOUR "2097W" B. ALL DEVICE COVERPLATES SHALL BE PASS AND SEYMOUR SERIES "TP" OR EQUAL. SECTION 2828 LOSED SWITCHES Ain CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. SAFETY AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE HEAVY DUTY TYPE, QUICK -MAKE, QUICK -BREAK FUSED OR NON -FUSIBLE WITH RATINGS AND SIZES AS NOTED ON PLANS AND REQUIRED BY CODES. B. SWITCHES SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF IN OUTDOOR LOCATIONS OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. C. AT SERVICE ENTRANCE, DISCONNECT SHALL BEAR THE MANUFACTURER'S LABEL INDICATING THE EQUIPMENT IS UL/ULC RATED FOR APPLICATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL CODES. D. CUTLER HAMMER OR EQUAL MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS, LESS OVERLOAD PROTECTION HEATERS, ARE TO BE USED AS A DISCONNECTING MEANS ONLY WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS FOR MOTORS ABOVE 1 1/2 HP AT 120 VOLTS AND 2 HP AT 240 VOLTS THAT DO NOT REQUIRE AUXILIARY CONTROL MOTORS THAT ARE BELOW THE 1 1/2 HP AT 120 VOLTS, 2 HP AT 240 VOLTS, WATER HEATER AND ROLLING GRILLE ARE TO BE PROVIDED WITH HUBBELL "HBL-1221, OR 1222" AC SWITCH. E. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH RESET TYPE OVERLOADS THAT CLOSELY MATCH MOTOR NAMEPLATE RATING. AND SHALL BE ELECTRICALLY HELD (MINIMUM SIZE #1 IN A NEMA 1 ENCLOSURE) AND BE USED FOR ALL SINGLE PHASE AND THREE PHASE MOTORS RATED ABOVE 1/2 HP THAT REQUIRE AUXILIARY CONTROL. PROVIDE CONTROL DEVICES (AUXILIARY CONTACTS, TRANSFORMERS, H -O -A, ETC.) IN STARTERS AS REQUIRED FOR INTERLOCKS. COORDINATE ALL CONTROL DEVICES WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR. COMBINATION STARTER/DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL CONTAIN FUSIBLE SWITCHES AND ONLY USED WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS. SECTION 285100 -INTERIOR LIGHTING A. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS AS SHOWN ON THE FIXTURE SCHEDULE. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS ARE SUPPLIED BY LSD&C, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR IS TO REPLACE ALL NON -WORKING LAMPS PRIOR TO MERCHANDISE DATE AND IS TO INCLUDE COST IN BID. B. ALL RECESSED INCANDESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH APPLICABLE THERMAL PROTECTION. C. WHERE FLUORESCENT FIXTURES ARE SPECIFIED, THEY SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH HIGH POWER FACTOR RAPID START BALLASTS, U.L./U.L.0 LISTED, C.B.M. CERTIFIED, AND E.T.L APPROVED WITH EFFICIENCY FACTORS IN ACCORDANCE WITH "THE ENERGY POLICY ACT OF 1992" AND ITS AMENDMENTS AS A MINIMUM. D. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ADDITIONAL AUXILIARY SUPPORT STEEL HANGER WIRES ADEQUATELY SIZED TO SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE FIXTURE FASTENED TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE (MINIMUM TWO PER FIXTURE) FOR ALL FIXTURES IN LAY -IN CEILINGS AND OTHER FIXTURES AS REQUIRED BY THE LANDLORD AND LOCAL CODE OFFICIALS. E. FURNISH AND INSTALL APPLICABLE FIRE RATED DRYWALL BOXES OVER RECESSED FIXTURES IN FIRE RATED CEILINGS AS REQUIRED BY CODES. FIELD COORDINATE AS REQUIRED TO AVOID CONFLICTS. 419,47. 4.,c),;4117,4 M -Engineering 750 Brooksedge Blvd. Westerville, Ohio 43081 phone: 614.839.4639 fax: 614.839.2222 www.mengineering.us.com STORE DES co M O O cf) E .0 U A ca ca CL a) E J a) a) I--- O O 0 L17 eI' r Q0 a) c O -05 Q a) I- 01 y w C D. W ›C CC wZ 111 tn 0 .40g tri O O S y W - w a C V) W y Z Q 0 0 O Z w Q U U 00 � 0 0 OW W m C 0 < W O ¢ W w a CD .cc �_., F- y j/, W 11 • O La F- 0 w 1 WW C /r .0 c> Sc W C 1 N cla Z N W 0 O W = Z Cd :E 0 Q W ,IJZ w5O m W .- = W y 3 a O W Q y- W 0 y o 3 O O z= w Z 3 Q cc 0 O C O y U N i U 0 D= U CO S NF1- La = = 0 Ow Z O D. F� y d H C0.1 d 0 Q e PROJECT INFORMATION: W V W o� 1=== co 0 0 z am • CD MC Oo--W iLi ii O:7i � WO C VO � Z = W U O = a � �= y W U U _, U ~ 0'6-W a Z N0 a�z01 y W Q j -: r O F- y J 0 QO2¢ Z.25 l,y3 sc = E v NW I 0 0 C= W � W 1- y W = o=Frim Q W W W y O O La 0. Z ZZ Zt0o 0 0 aD V N Q N W oo 0 W Y E F W= F=- Q 0 4 y 0 U Z 0 O00 � (n 0 REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 2 2 2017 DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 CDH CDH DFG ELECTRICAL PE IFI TI S C CA ONS DRAWING NUMBER: a 1 1 GENERAL NOTES ALL NOTES INCLUDED HEREIN ARE MADE PART OF EACH AND ALL MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING SECTIONS OF WORK. 1. REFER TO LANDLORD'S SPECIFICATIONS AND TENANT DESIGN CRITERIA FOR NECESSARY INFORMATION AND COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. 2. THE ABBREVIATION LSD&C WHEREVER IT APPEARS IN THE DRAWINGS, SHALL REFER TO "LBRANDS DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION". ANY REFERENCE TO TENANT, BRAND SPECIFIC (VICTORIA'S SECRET, ETC.) OR FURNISHED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE REFERS TO LSD&C. 3. ANY DISCREPANCY BETWEEN LSD&C DRAWINGS AND TENANT CRITERIA, LSD&C DRAWINGS SHALL TAKE PRECEDENCE. 4. THE DRAWINGS ARE ESSENTIALLY DIAGRAMMATIC TO THE EXTENT THAT ALL INSTALLED ITEMS AND LOCATIONS ARE NOT EXACTLY PLACED AND ARE NOT TO BE SCALED. 5. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL RELATED PERMITS AND INSPECTION FEES. 6. BEFORE COMMENCING ANY WORK, CONTRACTORS SHALL REVIEW THE LATEST NATIONAL, STATE AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING LANDLORD CRITERIA AND PERFORM THE WORK IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE. IN CASE OF CONFLICT THE STRICTER REQUIREMENTS WILL PREVAIL NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION SHALL BE MADE FOR ANY CHANGE ORDERS DUE TO CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO VISIT THE JOBSITE AND/OR PREDETERMINE ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE SUBMITTING HIS BID. A. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FIELD VERIFICATION OF ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID. FOR THE PURPOSE OF SURVEYING EXISTING CONDITIONS, WHICH MAY AFFECT THE WORK TO BE DONE UNDER THIS SECTION, ANY DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE IMMEDIATELY REPORTED TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR, LSD&C OR THE LANDLORD'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE FOR CLARIFICATION. B. AFTER BID, ANY QUESTIONS RELATING TO SPECIFIC M, E, OR P ISSUES ARE TO BE DIRECTED AS RFI'S THROUGH THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER. C. SHOULD THE SPACE HAVE BEEN INACCESSIBLE FOR INSPECTION CONTRACTOR MUST INDICATE SO ON HIS BID. B. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S FIRE SPRINKLER SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL DESIGN AND INSTALL FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM CONFORMING TO LANDLORD'S CRITERIA, TENANT'S REQUIREMENTS AND PER LOCAL CODES AND NFPA STANDARDS. 9. THE CONTRACTOR, WITHIN FIFTEEN (15) DAYS OF THE AWARD OF THE CONTRACT, SHALL SUBMIT TO THE OWNER, SIX (6) COPIES OF A COMPLETE LIST OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PROPOSED FOR THE JOB INCLUDING ALL DATA, PART NUMBERS, RATING CAPACITY, SIZE, DIMENSIONS, ELECTRICAL DATA, GRADE, MANUFACTURER, AND ANY OTHER DESCRIPTIVE DATA FOR ALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS THAT DEVIATE FROM SPECIFIED ITEMS. ANY DELAYS OR COSTS DUE TO THESE DEVIATIONS, WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. 10. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSAL OF ALL UNUSED OR ABANDONED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT, AND ITS REMOVAL OFF THE LANDLORD'S PREMISES. 11. OWNER RESERVES THE RIGHT TO HAVE CONSTRUCTION REVIEWED BY AN OUTSIDE CONSULTANT PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF THE PROJECT. 12. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP RELATED TO HIS WORK FOR A MINIMUM PERIOD OF ONE YEAR FROM THE DATE WHICH THE OWNER ACCEPTS THE PROJECT. THE CONTRACTOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER OR TENANT SHALL CORRECT ANY DEFECTS IN MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP DURING THIS GUARANTEE PERIOD. 13. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE AND ENSURE A CLEAN INSTALLATION ESPECIALLY IN EXPOSED CEILING AREAS. THE FINAL APPROVAL OF THIS WORK WILL BE ISSUED BY LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER. 14. PROVIDE ONE SETS OF "AS -BUILT" DRAWINGS INTO PLAN TUBE AND ONE BOUND SETS OF ALL OPERATIONS MANUALS, DIAGRAMS, SERVICE CONTRACTS AND GUARANTEES IN BINDER TO STORE MANAGER. A REPORT PREPARED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS BY AN INDEPENDENT AIR BALANCE CONTRACTOR, HIRED BY GC, MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE CLOSE-OUT PACKAGE. HVAC GENERAL NOTES 1. THESE PLANS MAY BE USED FOR CONSTRUCTION ONLY AFTER APPROVAL IS OBTAINED FROM THE BUILDING DEPARTMENT MECHANICAL PLAN CHECK DIVISION AND THAT DIVISION'S STAMPED APPROVAL AND AUTHORIZED SIGNATURE APPEAR ON THE PLANS. 2. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH ALL TRADES INCLUDED BUT NOT LIMITED TO ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION AND STRUCTURAL CONTRACTORS. INSTALL ALL WORK TO CLEAR NEW AND EXISTING ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL MEMBERS. NO ITEM SUCH AS PIPE, DUCT, ETC. IS TO COME IN CONTACT WITH ANY EQUIPMENT. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR DEMOLITION WORK. GRILLE, REGISTER, AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE MARK (VAV-#) MARK SD -6 SD -7 SD -8 SD -9 SD -10 MANUFACTURER TITUS TITUS TITUS TITUS TITUS MODEL S300 OMNI OMNI OMNI TDC NECK SIZE (L"XW") 20"X4" S. P S. P S: P 9" '" / :"0 FRAME SIZE (L"XW") 22"X6" 12 ` , 2" 12 ` , 2" 24 , 4" 12 , 2" FRAME TYPE SURFACE N N N TYPE G2 FINISH* TITUS #26 TI S t' 6 TI S ;' :4 TI S 4 TI S 6 NOISE CRITERIA LEVEL <30 <30 <30 <30 <30 ACCESSORIES 1,9 4,6 4,6 2,6 4,6 NOTES 3 1 1 1 6 ELECTRIC HEATER VOLTAGE ACCESSORIES: 1. OBD -OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER. 2. LQD-LOCKING QUADRANT VOLUME DAMPER (PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR). SEE MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 233300.D.1. 3. CFD-RUSKIN MODEL CFD OR CFDR FIRE DAMPER WITH VOLUME CONTROL 4. YRD-YOUNG'S REGULATOR REMOTE DAMPER WITH CABLE CONTROL SYSTEM (MODEL 5020 -CC) (PROVIDED BY MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR). 5. ASPI-INSULATED ENGINEERED LINEAR SLOT PLENUM FOR CONCEALED MOUNTING PROVIDED BY FACTORY. 6. TRM-RAPID MOUNT FRAME FOR GYPSUM CEILINGS. 7. FURNISH WITH TYPE WW ENDCAPS AND PATTERN CONTROLLERS. 8. FURNISH WITH RB220 SIGHT BAFFLE, TYPE WW ENDCAPS, AND PATTERN CONTROLLERS. 9. PROVIDE WITH ROUND DUCT ADAPTER. NOTES: 1. 4 -WAY DIFFUSER (UNLESS 1 -WAY, 2 -WAY OR 3 -WAY AS INDICATED ON PLAN). 2. INSTALL BLADES FACING THE BACK OF STORE, CABINET, OR WALL. 3. GC TO FIELD PAINT DIFFUSERS TO MATCH CEILING OR WALL WITH ENAMEL FINISH. 4. PROVIDE WITH GYP BOARD FRAME. 5. MC SHALL PROVIDE SQUARE TO ROUND ADAPTOR. 6. BORDER TYPE 3 IS LAY -IN STYLE. PATTERN TYPE G2 IS 2 -WAY ADJACENT THROW PATTERN FOR SQUARE DIFFUSERS. PATTERN A3 IS A 3 -WAY THROW PATTERN. INSTALL DIFFUSERS SO THROW IS AWAY FROM NEAREST WALLS. * FINISH REFERENCE: TITUS #26 IS WHITE; TITUS #84 IS BLACK; PRICE #B12 IS WHITE; PRICE #B17 IS BLACK VAV TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE MARK (VAV-#) 1 CFSD COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER TRANE PACKAGE NUMBER NS / ABD ACCESS PANEL MANUFACTURER TRANE ELECTRONICALLY OPERATED DAMPER oD S) -4-w- MODEL VCCF014 EXHAUST AIR REGISTER O HUMIDISTAT INLET SIZE 14 S OR R LINEAR DIFFUSER S=SUPPLY, R=RETURN C = MAXIMUM AIR FLOW (CFM) 900 NEW DUCTWORK MINIMUM AIR FLOW (CFM) 300 EXISTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN ILI ---4 ACCESSORIES 1-3 , M�tNW`- FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT 4'-0" MAX. NOTES 1 ELECTRIC HEAT POWER INPUT (WATTS) 10,000 HEAT OUTPUT (BTU/HR) 37,560 STAGES 2 ELECTRIC HEATER VOLTAGE 208/3/60 ELECTRICAL VOLTS/0/HZ (WIRES) 208/3/60 (3) FAN MOTOR AMPS (VOLTS/0) --- ELECTRIC HEATER AMPS (VOLTS/0) 30.5 (208/3) MCA (AMPS) 38.1 MOCP (AMPS) 40 APPROX. WEIGHT (LBS) 60 ACCESSORIES 1-2 NOTES 1 ACCESSORIES ("S" INDICATES STANDARD; "0" INDICATES OPTIONAL): 1. S -FACTORY PROVIDED DISCONNECT SWITCH. 2. S -FACTORY PROVIDED CONTROL TRANSFORMER. 3. S -FACTORY FURNISHED HEATING/COOLING CHANGEOVER SENSOR. NOTES: 1. REFER TO CONTROL WIRING SCHEMATICS FOR ANY FIELD INSTALLED CONTROL DEVICES NOT FACTORY INSTALLED. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL NEW PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTAT (HONEYWELL T7200 OR EQUAL) TO BE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THE HVAC EQUIPMENT. MOUNT AT 48" ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR WHERE INDICATED ON THE PLANS, COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH TENANT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL AND WIRE THERMOSTATS AND SENSORS PER THE HONEYWELL'S PRINTED INSTRUCTIONS AND THEN WIRE THERMOSTAT TO THE HVAC EQUIPMENT PER HVAC EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S PRINTED INSTRUCTIONS ENSURING A COMPLETE AND OPERABLE SYSTEM. DUCTWORK BETWEEN TERMINAL UNIT AND LANDLORD'S DUCTWORK SHALL BE MEDIUM PRESSURE. 0 VARIABLE -AIR -VOLUME (VAV) BOX FURNISHED BY OWNER, AND INSTALLED BY THE CONTRACTOR. VAV BOX SHALL BE CONNECTED TO THE LANDLORDS MAIN AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM WITH DUCT SIZES AS SHOWN. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY AIR QUANTITY, SYSTEM PRESSURE AND DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE BEFORE INSTALLATION. VERIFY BOX INLET AND OUTLET CONNECTION SIZES AND INCLUDE DUCT TRANSITIONS AND FLEX DUCT CONNECTIONS IN BID. SEE VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BOX SCHEDULE FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. M -Engineering 750 Brooksedge Blvd. Westerville, Ohio 43081 phone: 614.839.4639 fax: 614.839.2222 www.mengineering.us.com SEP 1 4 2017 AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE-VS/PINK 05N-M0101-BOO-SCHD 02/22/201 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES 00N-M0101-E01-SCHD MECHANICAL PLAN KEYNOTES 03/27/I5 z 0 F- U D F - z (9 0 U z U) w 0 w 0 F- O O r CO 0 s m 4. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXACT FIXTURE LOCATION. 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE CUT SHEETS TO LSD&C FOR ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR THAT DEVIATE FROM SPECIFIED ITEM FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE PURCHASE OF ANY SUCH EQUIPMENT OR DEVICES. 6. HVAC CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO INQUIRE WITH THE LANDLORD'S REPRESENTATIVE ON ANY SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM IN USE AT THE MALL AT THE TIME OF THE BID. IF THE SAID SYSTEM IS NOT ADEQUATELY DESCRIBED ON THE DRAWINGS, THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO INFORM THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND INCLUDE THE COST AS A SEPARATE LINE ITEM IN THE BID. NO ADDITIONAL MONEYS SHALL BE AWARDED FOR TIE-IN REQUIREMENTS TO A LANDLORD'S SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM THAT IS IN EXISTENCE AT THE TIME OF THE BID, WITHOUT HAVING IDENTIFIED A SEPARATE LINE ITEM FOR THE SMOKE EVACUATION SYSTEM AT THE TIME OF THE BID. 7. ACCESS TO ALL COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT MUST BE PROVIDED TO MEET CODE AND SERVICE/MAINTENANCE EASE. 8. PRIOR TO STARTUP OF HVAC EQUIPMENT, MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR WILL CONFIRM WITH ONE OF THE LISTED HVAC MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVES THAT CORRECT POWER FOR EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN PROVIDED TO LSD&C PROVIDED HVAC UNITS AND HAS BEEN TURNED ON FOR A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS. LSD&C RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CHECK CONSTRUCTION COMPLIANCE WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. SHOULD THE OWNER FIND CORRECTIVE WORK TO BE NECESSARY, HE WILL NOTIFY CONTRACTOR OF SUCH WORK IN WRITING AND EXPECT COMPLIANCE PERFORMED WITH DUE DILIGENCE. IF ANY CORRECTIVE WORK IS DEEMED TO BE NECESSARY, THE COST OF REINSPECTIONS WILL BE BORNE BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR WILL THEN ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS POWERED FOR A MINIMUM OF 24 HRS BEFORE START-UP. IF WORK IS REQUIRED BY LSD&C IN ORDER TO IMPROVE, CHANGE OR CORRECT AIR CONDITIONING OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS DUE TO: PART MALFUNCTION, WARRANTY OR OTHER INABILITY TO PROVIDE THE COMFORT CONDITIONS REQUIRED BY THE STORE, CONTRACTOR SHALL BE DIRECTED BY LSD&C TO ADDRESS THIS WORK IN A TIMELY MANNER. IF IT BECOMES EVIDENT THAT THE CONTRACTOR CANNOT ACCOMPLISH THE TASK, THEN AFTER 72 HOURS OF WRITTEN NOTICE THE OWNER MAY, AT HIS DISCRETION, TAKE OVER SUCH WORK AND BACK CHARGE THE CONTRACTOR FOR ANY CORRECTIVE WORK THAT WAS REQUIRED DUE TO LACK OF PERFORMANCE, WORKMANSHIP AND/OR ADHERENCE TO PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 10. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE PROPER WORKING ORDER OF THE SYSTEM(S) AND MAKE ANY ADJUSTMENTS AS REQUIRED. ABBREVIATIONS - MECHANICAL AABC AFF AHU APD ASHRAE 11. PROVIDE FILTER CHANGES THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED FOR ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE FILTER CHANGES AT LEAST TWICE MONTHLY ONCE STARTED, PRIOR TO TEST AND BALANCE, AND LASTLY, PRIOR TO MERCHANDISING. ANY EQUIPMENT OR DUCTWORK THAT BECOMES SOILED DUE TO A LACK OF FILTER CHANGES, AS DETERMINED SOLELY BY THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER, SHALL BE CORRECTED ON BEHALF OF THE CONTRACTOR AND CHANGES BILLED TO THE CONTRACTOR. 12. NOTES TO EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES USE THE WORDS "FURNISH" AND "PROVIDE". WHERE THE WORD "FURNISH" IS USED, SOME FIELD INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACTOR. WHERE THE WORD "PROVIDE" IS USED, NO FIELD INSTALLATION IS REQUIRED AS THE DEVICES OR ACCESSORIES ARE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY THE MANUFACTURER AS PART OF THE EQUIPMENT WHEN SHIPPED. 13. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL EQUIPMENT, MATERIAL, LABOR AND SUPERVISION NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS AS OUTLINED HEREIN. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET M04.01. 14. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD MEASURE EXISTING ROOF CURB(S) FOR CURB ADAPTER(S), WHERE APPLICABLE, AND SHALL SUPPLY DIMENSIONS TO LSD&C HVAC SUPPLIER PRIOR TO START OF CONSTRUCTION. AMERICAN AIR BALANCE COUNCIL ABOVE FINISH FLOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT AIR PRESSURE DROP AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR CONDITIONING ENGINEERS FPM FPS FV GAL GALV GC GPM BDD BHP BLDG BOD BOP BTUH BACK DRAFT DAMPERS BRAKE HORSEPOWER BUILDING BOTTOM OF DUCT BOTTOM OF PIPE BRITISH THERMAL UNIT PER HOUR HD HP HTR HVAC 15. ALL HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE CLEARLY IDENTIFIED WITH TENANT'S NAME, SPACE NUMBER AND UNIT DESIGNATION AND SHALL BE STENCILED IN 4" HIGH BLACK LETTERS. 16. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NEW DUCTWORK INCLUDING INSTALLATION OF OWNER SUPPLIED PLENUM BOOTS, SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSERS, AND RETURN AIR GRILLES. (SEE AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE ON THIS SHEET). A. ALL MATERIAL SHALL BE NEW AND OF COMMERCIAL GRADE AND BEAR UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORY AND UNION LABELS WHERE SUCH LABELING APPLIES. B. ALL PLENUMS SHALL BE FABRICATED FROM GALVANIZED SHEET METAL OF THE APPROPRIATE GAUGE AND BE INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF 1" THICK, 0.75 LB/CU.FT. DENSITY FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALUMINUM FOIL BACKED VAPOR BARRIER. C. WHERE DESIGNATED, BRANCHES FROM MAIN LOW VELOCITY TRUNK DUCTWORK SHALL BE FURNISHED WITH SPLITTERS, DAMPERS OR SIMILAR BALANCING DEVICES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE STANDARDS OF SMACNA. D. ALL DUCTS FOR FINAL CONNECTION TO DIFFUSERS SHALL BE CLASS 1. UL LISTED (SL 181) FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT NOT TO EXCEED 4'-0" IN LENGTH (THERMAFLEX, GLASFLEX, OR APPROVED EQUAL). E. SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK SHALL BE LINED AND WITH CODE COMPLYING BLANKET INSULATION. ACOUSTICAL LINER MAY BE PROVIDED. ALL MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH N.F.P.A. 90A AND 90B. SEE SPECIFICATIONS ON SHEET M05.01. F. HANGER WIRES, DUCT STRAPS, FASTENING DEVICES, ETC. SHALL BE FASTENED TO THE STEEL JOISTS AND/OR BEAMS ABOVE. DO NOT ATTACH ANY SUCH ITEMS DIRECTLY TO FLOOR SLABS, PIPING, OTHER DUCTWORK, ELECTRICAL CONDUITS OR THE ROOF DECK ABOVE. G. ADDITIONAL FIRE DAMPERS SHOULD BE INSTALLED AS REQUIRED BY ANY APPLICABLE CODES AND/OR JURISDICTIONAL AUTHORITIES. 17. SEAL AROUND PIPES AND DUCTS PENETRATING FIRE SEPARATIONS WITH LISTED AND APPROVED FIRE SEAL MATERIAL ONLY LISTED AND APPROVED SEALANTS AND METHODS FOR THE SPECIFIC USE WILL BE PERMITTED. 18. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL TEMPERATURE SENSORS AND AS SHOWN ON THE PLAN (VERIFY LOCAL CODES. IF PLAN LOCATION IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, IMMEDIATELY CONTACT LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR DIRECTION.) 19. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY PRESSURE CHECK AND CHARGE ALL REFRIGERANT SYSTEMS (IF REQUIRED). 20. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ENGAGE THE SERVICES OF AN INDEPENDENT, AIR/WATER BALANCING COMPANY THAT IS A NEBB CERTIFIED CONTRACTOR OR HAS AN AABC CERTIFIED TEST & BALANCE ENGINEER. THIS COMPANY SHALL PERFORM THE BALANCING OF AIR/WATER SYSTEM(S) AND MAKE ANY REQUIRED ADJUSTMENTS TO ENSURE PROPER WORKING ORDER. UPON COMPLETION, THE BALANCING COMPANY SHALL PROVIDE A COMPLETE SYSTEM REPORT. CFM CHWR CHWS CO2 CONTR COP CWR CWS DB DEG DIA DWG DX EA EAG EAT EC EER EF EFF EOD ESP EWT F FCU FLA FLEX CAPACITY CEILING DIFFUSER OR CONDENSATE DRAIN CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CHILLED WATER RETURN CHILLED WATER SUPPLY CARBON DIOXIDE CONTRACTOR COEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE CONDENSER WATER RETURN CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY HWR HWS FEET PER MINUTE FEET PER SECOND FACE VELOCITY GALLONS GALVANIZED GENERAL CONTRACTOR GALLONS PER MINUTE HEAD HORSEPOWER HEATER HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING HOT WATER RETURN HOT WATER SUPPLY OA OAT OBD OD OPNG P PD PLBG PSI RA RG RH RPM INSIDE DIAMETER INCH SA SENS SF SMACNA DRY BULB, DECIBEL DEGREE DIAMETER DRAWING DIRECT EXPANSION EXHAUST AIR EXHAUST AIR GRILLE ENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO EXHAUST FAN EFFICIENCY ELECTRICALLY OPERATED DAMPER EXTERNAL STATIC PRESSURE ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE LL L LB LD LF LWT MAX MBH MCA MECH MFR MOCP FAHRENHEIT FAN COIL UNIT FULL LOAD AMPS FLEXIBLE KILOWATT LANDLORD LONG POUND LINEAR DIFFUSER LINEAR FEET LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MAXIMUM THOUSAND BTU PER HOUR MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MECHANICAL MANUFACTURER MAXIMUM OVER CURRENT PROTECTION MOUNTED MOTOR NEBB NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU N.C. NORMALLY CLOSED N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT N.O. NORMALLY OPEN N/A NOT APPLICABLE SP SQ SQ FT SS TEMP TSP TSTAT TYP UC UH UON OUTDOOR AIR OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE OPPOSED BLADE DAMPER OUTSIDE DIMENSION OR DIAMETER OPENING PUMP PRESSURE DROP PLUMBING POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH RETURN AIR RETURN GRILLE RELATIVE HUMIDITY REVOLUTIONS PER MINUTE } W F Z Z d Lal C W L. ZLO Ny, D Q J 0 Z N �y Moog C) = 0 0 ▪ ce • O U CC W 4 W At z z CO O Z y Z w - CO • C) 3 w ce ce ▪ 6 W 0 • NCC fl) 10 O - W 2 Z co W = m lrH W Z W O m ▪ v'3a0 cn • Q N W Fe z 0 3 O Z t Z C Q .1= O 0 O O U •N • C 2 ,L.;4 1- W C 2 0 O W Z p n. 1-- CC • H U a C 6 R ii" ZOyozo}ONamUaQ zJ 0 W I- W :,...,..-":",,,,::: WGaQZO 2 W =yC La OdOH W2 W ZWZzit ago= a�K C W 4 H W 0QW ZKO t5 0 - U � laci V 1:14 1:1 axw~dWyayato�o=�aO_ .. • .- W= w V Bo=L,_: 0 a yr- v i 3 U 41 w= z _ • ,� W - W Q W O: = a Q z a W H W. y y y .,....c.` • y ▪ 6 W O S m O C W W W Q= WW W= 3}= W a O 0 0 C Z O Z =0!. Z O O Z K } Z 3w g� o< z 3= 33 0 0 O Z= N V y = G W Z N H U a c z W 3 W.}d=.W 2 • dWC 001JW W SUPPLY AIR SENSIBLE SUPPLY FAN SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION STATIC PRESSURE SQUARE SQUARE FEET STAINLESS STEEL TEMPERATURE TOTAL STATIC PRESSURE THERMOSTAT TYPICAL NOTE: ALL RETURN AIR PATHS BACK TO THE LANDLORD'S RTU TO BE LEFT OPEN. PROVIDE BURGLAR SCREEN OVER OPENINGS. VAV VENT VFD VTR UNDERCUT UNIT HEATER UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME VENTILATION, VENTILATOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE VENT THRU ROOF WATT WET BULB WATER GAUGE WATER PRESSURE DROP WEIGHT NOT TO SCALE NOTE: (N)=NEW, (R)=RELOCATED, (E)=EXISTING SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER CFSD COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER FD RETURN AIR GRILLE / ABD ACCESS PANEL Q • ELECTRONICALLY OPERATED DAMPER oD S) -4-w- UNDERCUT DOOR Co EXHAUST AIR REGISTER O HUMIDISTAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR S OR R LINEAR DIFFUSER S=SUPPLY, R=RETURN C = DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR -0-4- NEW DUCTWORK EXISTING DUCTWORK TO REMAIN ILI ---4 �� - EXISTING DUCTWORK TO BE REMOVED , M�tNW`- FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT 4'-0" MAX. NOTE: (N)=NEW, (R)=RELOCATED, (E)=EXISTING REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 222017 PERMIT CENTER nATr iccl irn. IJ IG waves. v.'/ I .J/ I i DESIGNED BY: GMT DRAWN BY: GMT CHECKED BY: BMM NOTE: ANY EXISTING DEMISING WALL OPENINGS ARE TO REMAIN. NOTE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CEILING HEIGHTS DRAWING NUMBER: MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES OON 0101 -J00 -NOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS LEGEND REMOTE STORAGE MECHANICAL PLAN OON-M0101-J00-LGND MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER CFSD COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER FD FIRE DAMPER ABD • AUTOMATIC BACKDRAFT DAMPER Q ELECTRONICALLY OPERATED DAMPER oD S) -4-w- UNDERCUT DOOR Co CARBON DIOXIDE SENSOR O HUMIDISTAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR O THERMOSTAT X-® DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR -0-4- POINT OF CONNECTION REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA SEP 222017 PERMIT CENTER nATr iccl irn. IJ IG waves. v.'/ I .J/ I i DESIGNED BY: GMT DRAWN BY: GMT CHECKED BY: BMM NOTE: ANY EXISTING DEMISING WALL OPENINGS ARE TO REMAIN. NOTE: SEE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CEILING HEIGHTS DRAWING NUMBER: MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES OON 0101 -J00 -NOTE ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS LEGEND REMOTE STORAGE MECHANICAL PLAN OON-M0101-J00-LGND SECTION 230000: BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. NOTE 1. THE ABBREVIATION LSD&C WHEREVER IT APPEA HESE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS SHALL REFER TO "LIMITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION". ANY REFERENCE TO TENANT'S PROJECT MANAGER OR FURNISHED BY ANY OF THE ABOVE REFERS TO LSD&C. 2. DRAWINGS AND GENERAL PROVISIONS OF CONTRACT, INCLUDING GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AND ALL OTHER SPECIFICATION SECTION' APPLY TO THIS AND THE OTHER SECTIONS OF DIVISION 15. 3. THE CONTRACTOR FOR THIS DIVISION OF WORK IS REQUIRED TO READ THE SPECIFICATIONS AND REVIEW DRAWINGS FOR ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK AND IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THIS WORK AND THE WORK OF HIS SUBCONTRACTORS WITH ALL DIVISIONS OF WORK. IT IS THIS CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE HIS SUBCONTRACTORS WITH A COMPLETE SET OF BID DOCUMENTS. 4. THIS CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SCHEDULING THE COMPLETION AND INSPECTION OF THIS WORK TO COMPLY WITH THE LSD&C SCHEDULE AN THE PROJECT COMPLETION DATE. 5. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID TO DETERMINE CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK. ANY ITEMS WHICH ARE NO COVERED IN THE BID DOCUMENTS OR ANY PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE LISTED SEPARATELY AND QUALIFIED IN THE CONTRACTORS BID. SUBMITTAL OF BID SHALL SERVE AS EVIDENCE OF KNOWLEDGE OF EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ANY MODIFICATIONS WHICH ARE REQUIRED TO MEET THE INTENT OF THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. FAILURE TO VISIT THE SITE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY IN PERFORMANCE OF HIS WORK. 6. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON SHEET M04.01 OF THIS SET FOR INFORMATION IN REGARD TO RESPONSIBILITY OF WORK OR ITEMS WHICH MAY AFFECT THE BID. B. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION, INCIDENTALS AND DETAILS NECESSARY TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE MECHANICAL SYSTEM AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS. ALL WORK NOT SPECIFICALLY NOTED AS BEING BY THE LANDLORD OR LSD&C SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THIS CONTRACTOR. CLOSELY COORDINATE THE ENTIRE INSTALLATION WITH THE LANDLORD AND THE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER, AS REQUIRED. 2. THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ARE INTENDED TO SUPPLEMENT EACH OTHER AND ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR CALLED FOR IN ONE SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED EVEN THOUGH NOT SPECIFICALLY MENTIONED IN BOTH. ANY MATERIAL OR LABOR WHICH IS NEITHER SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS NOR CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, BUT WHICH IS OBVIOUSLY NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE WORK, AND WHICH IS USUALLY INCLUDED IN WORK OF SIMILAR CHARACTER, SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS PART OF CONTRACT. 3. WHERE THE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS CALL FOR ITEMS WHICH EXCEED CODES OR THE LANDLORD'S TENANT CRITERIA, THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING THE SYSTEM WITH THE MORE STRINGENT REQUIREMENTS AS DESIGNED AND DESCRIBED ON THESE DRAWINGS, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. ALL WORK IN THIS SECTION SHALL BE INSTALLED SO AS TO BE READILY ACCESSIBLE FOR OPERATING, SERVICING, MAINTAINING, AND REPAIRING. THI CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING SUFFICIENT SERVICE ACCESS TO ALL EQUIPMENT. 5. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN A NEAT PROFESSIONAL MANNER USING GOOD CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES. 6. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE, MATERIALS, PRODUCTS, AND EQUIPMENT, INCLUDING ALL COMPONENTS THEREOF, SHALL BE NEW, UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES/UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES OF CANADA LISTED AND LABELED AND SIZED IN CONFORMITY WITH REQUIREMENTS OF STATE/PROVINCE AND LOCAL CODES, WHICHEVER IS MORE STRINGENT. 7. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL DO ALL CUTTING, CHASING AND CHANNELING REQUIRED FOR ANY WORK UNDER THIS DIVISION. CUTTING SHALL HAVE PRIO APPROVAL BY LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER AND THE LANDLORD. ALL PATCHING SHALL BE BY G.C. AND SHALL MATCH THE SURROUNDING SURFACES. 8. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL FINAL MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED FOR A COMPLETE AND OPERATING SYSTEM. a. THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL NOTIFY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CONTACT LSD&C'S DESIGNATED COMPANY (EMS) FOR START-UP. (REFER TO SHEET M01.01). • CODES 1. ALL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO THE LANDLORDS' CRITERIA, THE STATE'S/PROVINCE'S, COUNTY'S, CITY'S AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES, SAFETY AND HEALTH CODES, NFPA/NFPAC CODES, ENERGY CODES AND ALL OTHER APPLICABLE CODES AND REQUIREMENTS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHA INQUIRE INTO AND COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE CODES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE ANY CHANGES REQUIRED BY CODES IN THE BID AND IF THESE CHANGES ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE BID, THEY MUST BE QUALIFIED AS A SEPARATE LINE ITEM IN THE BID. AFTER CONTRACT IS AWARDED, CHANGE ORDERS FOR INCREASED COSTS DUE TO CODE ISSUES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED BY LSD&C. . LICENSES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS & FEES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN AND PAY FOR ALL LICENSES, PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, AND FEES REQUIRED OR RELATED TO HIS WORK. 2. FURNISH TO THE LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER ALL CERTIFICATES OF INSPECTION AND FINAL INSPECTION APPROVAL AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. E. TRADE NAMES, MANUFACTURERS AND SHOP DRAWINGS 1. WHERE TRADE NAMES AND MANUFACTURERS ARE USED ON THE DRAWINGS OR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, THE EXACT EQUIPMENT SHALL BE USED AS MINIMUM FOR THE BASE BID. MANUFACTURERS CONSIDERED AS AN EQUAL OR BETTER IN ALL ASPECTS TO THAT SPECIFIED WILL BE SUBJECT TO APPROVAL IN WRITING BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER THROUGH SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCESS FOR ACCEPTANCE PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. TH USE OF ANY UNAUTHORIZED EQUIPMENT SHALL BE REPLACED AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. 2. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT ALL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES TO LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER FOR APPROVAL. SUBMISSIONS SHALL BE MADE EARLY ENOUGH IN PROJECT TO ALLOW FOUR (4) WORKING DAYS FOR LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER'S REVIEW WITHOUT CAUSING DELAYS OR CONFLICTS TO THE JOB'S PROGRESS. SUBMITTALS SHALL BEAR THE STAMP AND/OR THE SIGNATURE OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE SUBCONTRACTOR SHOWING THAT THEY HAVE REVIEWED AND CONFIRMED THAT THE SUBMITTALS ARE IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR INDICATE WHERE EXCEPTIONS HAVE BEEN TAKEN. • GUARANTEE 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL GUARANTEE ALL MATERIALS AND WORK PROVIDED UNDER HIS CONTRACT AND SHALL MAKE GOOD, REPAIR OR REPLACE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE, ANY DEFECTIVE WORK, MATERIAL, OR EQUIPMENT WHICH MAY BE DISCOVERED WITHIN A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE (IN WRITING) OF THE INSTALLATION BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER. EXTENDED WARRANTIES ARE AS SPECIFIED WITH INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT. 2. THE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER SHALL GUARANTEE AND PROVIDE A 12 MONTH GUARANTEE TO LSD&C FROM THE DATE OF ACCEPTANCE. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL WARRANTY THE INSTALLATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT AND WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE AND/OR MALFUNCTION CAUSED BY THE INSTALLATION. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT BEAR ADDITIONAL WARRANTIES BEYOND A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM. • RECORD DRAWINGS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAINTAIN ONE SET OF DRAWINGS ON THE JOB SITE UPDATED WEEKLY TO RECORD ALL DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DRAWINGS, SUCH AS: a. LOCATION OF CONCEALED PIPING VALVES AND DUCTS. b. REVISIONS, ADDENDUM, AND CHANGE ORDERS. c. SIGNIFICANT DEVIATIONS MADE NECESSARY BY FIELD CONDITIONS, APPROVED EQUIPMENT SUBSTITUTIONS, AND CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES. 2. AT COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT AND BEFORE FINAL APPROVAL, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ANY FINAL CORRECTIONS TO DRAWINGS AND CERTIFY THE ACCURACY OF EACH PRINT BY SIGNATURE THEREON. FAILURE TO KEEP THESE RECORDS WILL ALLOW LSD&C TO DIRECT THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE THESE RECORDS AT HIS EXPENSE PRIOR TO FINAL PAYMENT. DISCREPANCIES IN DOCUMENTS 1. DRAWINGS (PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND DETAILS) ARE DIAGRAMMATIC AND INDICATE THE GENERAL LOCATION AND INTENT OF THE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS. WHERE DRAWINGS, EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS, SPECIFICATIONS OR OTHER TRADES CONFLICT OR ARE UNCLEAR, ADVISE THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IN WRITING, PRIOR TO SUBMITTAL OF BID. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO ADVISE LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER, IN WRITING, OF VARIATIONS TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BID. OTHERWISE, LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER'S INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS OR CONDITIONS SHALL BE FINAL WITH NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION PERMITTED. I. PHASING REQUIREMENTS 1. THIS CONTRACTOR IS TO INCLUDE IN HIS BID ALL NECESSARY SERVICE REQUIRED TO KEEP THE OPERATING PHASE OF THE STORE'S HVAC, PLUMBIN AND SPRINKLER SERVICE IN OPERATION. CONTRACTOR MUST SCHEDULE IN WRITING WITH LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER AND THE LANDLORD ONE WEE PRIOR TO ANY SHUT DOWN OF THE HVAC, PLUMBING OR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS. J. DEMOLITION 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COORDINATION OF THE DEMOLITION OF EXISTING WORK AND THE DEMOLITION PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. COORDINATE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ANY EXISTING EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO BE LEFT INTACT. 2. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL INCLUDE, AND WILL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR, THE REMOVAL OF ALL EXISTING HVAC UNITS, HYDRONIC PIPING, REFRIGERANT RECAPTURE, EXHAUST FANS, ETC. AND ASSOCIATED ROOF CURBS NOT TO BE REUSED ON THIS PROJECT, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. CONTRACTOR MUST VERIFY WITH THE LANDLORD ALL PRESUMED ABANDONED EQUIPMENT, PIPES, AND DUCTWORK PRIOR TO REMOVAL ROOF CURBS SHALL BE REMOVED AND THE ROOF PATCHED. ALL EXTRANEOUS ITEMS IN THE SPACE OR ON THE ROOF NOT APPLICABLE TO THE NE WORK MUST BE REMOVED AND ROOF/WALL/FLOOR PATCHED/REPAIRED TO MATCH EXISTING STRUCTURE. EXISTING ABANDONED PIPES, DUCTS, OR EQUIPMENT IN THE FLOOR, EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE OR OTHERWISE INACCESSIBLE ARE TO BE CUT OFF AND SEALED BELOW OR WITHIN FLOOR OR WALL LEVEL WHEN THEY ARE NOT TO BE REUSED IN THIS PROJECT. IF REQUIRED BY LANDLORD OR CODES, ABANDONED PIPING AND/OR DUCTWORK MUST BE REMOVED TO POINT OF ORIGIN. CONFIRM THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION PRIOR TO BID AND INCLUDE IN BID PROPOSAL. K. SLEEVES 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SLEEVES TO PROTECT EQUIPMENT OR FACILITIES IN THE INSTALLATION. EACH SLEEVE SHALL EXTEND THROUGH ITS RESPECTIVE FLOOR, WALL OR PARTITION AND SHALL BE CUT FLUSH WITH EACH SURFACE EXCEPT SLEEVES THAT PENETRATE THE FLOOR, WHICH SHALL EXTEND 2" ABOVE THE FLOOR. CONTRACTOR MUST COORDINATE THROUGH THE LANDLORD ANY CORE DRILLING OR CUTTING OF OPENINGS IN MASONRY FLOORS OR WALLS. 2. ALL SLEEVES AND OPENINGS THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS AND/OR FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE SEALED WITH CALCIUM SILICATE, SILICONE "RN" FOAM, "3M" FIRE RATED SEALANTS OR EQUAL, SO AS TO RETAIN THEIR FIRE RATING. 3. SLEEVES IN BEARING AND MASONRY WALLS, FLOORS, AND PARTITIONS SHALL BE STANDARD WEIGHT STEEL PIPE FINISHED WITH SMOOTH EDGES. FO' OTHER THAN MASONRY PARTITIONS, THROUGH SUSPENDED CEILINGS, OR FOR CONCEALED VERTICAL PIPING, SLEEVES SHALL BE NO. 22 U.S.G. GALVANIZED STEEL MINIMUM. L SCOPE OF WORK 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH ALL LABOR, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SERVICES, TOOLS, TRANSPORTATION AND FACILITIES NECESSARY FOR, REASONABLY IMPLIED AND INCIDENTAL TO, THE FURNISHING, INSTALLATION, COMPLETION AND TESTING OF ALL THE WORK FOR THE HVAC SYSTEMS AS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS, CALLED FOR IN THE SPECIFICATIONS, AND AS REQUIRED BY JOB CONDITIONS, TO INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING: a. HVAC UNITS, ALL RELATED EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE). b. DUCTWORK, FITTINGS, DAMPERS, AND INSULATION. c. HYDRONIC PIPING. (AS APPLICABLE, REFER TO PLANS). d. REFRIGERANT PIPING (AS APPLICABLE, REFER TO PLANS). e. CURBS, ROOFING, AND STEEL FRAMING FOR SUPPORT (AS APPLICABLE, REFER TO PLANS). f. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING. g. KEEPING A RECORD SET AND PREPARE AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. 2. BEFORE STARTING WORK, THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE JOB SITE AND EXAMINE THE ARCHITECTURAL, STRUCTURAL, MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS TO SEQUENCE, COORDINATE, AND INTEGRATE THE VARIOUS ELEMENTS OF THE HVAC SYSTEM, MATERIALS, AND EQUIPMENT WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS TO AVOID INTERFERENCES AND CONFRONTATIONS. 3. RELOCATION OF EXISTING DUCT MAINS OR BRANCHES TO MEET STORE DESIGN CRITERIA MUST BE INCLUDED IN BID PROPOSAL. H. HVAC EQUIPMENT 1. PRIMARY HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNITS ARE TO BE FURNISHED BY LSD&C AS SCHEDULED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. REFER TO PLANS FO' REQUIREMENTS. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL INCLUDE A FIVE (5) YEAR COMPRESSOR AND TEN (10) YEAR HEAT EXCHANGER WARRANTY. 2. ALL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE COMPLETE IN EVERY RESPECT WITH ALL DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES PROVIDED TO MEET THE DESIGN INTENT AND OPERATION OF THE SYSTEMS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFIED HEREIN. 3. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. N. EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY LIMITED STORE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION 1. THE FOLLOWING EQUIPMENT IS FURNISHED BY LSD&C AND INSTALLED BY THIS CONTRACTOR UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE AND PLANS FOR APPLICABILITY. a. HVAC UNITS. b. TOILET EXHAUST FANS. c. DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS. d. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS. 11 "I", •Iii THIS CONTRACTOR. 0. CURBS FOR SUPPORT 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL CURB ADAPTORS ON EXISTING CURBS WHERE ALLOWED BY LANDLORD. CURB ADAPTORS MUST BE MANUFACTURED BY THYBAR, MICROMETL, OR LSD&C APPROVED EQUAL 2. WHERE EXISTING CURBS ARE NOT AVAILABLE OR WHERE CURB ADAPTORS ARE NOT ALLOWED THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY CURBS REQUIRED TO INSTALL ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT AS DESCRIBED ON THE DRAWINGS. CURBS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 14" HIGH (SEE M04.01 "LOCAL AREA REQUIREMENTS" ITEM # 5), OF THE SAME MANUFACTURER OF THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. ALL CURBS AND CURB ADAPTORS SHALL BE INSTALLED SUCH THAT TOP OF CURBS ARE LEVEL ALL PENETRATIONS OF EXISTING STRUCTURE SHALL BE DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LANDLORD'S GUIDELINES AT THIS CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL RECEIVE LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER'S WRITTEN APPROVAL BEFORE ANY WORK TAKES PLACE. THIS CONTRACTOR IS ALSO RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL SEISMIC, HURRICANE OR OTHER SECURING DEVICES REQUIRED BY LOCAL OR OTHER CODES. I. 1 1 1 I "1' 1 5,. i • •1.1 • I .11 1 • 1 P. LABELS/PIPE MARKERS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL PIPE IDENTIFICATION MARKERS ON ALL PIPES INSTALLED UNDER THIS CONTRACT. MARKERS SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 1-1/2" X 8" AND IDENTIFIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE BACKGROUND AND LETTER COLORS ISSUED BY THE AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI). 2. PIPING SHALL BE IDENTIFIED AS FOLLOWS: CHILLED WATER RETURN, CHILLED WATER SUPPLY, CONDENSATE, HOT WATER RETURN, HOT WATER SUPPLY, CONDENSER WATER RETURN, CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY, REFRIGERANT LIQUID, REFRIGERANT SUCTION, AND DIRECTIONAL ARROWS. ALL IDENTIFICATIONS MUST BE VISIBLE AT EQUIPMENT. Q. FINAL HVAC INSPECTIONS 1. ASIDE FROM NORMAL INTERIM INSPECTIONS OF WORK IN PLACE, LSD&C SHALL HAVE AN INDEPENDENT HVAC CONTRACTOR INSPECT THE FINISHED HVAC INSTALLATION UPON COMPLETION FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES. THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR. WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO BRING ALL ITEMS REPORTED BY THE INDEPENDENT HVAC CONTRACTOR UP TO PLANS AND SPECIFICATION REQUIREMENTS. SECTION 230500: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC A. HANGERS 1. HANGERS SHALL INCLUDE ALL MISCELLANEOUS STEEL SUCH AS ANGLE IRON, BANDS, C -CLAMPS WITH RETAINING CLIPS, CHANNELS, HANGER RODS, ETC., NECESSARY FOR THE INSTALLATION OF WORK. 2. HANGERS SHALL BE FASTENED TO BUILDING STEEL, CONCRETE, OR MASONRY, BUT NOT TO PIPING. HANGING FROM METAL DECK IS NOT PERMITTED. HANGERS MUST BE ATTACHED TO UPPER CHORD OF BAR JOIST. WHERE INTERFERENCES OCCUR AND IN ORDER TO SUPPORT DUCTWORK OR PIPING THE CONTRACTOR MUST INSTALL TRAPEZE TYPE HANGERS OR SUPPORTS WHICH SHALL BE LOCATED WHERE THEY DO NOT INTERFERE WITH ACCESS TO FIRE DAMPERS, VALVES, AND OTHER EQUIPMENT. HANGER TYPES AND INSTALLATION METHODS ARE ALSO SUBJECT TO LANDLORD CRITERIA. 3. HANGERS FOR ALL INSULATED PIPING SHALL BE SIZED AND INSTALLED FOR THE OUTER DIAMETER OF INSULATION. INSTALL 6" LONG SPLIT CIRCLE GALVANIZED SADDLE BETWEEN THE HANGER AND THE PIPE INSULATION. 4. HANGERS AND PIPING OF DISSIMILAR METALS SHALL BE DI -ELECTRICALLY SEPARATED. B. VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES 1. SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ALL SUPPORTS BETWEEN VIBRATING EQUIPMENT (FANS, AIR HANDLERS, ETC.) AND STRUCTURE. ISOLATORS TO BE SIZED ACCORDING TO LOAD WITH A MIN. 1" DEFLECTION. VIBRATING EQUIPMENT HUNG FROM STRUCTURE SHALL BE ISOLATED WITH RUBBER AND .SPRING DEVICES. VIBRATING EQUIPMENT SUPPORTED FROM FLOOR OR DECK SHALL BE ISOLATED WITH HOUSED SPRING MOUNT DEVICES. 2. EXAMINE DEAD LOAD AND OPERATING LOAD CONDITIONS WHEN SELECTING DEVICES. ADJUST FOR PROPER ALIGNMENT AND LOADING. AVOID "GROUNDING" THE ISOLATOR. 3.CHECK HANGER ROD SIZE FOR ALLOWABLE LOADS AT THE ISOLATING DEVICE AND AT THE UPPER AND LOWER ATTACHMENTS TO STRUCTURES, DUCTS EQUIPMENT, ETC. 4. CONSULT MANUFACTURER FOR APPLICATION DATA. C. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 1. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF ALL WORK SHALL BE MADE BY AN INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR WHO IS A CURRENTLY LICENSED ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCING COUNCIL (AABC) OR NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL BALANCING BUREAU (NEBB) BALANCING CONTRACTOR. NO OTHER BALANCE REPORTS WILL BE ACCEPTED. ALL BALANCING WORK MUST BE COMPLETE AND DONE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MOST RECENT STANDARDS OF THEIR SOCIETY. PAYMENT OF ALL COSTS FOR TESTING AND BALANCING SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID. HOWEVER, IT WILL BE .THE G.C. THAT WILL CONTRACT DIRECTLY WITH THE AIR BALANCING COMPANY. 2. FINAL TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING REPORT MUST BE COMPLETE AND SUBMITTED WITH FINAL CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS TO LSD&C 1 WEEK PRIOR TO MERCHANDISING DATE. 3. THE HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL BE PRESENT FOR AIR BALANCE TO VERIFY ACCESSIBILITY TO ALL DEVICES, VERIFY ALL OPERATING SEQUENCES (WITH CONTROLS VENDOR REMOTELY SUPPORTING THE SEQUENCES) AND INSTALL NEW FILTERS IN ALL UNITS JUST PRIOR TO THE AIR BALANCE. THE COMPLETE AIR BALANCE SHALL TAKE PLACE WITH OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS IN MINIMUM POSITION, EXCEPT AS NOTED OTHERWISE. HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL ALSO INSTALL A NEW SET OF FILTERS ONE DAY PRIOR TO MERCHANDISING. 4. THE BALANCE REPORT SHALL INCLUDE AS A MINIMUM THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. AABC OR NEBB CERTIFICATION NUMBER AND SIGNATURE OF BALANCING CONTRACTOR. INSTRUMENTATION LIST WITH LAST CALIBRATION DATES. MAKE AND MODEL NUMBERS OF ALL HVAC EQUIPMENT TESTED. AIR CFM AND STATIC PRESSURE READINGS (DISCHARGE AND SUCTION) AS MEASURED BY PITOT TUBE DUCT TRAVERSE AT THE UNIT. MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA WITH ACTUAL FIELD VOLTAGE AND AMPERAGE READINGS FOR EACH LEG. MOTOR AND FAN RPMS, SHEAVE SIZES AND BELT SIZES. OUTSIDE, RETURN, MIXED AND SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURES AT FULL COOLING. WATER BALANCE DATA INCLUDING GPM WITH INLET AND OUTLET TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE READINGS (WHERE APPLICABLE). MAKE AND MODEL NUMBERS OF ALL AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT. FINAL BALANCED AIR VOLUMES AT ALL OUTLETS (INCLUDING RETURNS WHERE DUCTED). INDEXED PLAN WITH DIFFUSER AND RETURN LOCATIONS. MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM SET POINTS FOR DEMAND CONTROL VENTILATION SYSTEMS INCLUDING CFM, FAN SPEED, AND OUTDOOR AIR DAMPERS POSITIONS. 5. BALANCE ALL MEDIA QUANTITIES TO WITHIN 5% OF THAT INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS WITH STORE IN OPERATING CONDITION (SALES/NON-SALES, OFFICE, AND RESTROOM DOORS CLOSED). ANY REQUIRED CHANGES IN SHEAVES, BELTS OR PULLEYS NEEDED TO ACHIEVE SPECIFIED FLOW RATES SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR WITH NO ADDITIONAL COST TO LSD&C. 6. ALL CONTROL SEQUENCES SHALL BE TESTED (INTERLOCKED EQUIPMENT, SMOKE DETECTORS, SMOKE EVACUATION, ECONOMIZER, ETC.) AND OPERATING STATUS RECORDED IN THE BALANCE REPORT. 7. AIR BALANCING CONTRACTOR IS TO CONFIRM OVERRIDE OF MINIMUM OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE UPON CO2 MONITORING CONFIRMATION. FOR CO2 MONITORING CONTACT, SEE CONTACT INFORMATION ON SHEET M01.01. 8. THREE COPIES (ELECTRONIC COPIES ARE ACCEPTABLE) OF THE BALANCE REPORT SHALL BE SUBMITTED THROUGH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO LSD&C FOR APPROVAL. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY THE COMPLETENESS OF THE REPORTS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING TO LSD&C. SUBMIT ONE COPY OF FINAL APPROVED AIR BALANCE REPORT TO MALL GENERAL MANAGER. 9. TRANE SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING PROGRAMMING FOR ALL OUTDOOR AIR DAMPERS REFLECTS THE APPROVED CERTIFIED AIR BALANCE. CONTROLS VENDOR SHALL PROVIDE REMOTE SUPPORT AS NEEDED TO TAB CONTRACTOR TO ENSURE DAMPER SETPOINT. 10.THE BALANCING CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM ALL APPLICABLE TESTING AND BALANCING FUNCTIONS REQUIRED FOR THE SYSTEM DESIGNED ON THESE DRAWINGS. ALL SYSTEMS UNABLE TO BE COMPLETELY BALANCED AT THE TIME OF ORIGINAL BALANCE MUST BE BALANCED IN FUTURE AT NO ADDITIONAL EXPENSE TO LSD&C THE BALANCING CONTRACTOR SHALL RECHECK ANY ITEMS THAT LSD&C DEEMS NECESSARY AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO LSD&C. D. VALVES 1. GATE VALVES, 2 -INCH AND SMALLER: CLASS 150, BODY AND UNION BONNET OF ASTM B 62 CAST BRONZE WITH THREADED OR SOLDER ENDS, INTEGRAL SEAT, RENEWABLE SOLID BRONZE WEDGE DISC, RISING STEM, SCREWED BONNET AND RE -PACKABLE UNDER PRESSURE. BALL VALVES ARE ACCEPTED AS AN EQUAL SUBSTITUTION. 2. GATE VALVES, 2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER: CLASS 125 CAST IRON BODY, RENEWABLE BRONZE SEATS AND SOLID WEDGE DISC, RISING STEM,_ FLANGED ENDS, AND RE -PACKABLE UNDER PRESSURE. 3. SWING CHECK VALVES, 2 -INCH AND SMALLER: CLASS 150, CAST BRONZE BODY AND CAP CONFORMING TO ASTM B 62 WITH HORIZONTAL SWING, Y -PATTERN, RENEWABLE BRONZE DISC, AND HAVING THREADED OR SOLDERED ENDS. 4. SWING CHECK VALVE, 2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER: CLASS 125 CAST IRON BODY AND BOLTED CAP, HORIZONTAL SWING, RENEWABLE BRONZE DISC, FLANGED ENDS AND CAPABLE OF BEING REFITTED WHILE THE VALVE REMAINS IN THE LINE. 5. COMBINATION BALANCING AND SHUTOFF VALVES: BELL & GOSSETT CIRCUIT SETTER WITH LOCKING SET POINT. A CIRCUIT SETTER BALANCE WHEEL MUST BE INCLUDED WITH 0 & M MANUAL TACO OR GRISWOLD ARE CONSIDERED AS EQUAL. SECTION 230700: HVAC INSULATION A. DUCTWORK INSULATION 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL INSULATION PRODUCTS IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURER'S WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS, AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH RECOGNIZED INDUSTRY PRACTICES. INSULATION MUST COMPLY WITH NFPA/NFPAC 90A. 2. ALL INSULATION SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD RATING OF NOT MORE THAN 25 AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED RATING OF NO HIGHER THAN 50 WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 84-05, OR AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. 3. DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSULATED ACCORDING TO THE ENERGY CODE ADOPTED BY LOCAL AHJ. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO CONFIRM CODE AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE INSULATION AS INDICATED BELOW (WITHIN ASSUMED PARAMETERS).THIS SPEC DOES NOT INCLUDE REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTWORK LOCATED WITHIN A VENTILATED ATTIC OR OUTSIDE. IN SUCH INSTANCES, REFER DIRECTLY TO CODE ADOPTED BY LOCAL AHJ. a. RECTANGULAR SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTS - PLENUM OR DUCTED RETURN AIR SYSTEM: DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS. ALL RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK (SUPPLY AND RETURN) SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED TO THICKNESS LISTED BELOW. (1) ASHRAE 90.1-2007, 2010 & 2013. IECC-2009, 2012 & 2015. OREGON ENERGY CODE -2014. WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE -2015: PROVIDE 2" THICK, 1.0 LB/FT"3 (R=7.6, R=6.1 INSTALLED) DUCT WRAP WITH VAPOR BARRIER 4. ALL OUTDOOR AIR (ROUND, OVAL, AND RECTANGULAR) AND ROUND/OVAL SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED AS INDICATED: a. PLENUM AND DUCTED RETURN AIR SYSTEMS: ALL OUTDOOR AIR (ROUND, OVAL, AND RECTANGULAR) AND ROUND/OVAL SUPPLY AIR DUCTWORK SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED WITH A DUCT WRAP WITH VAPOR BARRIER. REFER TO THICKNESS BELOW. VAPOR BARRIER IS TO BE MAINTAINED THROUGHOUT DUCT SYSTEM. ALL JOINTS MUST BE OVERLAPPED AND TUCKED SO THAT NO INSULATION FIBER IS VISIBLE. EXTEND DUCTWORK INSULATION WITHOUT INTERRUPTION THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS AND OTHER PENETRATIONS. (1) ASHRAE 90.1-2007, 2010 & 2013. INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CODE -2009, 2012 & 2015. OREGON ENERGY CODE -2014: PROVIDE A MINIMUM OF 2" THICK, 1.0 LB/FT" 3 (R=7.6, R=6.1 INSTALLED) DUCT WRAP WITH VAPOR BARRIER. (2) 2015 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE: (a) SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR ROUND AND OVAL DUCTWORK INSULATION: ROUND/OVAL SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTWORK SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF 2" THICK DUCT WRAP, 1.0 LB/FTf3 (INSTALLED R-6.1). (b) OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK INSULATION FOR UNITS SUPPLYING LESS THAN 2800 CFM: ALL OUTDOOR AIR (ROUND, OVAL, AND RECTANGULAR) DUCTWORK SHALL BE EXTERNALLY INSULATED WITH A MINIMUM OF 2-1/2" THICK DUCT WRAP, 0.75 LB/FT"3 (INSTALLED R-7.1). (c) OUTSIDE AIR DUCTWORK INSULATION FOR UNITS SUPPLYING MORE THAN 2800 CFM: PROVIDE TWO LAYERS OF 2.5" THICK, 2.25 LB/FT '3, EXTERNAL BOARD INSULATION (CONDUCTIVITY 0.24 0 75'F; R-20.8). B. HYDRONIC PIPING INSULATION 1. ALL HYDRONIC PIPING FOR CHILLED WATER AND/OR HOT WATER (NOT INCLUDING CONDENSER WATER UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE), VALVES, FITTINGS, AND ACCESSORIES SHALL BE INSULATED ACCORDING TO THE ENERGY CODE ADOPTED BY LOCAL AHJ. IT IS THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO CONFIRM CODE AND PROVIDE ADEQUATE INSULATION AS INDICATED BELOW (WITHIN ASSUMED PARAMETERS). CHILLED WATER TEMPERATURE IS ASSUMED TO BE NO LESS THAN 40'F AND HOT WATER TEMPERATURE NO GREATER THAN 200'F. IN THE CASE THAT ACTUAL PROJECT CONDITIONS EXCEED THESE VALUES, REFER DIRECTLY TO THE CODE ADOPTED BY LOCAL AHJ FOR REQUIREMENTS. a. PER ASHRAE 90.1-2007: (1) WHEN ALL PIPE SIZES ARE LESS THAN 8 INCHES: INSULATE WITH 1 INCH THICK FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.28 BTUIN/HFT2'F 075'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 547. (2) WHEN PIPE SIZES EXCEED 8 INCHES: INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.28 BTUItN/HFT2'F AT 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. INSULATE PIPES SIZED LESS THAN 8 INCHES WITH 1 INCH THICK INSULATION. INSULATE PIPES SIZED 8 INCHES AND LARGER WITH 1-1/2" THICK INSULATION. b. PER ASHRAE 90.1-2010: 1 WHEN ALL PIPE SIZES ARE LESS THAT 1-1 2 INCHES: INSULATE WITH 1-1 2 INCH THICK FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.26 BTUIN/HFT2'F 075'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. (2) WHEN PIPE SIZES EQUAL OR EXCEED 1-1/2 INCHES: INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATE PIPES SIZED LESS THAN 1-1 /2 INCHES WITH 1-1 /2 INCH THICK INSULATION. INSULATE PIPES SIZED 1-1 /2 INCHES AND LARGER WITH 2" THICK INSULATION. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.26 BTUIN/HFT2'F ©75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. c. 2009 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE: (1) INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.27 BTUIN/HFT2'F 0 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. INSULATE PIPES SIZED 1-1/2 INCHES AND SMALLER WITH 1 INCH THICK INSULATION. INSULATE PIPES SIZED LARGER THAN 1-1/2 INCHES WITH 1-1/2 INCH THICK INSULATION. d. 2012 INTERNATIONAL ENERGY CONSERVATION CODE: (1) INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATE CHILLED WATER PIPES WITH 1 INCH THICK INSULATION HAVING A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.28 BTUIN/HFT2'F 0 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. INSULATE HOT WATER PIPES WITH 2 INCH THICK INSULATION HAVING A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.28 BTUIN/HFT2'F 0 125'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. e. 2013 CALIFORNIA ENERGY CODE: (1) INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATE CHILLED WATER PIPES WITH 1 INCH THICK INSULATION WITH A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.27 BTUIN/HFT2'F AT 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C335. INSULATE HOT WATER PIPES WITH 2" THICK INSULATION WITH A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.29 BTUIN/HFT2'F AT 125'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C335. f. 2012 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE: (1) INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATE CHILLED WATER PIPES WITH 1-1/2 INCH THICK INSULATION WITH A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.26 BTUIN/HFT2'F AT 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C335. INSULATE HOT WATER PIPES (UP TO 200'F) SIZED LESS THAN 1.5 INCHES WITH 1-1/2" THICK INSULATION WITH A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.29 BTUIN/HFT2'F AT 125'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C335. INSULATE HOT WATER PIPES SIZED 1.5 INCHES OR LARGER WITH 2" THICK INSULATION WITH A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.29 BTUIN/HFT2'F AT 125'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C335. g. 2010 OREGON ENERGY EFFICIENCY SPECIALTY CODE: (1) INSULATE WITH FIBERGLASS INSULATION WITH ALL SERVICE JACKET AND VAPOR BARRIER. INSULATION SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.27 BTUIN/HFT2'F 0 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C547. INSULATE PIPES SIZED 1-1/2 INCHES AND SMALLER WITH 1 INCH THICK INSULATION. INSULATE PIPES SIZED LARGER THAN 1-1/2 INCHES WITH 1-1/2 INCH THICK INSULATION. 2. INSULATION AT ALL HANGERS FOR PIPING 2-1/2 INCHES AND LARGER SHALL BE HARD AND NON-COMPRESSIBLE. 3. ALL INSULATION SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD RATING OF NOT MORE THAN 25 AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED RATING OF NO HIGHER THAN 50 TO CONFORM WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NFPA/NFPAC. 4. PROVIDE ZESTON OR EQUAL INSULATION FITTINGS FOR ALL TEES, ELLS OR SPECIALTY FITTINGS. . REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION 1. INSULATE THE REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINES AND CONDENSATE LINES WITH 1 1/2" PIPE INSULATION SIMILAR TO FLEXTHERM SEAM -SEAL OR INSUL-LOCK. INSULATION SHALL BE A CLOSED CELL FIBER FREE ELASTOMERIC FOAM IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 534, TYPE I - TUBULAR, GRADE 1; SHALL HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY NOT TO EXCEED 0.26 BTUIN/HFT2'F AT 75'F WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 177 OR C 518; SHALL HAVE A FLAME SPREAD RATING OF NOT MORE THAN 25 AND A SMOKE DEVELOPED RATING OF NOT MORE THAN 50 WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E 84; AND SHALL HAVE A MAXIMUM WATER ABSORPTION % OF 0.2 BY VOLUME WHEN TESTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM C 209. DO NOT INSULATE THE HOT GAS (LIQUID) LINES OR ANY HOT GAS BYPASS. ECTION 230800: COMMISSIONING OF HVAC DETAILED HVAC COMMISSIONING INFORMATION IS INCLUDED IN THE LSD&C SITE MANUAL PROVIDED TO THE CONTRACTOR AT THE START OF THE PROJECT. MANUFACTURER WILL CONTACT THE CONTRACTOR EARLY IN THE PROJECT TO SET PRELIMINARY DATES FOR HVAC INSPECTION, COMMISSIONING AND HVAC CONTROLS COMMISSIONING. WORK REQUIRED PRIOR TO HVAC INSPECTION / COMMISSIONING (TO BE COMPLETED BY MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR) 1. CONNECT AND BLEED CONDENSATE, DUCTWORK, NATURAL GAS, CHILLED WATER PIPING, AND/OR CONDENSER WATER PIPING. 2. CHARGE HVAC SYSTEMS WITH REFRIGERANT FOLLOWING MANUFACTURERS' GUIDELINES AND INSTRUCTIONS. COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS REQUIRE SPECIFIC PROCESSES, CONTACT MANUFACTURER FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT. 3. CONNECT POWER TO THE HVAC EQUIPMENT FOR A MINIMUM OF 24 HOURS. a. IN COLD WEATHER SITUATIONS, DO NOT OPERATE THE UNITS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING! HVAC EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE STARTED UP EARLY IN THE PROJECT. COORDINATE EARLY STAT UP OF EQUIPMENT WITH THE MANUFACTURER. THE GC MAY BE BACK CHARGED FOR ADDITIONAL AC SITE VISITS BEYOND THE FIRST THREE (3) NECESSARY TO DOCUMENT THE RESOLUTION OF THE HVAC PUNCHLIST ITEMS. HVAC COMMISSIONING PROCESS 1. VISIT 1: HVAC EQUIPMENT START UP - CONTRACTOR SHALL HAVE THE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR ON SITE DURING THE HVAC INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING. BUDGET 5 HOURS FOR THE HVAC INSPECTION AND COMMISSIONING. (NOTE: THESE HOURS ARE TO BE USED FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS ONLY. ADDITIONAL HOURS WILL NOT BE APPROVED FOR WORK THAT WAS IN SCOPE AND NOT COMPLETED PRIOR TO THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS.) a. CONTRACTOR TO COMPLETE AND EMAIL, OR FAX, THE HVAC EQUIPMENT STAT UP SURVEY TO MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO THE HVAC STARTUP. b. MANUFACTURER COORDINATES THE HVAC EQUIPMENT COMMISSIONING. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMMUNICATING SCHEDULE DATE CHANGES TO MANUFACTURER AND SUBCONTRACTORS. c. PROVIDED THERE ARE NO HVAC INSTALLATION ISSUES SYSTEMS SHALL BE STARTED FOR TEMPORARY OPERATION ON LOCAL CONTROL. d. IF THERE ARE HVAC INSTALLATION PUNCHLIST ITEMS, THE GC MUST CORRECT THEM AND RESCHEDULE COMMISSIONING WITH MANUFACTURER. 2. VISIT 2: HVAC CONTROLS COMMISSIONING - THE CONTROLS COMMISSIONING IS PERFORMED BY THE MANUFACTURER IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND THE MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS. ALLOW FOR 4 HOURS TO COMPLETE THE CONTROLS COMMISSIONING. (NOTE: THESE HOURS ARE TO BE USED FOR THE COMPLETION OF THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS ONLY. ADDITIONAL HOURS WILL NOT BE APPROVED FOR WORK THAT WAS IN SCOPE AND NOT COMPLETED PRIOR TO THE COMMISSIONING PROCESS.) FOLLOW THE CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURER'S DETAILS AND DRAWINGS DURING THE INSTALLATION OF THE HVAC CONTROL EQUIPMENT. a. CONTRACTOR TO COMPLETE AND EMAIL, OR FAX, THE CONTROLS COMMISSIONING SURVEY TO MANUFACTURER PRIOR TO THE CONTROL COMMISSIONING. b. CONNECT THE HVAC CONTROLS TO AN OPERATIONAL ANALOG PHONE LINE OR ETHERNET CONNECTION TO ALLOW COMMUNICATION. IF NECESSARY, UTILIZE SITE FAX LINE TO CONNECT TO THE CONTROLS MODEM IN THE IFS PANEL c. CONTACT MANUFACTURER AT THE SCHEDULED TIME FOR THE CONTROLS COMMISSIONING. d. PROVIDED THERE ARE NO OPEN ISSUES, VISIT. 2 IS COMPLETE. IN THE EVENT THERE ARE OPEN ITEMS, THE GC MUST CORRECT THEM AND RESCHEDULE THE CONTROLS COMMISSIONING. 3. VISIT 3: FINAL HVAC INSPECTION - THIS VISIT IS TO DO A FINAL INSPECTION OF THE HVAC EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL INSTALLATION. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR HAVING THE MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR AND THE ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR ON SITE DURING THE FINAL INSPECTION. BUDGET 4 HOURS FOR THE FINAL INSPECTION. THIS VISIT MUST TAKE PLACE PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION. THE FOLLOWING ITEMS MUST BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO THE INSPECTION: (1) THE GC MUST COMPLETE TRANE'S SITE VISIT #3 SURVEY PRIOR TO THE VISIT BEING SCHEDULED. (2) HVAC SYSTEM INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE - NO OPEN PUNCHLIST ITEMS EXCEPT FOR POSSIBLY THE PERMANENT PHONE LINE. (3) AIR BALANCE IS COMPLETE. NOTE: AIR BALANCE IS IN THE CONTRACTOR'S SCOPE OF WORK. b. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMMUNICATING SCHEDULE DATE CHANGES FOR THE FINAL INSPECTION. c. FILTERS ARE TO BE REPLACED DURING THIS VISIT. FILTERS ARE TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE ON SITE WHEN THE TRANE TECHNICIAN ARRIVES. d. WHEN COMPLETE AND ALL OPEN CONTRACTOR HVAC ISSUES ARE RESOLVED A CONTROL NUMBER IS ISSUED BY THE MANUFACTURER. IT IS RECORDED INSIDE THE CONTROL PANEL DOOR IN THE IFS ELECTRICAL PANEL AND ON THE FINAL VISIT CHECK LIST. e. IN THE EVENT THERE ARE OPEN ITEMS, THE CONTRACTOR MUST CORRECT THEM AND RESCHEDULE THE FINAL INSPECTION WITH THE MANUFACTURER. GC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR REPLACEMENT OF SHEAVES, PULLEYS, AND BELTS, IF NEEDED. f. THE HVAC CONTROL NUMBER WILL BE ISSUED AT THE END OF THE VISIT PROVIDED THERE ARE NO UNRESOLVED HVAC PUNCHLIST ITEMS. g. THE TRANE TECHNICIAN WILL WRITE THE HVAC CONTROL NUMBER ON THE STICKER INSIDE THE WR CONTROLS PANEL (IFS PANEL) AND ON THE FINAL VISIT CHECK LIST. h. GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL 3RD PARTY COMISSIONING/REVIEW REQUIRED BY CODE. CTION 230900: INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC WORK RESPONSIBILITY 1. LSD&C HVAC SUPPLIER WILL FURNISH NECESSARY CONTROL DEVICES TO THE FIELD. FOR ALL DEVICES NOT FACTORY INSTALLED, IT WILL BE THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY TO INSTALL. ECTION 232100: HYDRONIC PIPING AND PUMPS HYDRONIC PIPING 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL A COMPLETE HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEM IF APPLICABLE. REFER TO PLANS TO DETERMINE IF A HYDRONIC SYSTEM IS REQUIRED. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED THE WORKING PRESSURE FOR SYSTEM PIPING AND COMPONENTS SHALL BE AT MINIMUM 150 PSIG. 2. PIPING a. HYDRONIC PIPING FOR CHILLED WATER, CONDENSER WATER AND/OR HEATING WATER SHALL BE ASTM A 53, SCHEDULE 40, ERW, BLACK STEEL PIPE WITH PLAIN ENDS. INSTALL STEEL PIPE WITH WELDED JOINTS WHERE PIPE IS 2-1/2 INCH AND LARGER. INSTALL STEEL PIPE WITH THREADED JOINTS AND FITTINGS. INSTALL TYPE "K" COPPER PIPE FOR 2 INCH AND SMALLER PIPE. PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS. ALL PIPING SHALL BE IN STRICT CONFORMANCE WITH ASTM, ASA, AND LANDLORD'S REQUIREMENTS; WHICHEVER IS MOST STRINGENT. UNIONS OR FLANGES MUST BE USED AT EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS WHERE SERVICE OR REMOVAL MAY BE REQUIRED. , b. ALL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE PRESSURE TESTED WITHOUT LEAKAGE AT A MINIMUM PRESSURE OF 125 PSI. c. ALL HYDRONIC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTED TO THE HVAC PIPING SYSTEM SHALL BE CLEANED AND FLUSHED. REMOVE, CLEAN, AND REPLACE STRAINER SCREENS. FILL TENANT'S SYSTEM WITH DOMESTIC WATER AND VENT ALL PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO CONNECTION TO THE LANDLORD'S SYSTEM. CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT FILL TENANT'S SYSTEM WITH WATER FROM THE LANDLORD'S SYSTEM UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED TO DO SO FROM THE LANDLORD'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE. ANY RUNS THRU A CHASE OR SHAFT WILL BE DONE WITH FEWEST JOINTS POSSIBLE USING THE LONGEST LENGTH OF HARD COPPER PIPE AVAILABLE. SHOULD A JOINT BE REQUIRED, CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE ALL EFFORTS TO KEEP THE JOINTS IN ACCESSIBLE AREAS. d. PRIOR TO CONNECTION TO THE LANDLORD'S SYSTEM, CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN WRITTEN CONFIRMATION FROM THE LANDLORD'S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE, THAT ALL TESTING, FLUSHING, AND PROPER FILLING OF THE TENANT'S SYSTEM HAS BEEN COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE TO . THE LANDLORD'S REQUIREMENTS AND THAT THE TENANT'S SYSTEM IS READY TO BE CONNECTED TO THE LANDLORD'S SYSTEM. 3. PIPING SPECIALTIES a. PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TEST PLUGS (PETE'S PLUG) - 1/4 INCH NPT FITTINGS TO RECEIVE EITHER A TEMPERATURE OR PRESSURE PROBE, 1/8 INCH O.D. FITTING AND CAPS SHALL BE BRASS WITH VALVE CORE OF NORDEL, RATED AT 400 PSIG, 0 TO 200 DEGREES F. b. STRAINERS - "Y" PATTERN STRAINERS, 125 PSIG, CAST IRON BODY WITH PERFORATED STAINLESS STEEL SCREEN, THREADED FOR 2 INCHES AND SMALLER, FLANGED FOR 2-1/2 INCHES AND LARGER. SCREEN OPENING SIZE AT 0.033 INCH FOR HEATING AND 1/8 INCH FOR CHILLED OR CONDENSER WATER. PROVIDE WITH BLOWDOWN VALVE WITH HOSE END FITTING. c. FLEXIBLE HOSE: PIPE SIZE 1/2 INCH TO 1-1/4 INCH - PROVIDE PLENUM RATED STAINLESS STEEL BRAIDED HOSE WITH EPDM CORE. END CONNECTIONS SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH PIPES TO BE JOINED. PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS. PIPE SIZE 1-1/2 INCH AND LARGER - PROVIDE STAINLESS STEEL BRAIDED HOSE OVER A CORRUGATED STAINLESS STEEL TUBE WITH CARBON STEEL END FITTINGS. END FITTINGS SHALL BE COMPATIBLE WITH PIPES TO BE JOINED. PROVIDE DIELECTRIC UNIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS. d. DIELECTRIC UNIONS: WHERE JOINING TWO SEPARATE METALS PROVIDE A CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY OF COPPER ALLOY AND FERROUS MATERIALS WITH SEPARATING NONCONDUCTIVE INSULATING MATERIAL INCLUDE END CONNECTIONS COMPATIBLE WITH PIPES TO BE JOINED. 4. GENERAL INSTALLATION a. INSTALL WATER MAINS WITHOUT PITCH. USE ECCENTRIC REDUCING COUPLINGS AT CHANGES IN SIZE WITH THE TOP OF PIPES AT SAME ELEVATION. •• 1 • 1 I1 y' ♦. 1 1 • 1 'IT :1 1� 1 T, 1 I 1 , IInY,r '1 1"''1 I1 BRANCHES TO UNITS ABOVE MAINS TO BE TAKEN FROM TOP OF MAINS AT A 45 DEGREE ANGLE PITCHED UPWARD TOWARDS UNITS. PITCH NOT LESS THAN 1 " TO 10 FEET. c. SEE MECHANICAL DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR APPLICABLE DETAILS. d. PROVIDE UL/ULC LISTED FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM AROUND ALL PIPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS. PENETRATIONS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF UL/ULC DETAILS WL1001 (UNINSULATED WALL) AND WL5039 (INSULATED WALL). ECTION 232300: REFRIGERANT PIPING REFRIGERANT PIPING: 1. THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A COMPLETE REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM BETWEEN THE INDOOR FAN UNITS AND OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNITS. REFER TO PLANS TO DETERMINE IF A REFRIGERANT SYSTEM IS REQUIRED. NEW PIPING IS REQUIRED. REUSE OF EXISTING PIPING IS NOT ALLOWED. 2. PIPING a. REFRIGERANT PIPING SHALL BE TYPE ACR COPPER TUBING. TUBING SHALL BE CLEAN AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS, AND EVACUATED WITH A DEEP VACUUM PRIOR TO REFRIGERANT CHARGE. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONFIRM THE DIAMETER OF THE REFRIGERANT PIPING RUNS IN EXCESS OF 50 EQUIVALENT FEET WITH THE ARCHITECT, ENGINEER, AND MANUFACTURER FOR ALL SPLIT SYSTEMS. NO REFRIGERANT PIPING RUNS EXCEEDING 100 EQUIVALENT FEET ARE TO BE INSTALLED WITHOUT LSD&C PM'S PERMISSION. THE MANUFACTURER SHALL PROVIDE ALL FINAL PIPE SIZING AND COIL SELECTIONS FOR ALL REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS. b. ALL FITTINGS AND JOINTS SHALL BE WROUGHT COPPER OR CAST BRONZE (ANSI B 16.22). ALL COPPER TO COPPER JOINTS SHALL BE BRAZED WITH A COPPER -PHOSPHORUS ALLOY AND ALL OTHER JOINTS SHALL BE BRAZED WITH SILFOS-5 ALLOY. c. ALL ELBOWS ARE TO BE LONG RADIUS TYPE. 3. INSTALLATION a. REFRIGERANT PIPE SIZING SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE HVAC SUPPLIER. CONTRACTOR WILL PROVIDE A SCHEMATIC PROPOSED LAYOUT OF THE SYSTEM INCLUDING ALL ELBOWS, RISES, RUNS, ETC., WITH DIMENSIONS. THE HVAC SUPPLIER WILL THEN PROVIDE WRITTEN DOCUMENTATION OF PIPE SIZES AND ADDITIONAL REQUIRED SYSTEM COMPONENTS TO THE FIELD. b. SUCTION LINES SHALL HAVE ADEQUATE UFT TRAPS AND/OR DOUBLE SUCTION RISERS TO MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF FIELD CONDITIONS AND EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. c. BRAZE ALL JOINTS WITH SILFOS-5 STARTING AT THE INDOOR UNIT AND WORKING TOWARD THE OUTDOOR UNIT. THE SEALS ON THE OUTDOOR UNIT SHALL BE BROKEN LAST• A NITROGEN BLEED SHALL BE USED DURING ALL BRAZING AND ANY TIME THE SYSTEM IS OPEN. ALL OPEN LINES SHALL BE CAPPED AND SEALED 0 E BEF RE L AVING -THE SITE DURING CONSTRUCTION. PRESSURE TEST FOR LEAKS WITH AN INERT GAS UP TO 245 PSIG. REDO LEAKING JOINTS AND RETEST UNTIL SYSTEM IS TIGHT. EVACUATE ENTIRE SYSTEM TO 200 MICRONS OF MERCURY. CHARGE SYSTEM WITH 5 PSI OF R-41 OA AND AN INERT GAS TO 245 PSI AND RETEST SYSTEM. ENERGIZE CRANK CASE HEATERS 24 HOURS PRIOR TO STARTING COMPRESSOR TO ENSURE THAT ALL REFRIGERANT LIQUID IS OUT OF THE COMPRESSOR. d. UPON COMPLETION OF TESTING, BUT BEFORE THE REFRIGERANT PIPING INSULATION IS APPLIED, THE PIPING MUST BE INSPECTED BY A REPRESENTATIVE OF THE LOCAL GOVERNING AUTHORITY AS NECESSARY. e. INSULATE THE REFRIGERANT SUCTION LINES AND CONDENSATE LINES AS SPECIFIED HEREIN. f. PROVIDE UL/ULC LISTED FIRE STOPPING SYSTEM AROUND ALL PIPING PENETRATIONS THROUGH RATED WALLS. PENETRATIONS SHALL MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF UL/ULC DETAILS WL1001 (UNINSULATED WALL) AND WL5039 (INSULATED WALL). 4. INSPECTION a. CONTRACTOR MUST PREPARE AND SUBMIT A COMPLETE PIPING SCHEMATIC TO THE LOCAL MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO BEGINNING INSTALLATION. UPON COMPLETION OF PIPING, THIS CONTRACTOR MUST CALL THE LOCAL REPRESENTATIVE FOR FIELD INSPECTION OF WORK PERFORMED. ALL ITEMS FOUND TO BE INADEQUATE FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE BY MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVE MUST BE CORRECTED. THIS INSPECTION IS PERFORMED AT LSD&C EXPENSE. ECTION 233100: HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS METAL DUCTWORK 1. NO FIBERGLASS DUCT ALLOWED (RETURN AIR GRILLE BOOTS MAY BE DUCT BOARD WHERE ALLOWED BY LANDLORD). 2. NO DUCTWORK SHALL BE FABRICATED PRIOR TO JOB SITE VISIT AND APPROVAL BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. A SHOP DRAWING MUST BE SUBMITTED INDICATING CONSTRUCTION METHODS FROM DESIGN AND MUST BE APPROVED BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. 3. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE INDICATED, FABRICATE AND INSTALL RECTANGULAR AND ROUND DUCTWORK WITH GALVANIZED STEEL, IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA "HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS" OF THE LATEST EDITION. WHERE OTHER CODES ARE ENFORCED, (1 E. UMC, BOCA, ETC.) USE THE MOST STRINGENT CODE FOR DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS. 4. EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED, CONSTRUCT DUCT SYSTEMS TO THE FOLLOWING PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS: a. SUPPLY DUCTS: 2" W.G., POSITIVE b. RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCTS: 2" W.G., NEGATIVE EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INDICATED, USE DUCT SEALANTS OF THE FOLLOWING PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS: c. SUPPLY DUCTS: CLASS B - 3" W.G. d. RETURN AND EXHAUST DUCTS: CLASS C - 2" WG. IN ACCORDANCE WITH THESE CONSTRUCTION AND SEALANT PRESSURE CLASSIFICATIONS, MAXIMUM DUCT AIR LEAKAGE WILL NOT EXCEED 5% AS REQUIRED FOR FINAL AIR BALANCE APPROVAL. 4. ROUND DUCTWORK SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL WITH SPIRAL LOCKSEAM CONSTRUCTION FOR ALL SIZES 14" DIAMETER AND LARGER. ROUND DUCTWORK SIZES 13" DIAMETER AND SMALLER MAY BE SNAP -LOCK CONSTRUCTION. ALL SNAP -LOCK SEAMS SHALL BE SEALED AS DESCRIBED IN THESE SPECIFICATIONS. ROUND FITTINGS SHALL BE GALVANIZED STEEL WITH SPOT WELDED AND BONDED CONSTRUCTION. 5. ROUND SPIRAL GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK MAY BE USED IN PLACE OF RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK IN HORIZONTAL APPLICATION WHEN ABOVE CEILING CLEARANCES PERMITS AND EQUIVALENT FREE AREA IS MAINTAINED, WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTION; ALL SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK WITHIN 15 FEET OF THE AIR HANDLER MUST BE RECTANGULAR AND INTERNALLY LINED. ONCE A TRANSITION IN THE DIRECTION OF THE AIRFLOW TO SPIRAL HAS BEEN DONE, DUCT WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO REVERT TO RECTANGULAR. WHERE ROUND DUCT SUBSTITUTION WILL TAKE PLACE, SUBMIT A SKETCH AND CHART SHOWING EQUIVALENT ROUND CONVERSIONS OF RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK TO LSD&C PROJECT MANAGER'S FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR INSTALLATION. 6. INSTALL FACTORY MANUFACTURED DOUBLE THICKNESS TURNING VANES IN RIGHT ANGLE ELBOWS IN MAIN DUCT PER LATEST EDITION OF SMACNA. 7. INSTALL RIGID ROUND AND RECTANGULAR METAL DUCT WITH SUPPORT SYSTEMS INDICATED IN SMACNA STANDARDS. SUPPORT HORIZONTAL DUCTS WITHIN 2 FEET OF EACH ELBOW AND WITHIN 4 FEET OF EACH BRANCH INTERSECTION USING DOUBLE STRAP HANGERS ON EACH SIDE OF FITTING. SUPPORT VERTICAL DUCTS AT A MAXIMUM INTERVAL OF 16 FEET AND AT EACH FLOOR. NO WOOD SHALL BE USED TO SUPPORT OR BRACE DUCTS. PROVIDE SWAY AND SEISMIC BRACING AS REQUIRED BY STATE/PROVINCE AND LOCAL CODES OR BY LANDLORD. 8. WHERE DUCTS PASS THROUGH ROOFS AND FLOORS, PROVIDE AS MINIMUM 1 -1/2"X1 -1/2"X1/8" STEEL ANGLE FRAMES AT EACH SIDE OF OPENING. THE ANNULAR SPACE BETWEEN DUCT AND ANGLE FRAMES SHALL BE CAULKED WITH SILICONE SEALANT OR FIREPROOFED AS REQUIRED BY ASSEMBLY FIRE RATING. 9. ALL JOINTS AND SEAMS SHALL BE SEALED WITH 2" WIDE, GLASS -FIBER -FABRIC REINFORCED TAPE. JOINTS ALSO SHALL BE RIVETED OR CONNECTED WITH SHEET METAL SCREWS. LIQUID SEALANTS BY UNITED MCGILL CORP., DOW CORNING, MIRACLE ADHESIVES AND SUREBOND INC. WILL BE ACCEPTED IN LIEU OF TAPE. 10. SOFT ELASTOMER BUTYL GASKET WITH ADHESIVE BACKING SHALL BE USED TO SEAL FLANGED JOINTS. 11. DUCT TRANSITIONS SHALL NOT EXCEED 30 DEGREES SLOPE EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE. 12. PROVIDE ACCESS TO ALL MOTORIZED DAMPERS, FIRE DAMPERS, CONTROLS, AND OTHER ITEMS IN DUCTWORK THAT REQUIRE SERVICE OR INSPECTION. IF THE ACCESS PANEL LOCATION IS EXPOSED TO THE SALES AREA, IT MUST BE APPROVED BY LSD&C'S PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. IN HARD CEILINGS, LAY -IN SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS WITH PLASTER FRAMES MAY BE USED AS ACCESS LOCATIONS WHEN WITHIN 3'-0" OF DEVICE. 13. ALL DUCTWORK SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH INSIDE CLEAR DIMENSIONS AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. WHERE DUCTWORK SIZE IS LARGER THAN CONNECTED DEVICE (IE. VAV BOX, DIFFUSER, REGISTER) SMOOTH DUCT TRANSITIONS ARE TO TAKE PLACE JUST PRIOR TO DEVICE CONNECTION. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAIL MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCT 1. WHERE DUCTWORK IS SPECIFICALLY NOTED AS MEDIUM PRESSURE, IT SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA STANDARDS FOR A PRESSURE RATING OF 4 INCHES WATER COLUMN MINIMUM OR GREATER AS REQUIRED BY LANDLORD. 2. ALL GAUGES AND REINFORCEMENT MUST MEET WITH THE LATEST EDITION OF SMACNA STANDARDS FOR MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCT AND WITH THE LANDLORD'S CRITERIA. 3. CONNECTIONS TO THE LANDLORD'S MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK SHALL BE MADE WITH "LO -LOSS" SADDLE TEE TAPS OR AS OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY THE LANDLORD. 4. ALL OTHER ITEMS FROM METAL DUCTWORK SPECIFICATION SECTION APPLY TO THIS SECTION, WITH THE EXCEPTION THAT ALL MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK MUST BE WRAPPED WITH INSULATION, NOT LINED. ECTION 233300: AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS 1. FLEXIBLE COLLARS SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED IN ALL CONNECTIONS BETWEEN VIBRATING EQUIPMENT (FANS, AIR HANDLERS, ETC.) AND DUCTS OR CASINGS. ALSO, FURNISH AND INSTALL FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS WHERE DUCTS CROSS BUILDING EXPANSION JOINTS. 2. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED OF NEOPRENE -COATED FLAMEPROOF FABRIC. PROVIDE ADEQUATE JOINT FLEXIBILITY TO ALLOW FOR MOVEMENT AND PREVENT THE TRANSMISSION OF VIBRATION. FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT 1. FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT SHALL BE 1" INSULATED CLASS 1, UL/ULC LISTED AND RATED FOR THE OPERATING PRESSURE OF THE SYSTEM. DUCT CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL (PLASTIC, CLOTH, ALUMINUM) MUST ADHERE TO LOCAL CODES AND LANDLORD'S REQUIREMENTS AND BE INCLUDED AS SUCH IN THE BID. 2. FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT SHALL BE ATTACHED PER. DETAILS ON THE DRAWINGS. FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT MAY ONLY BE USED IN VERTICAL APPLICATIONS. 3. FLEXIBLE DUCT SHALL NOT EXTEND OVER 8'-0" IN LENGTH AT ANY ONE LOCATION. WHERE LANDLORD HAS SHORTER LENGTH RESTRICTIONS, COMPLY WITH LANDLORD REQUIREMENTS. . SUPPLY AIR TAKE -OFF FITTINGS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL CONICAL, TAPERED OR 45 DEGREE SADDLE TAKEOFFS FROM MAIN DUCTWORK TO ROUND BRANCHES. INSTALLATION SHALL BE PER SMACNA LATEST EDITION. . DAMPERS 1. WHERE DESIGNATED, FURNISH AND INSTALL ROUND BALANCING DAMPERS. PROVIDE MINIMUM 20 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL FRAME AND BLADES WITH MINIMUM 3/8" SQUARE STEEL AXLE, AND MOLDED SYNTHETIC BEARINGS (EQUIVALENT TO RUSKIN MODEL MDRS25) WITH MANUAL LOCKING POSITION REGULATOR WITH STANDOFF (EQUIVALENT TO DURO DYNE MODEL KR). 2. WHERE DESIGNATED, FURNISH AND INSTALL RECTANGULAR VOLUME DAMPERS. PROVIDE MINIMUM 16 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL CHANNEL FRAME, 16 GAUGE GALVANIZED STEEL BLADES, MINIMUM 1/2" HEXAGONAL AXLE, MOLDED SYNTHETIC BEARINGS, WITH 3/8" SQUARE PLATED STEEL CONTROL SHAFT (EQUIVALENT TO RUSKIN MODEL CD35). MAXIMUM BLADE WIDTH SHALL NOT EXCEED 6". LINKAGES SHALL BE CONCEALED IN THE FRAME. CONTROL SHAFT SHALL EXTEND BEYOND FRAME AND DUCT COVERING TO A LOCKING QUADRANT WITH ADJUSTABLE LEVER (EQUIVALENT TO DURO DYNE MODEL K-4) WITH STANDOFF. 3.OPERATING HANDLES ON ALL DAMPERS SHALL BE TAGGED WITH A MINIMUM 18" LONG ORANGE MARKER TAPE AND SHALL BE INSTALLED FAR ENOUGH AWAY FROM DUCT TO ENSURE IT FULLY AND COMFORTABLY CLEARS THE INSULATION WHEN TURNED. 4. WHERE ACCESS TO BALANCING DAMPER IS RESTRICTED, A REMOTE DEVICE, MANUALLY OPERATED SHALL BE USED. UNITS SHALL BE ORDERED THREE WEEKS BEFORE INSTALLATION TO ALLOW FOR DELIVERY LEAD TIME. FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS 1. FURNISH AND INSTALL PRIMARY FIRE DAMPERS WHERE INDICATED OR REQUIRED BY CODES. DAMPERS SHALL BE DESIGNED VERTICAL FLOW OF AIR AS REQUIRED. FIRE DAMPERS SHALL BE UL/ULC LABELED AND MEET ALL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 2. FIRE DAMPERS SHALL HAVE THE BLADES OUT OF THE AIRSTREAM AND A 165 DEGREE F FUSIBLE LINK, TYPE B, AS MI ACCESS DOORS AS NECESSARY. .�,'��� u, 3. FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL NECESSARY FRAMING AND SLEEVES FOR DAMPER MOUNTING PER UL/ULC AND CODE REQUIREMENTS. .Q 4. FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS SHALL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED WITH ELECTRIC POWERED MECHANISM. COORDINATE VTH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS QNTAL OR M -Engineering 750 Brooksedge Blvd. Westerville, Ohio 43081 phone: 614.839.4639 fax: 614.839.2222 www. mengineering. us. com SEP 1 4 2011 z 0 F- U Ct z 0 U z _0 W 0 W O F - Mit' M ti O s O1- r -O SI co E LL J W N � a Z x= W W C C Y W � a N x O o 0 �005Q N W ,- � U O U � � W lLr W Q U d a 7 Z N 0 01 acooz Z W a U o U O Z N Z - W U' Q C 0 z - w z o=omS 0 Q W O '� C W W 1 Z d H � N N W d O U � W - W W W W 0 O 3 W 1 fn N N 0- N Z V, W 0 O 4! 2 Z azo � 4 m tr N W Z wxso V'3ao W �Q�aW N o 2 Z W Z 2 a � N O K O U H t N W W 0 O W Z O W aI-C)a1 Z c 3 W N ^ = U 0 Q J Z W Z N N W � _ N�Kzx 0 � ni Q W , _ 2 S Z C H f J ~ O 0 = W �'W Z N w 3 = 0 L W ~ S 4Qao0- W U Z Z� y � m O Z o3ax-' O m N DO a W W O 0- U d W U O W U U U :'O 0W.. Z C !!! Q 0 C N W a 0 0 W Zc',4== y O W W 1- C U W 0- 1- mw=x,. W W m W N C O O W N 3 ee o 0 0 4 G Z O N U N 'Q 0 K 0- N > c.x. U W W Y O_ 1- W 2 r Q C Q N O Q a UOQ= Z 0 C) 1= W C U O O a O 1- O o \ 1- W Z W Z �a0=a r w W U d O • O N O N I COi y N H Q Q O U V- Z Q N C W r N U W W O m x aoazZo O U W 4 Z H x O C O u1 =oo• WB i rU,�r W O K- Z 4 0 3 = o to JON y O W j S W U � Vl H F- p U ZS W W Z= Z OCo W = V Q J N Q ~ U-' U 0 W W it U N J H W 7 Q x H N Z 3 3 3 p o _� wzviL .t C! 0 H Y W Z U d U K m? w, W- U F=- Q Z • W N n EC ■ � W DC U w Q O H V ■ 0 PROJECT INFORMATION: J J Q Ix W I - Z W I- O U) to ccoo Y Y O) U Z O O�� (1) 0 w I- w Cx REVISIONS: REQUIRED BY: DATE CITY OF TUKWII A PERMIT CENTER DATE ISSUED: DESIGNED BY: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: 09/15/17 GMT GMT BMM MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS DRAWING NUMBER: